M560 - Man. Operacion PDF

EXPRESSPLUS
Operators Manual
2000 Bayer Corporation.

All rights reserved.
107098 Rev. B, 1/2000
DEC is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.

664 Fast 4 is a trademark of Bayer Corporation.
IBM is a trademark of International Business Machine Corporation.
All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual or the products that it describes may be
reproduced by any means, or in any form, without prior written
consent from Bayer Corporation.
Printed in the U.S.A.
The information in this manual was correct at the time of printing.
However, Bayer Corporation continues to improve products and
reserves the right to change specifications, equipment, and
maintenance procedures at any time without prior notice.
Contents-1
Contents
Page
Preface
Preface-1
1 Using This Manual
1-1
About This Section
1-3
Who Should Read This Manual
1-3
How to Find the Information
1-4
Conventions Used in This Manual
1-5
Special Terms Used in This Manual
1-6
Labels Used on the System
1-7
Other Express Plus Documents
1-8
2 Understanding the Express Plus
2-1
About This Section
2-3
Intended Use
2-3
System Features
2-4
Bar Code Features
2-4
Reagent Carryover Reduction Feature
2-5
Dilution and Rerun Features
2-5
Data Management Features
2-6
Express Plus Subsystems: Principles of Operation

Sample and Reagent Transport Subsystem
2-8
2-9
Fluid Subsystem
2-12
Cuvette Subsystem
2-17
Photometer Subsystem
2-20
Communications Subsystem
2-22
Contents-2
Contents (Continued)
Page
Express Plus Subsystems: Principles of Operation (Continued)
User Interface Subsystem
Moving Through the Software
2-24
2-32
Screen Zones
2-34
Express Plus Programs
2-35
Operational Sequence
3 Understanding the System Calculations
2-37
3-1
About This Section
3-5
Calculating Absorbance
3-6
Blanks and Zero Calibrators
3-8
Polychromatics
3-8
Monochromatics
3-9
Common Bichromatics
3-9
Sample Blanking
3-9
Monochromatic Absorbance Check
3-10
Data Selection
3-11
Substrate Depletion
3-11
Outlier Rejection
3-11
Calculating Response Values
3-13
Kinetic Test Type
3-13
Endpoint Test Type
3-15
Two-Point Test Type
3-15
Contents-3
Page
3 Understanding the System Calculations (Continued)

Calibration Methods
3-17
Linear Curve Types
3-17
Nonlinear Curve Types
3-22
Two-Point Normalization
3-26
Qualitative Curve Type
3-27
Summary of Curve Types
3-28
Summary of Error Flags and Calibration Failures
3-29
Calibration Failures
3-30
Normalization or Reblanking Failures
3-30
Summary of Automatic Reruns
3-31
Summary of Control Rules
3-33
How the Express Plus Uses Control Rules
3-33
1-2s Rule
3-34
1-3s Rule
3-34
2-2s Rule
3-34
4-1s Rule
3-34
10x Rule
3-35
Using a Combination of Control Rules
3-35
Sample Interpretation
3-37
Special Considerations for Q.C. Statistics
3-40
Contents-4
Page
4 Understanding the Express Plus Programs
4-1
About This Section
4-3
Using the Main Menu Programs
4-3
Worklist Program
4-7
Patient Results Program
4-11
Calibration Data Program
4-14
Q.C. Statistics Program
4-21
Definitions Program
4-32
Options Program
4-49
Diagnostics/Maintenance Program
4-57
Load Alternate Program
4-64
5 Setting Up the Express Plus
5-1
About This Section
5-3
Setting or Modifying Options
5-5
Selecting Definitions Program Options
5-11
Defining, Modifying, or Erasing Test Definitions
5-12
Defining Test Parameters
5-14
Defining Profiles
5-24
Defining Control Values
5-26
Defining Controls
5-27
Defining Calibrators
5-30
Defining Blanks
5-33
Contents-5
Page
5 Setting Up the Express Plus (Continued)

Backing Up the Data Files
5-37
Restoring the Data Files
5-41
6 Operating the Express Plus
6-1
About This Section
6-5
Operating Summary
6-5
Operating the Express Plus
6-7
Starting Up
6-11
Priming the System
6-13
Preparing the Worklist
6-14
Erasing a Stored Worklist
6-14
Reviewing Calibration Status
6-15
Scheduling Samples in the Worklist
6-16
Entering Patient Demographics
6-20
Modifying the Worklist
6-21
Printing the Worklist
6-22
Loading the Sample Trays
6-23
Loading the Reagent Tray
6-24
Verifying System Conditions
6-25
Verifying Reagent Loading
6-26
Starting the Run
6-29
Installing the Next Sample Tray(s)
6-30
Loading Stats or Single Samples During a Run
6-31
Reviewing Scheduled Samples
6-33
Contents-6
Page
6 Operating the Express Plus (Continued)

Automatically Rerunning and Diluting Samples
6-34
Manually Rerunning and Diluting Samples
6-36
Correcting Errors During a Run
6-37
Reviewing Run-time Results
6-39
Using the Patient Results Program
6-43
Reviewing Sample Results
6-43
Editing Sample Results
6-45
Printing Sample Results
6-47
Shutting Down
6-51
7 Using the Calibration Data and Q.C. Statistics Programs 7-1

About This Section
7-5
Defining Calibration Parameters
7-7
Defining Calibration Concentrations
7-8
7-10
Automatically Normalizing or Reblanking a Stored Curve
7-13
Managing Curve Data
7-14
Waiving an Expired Curve
7-16
Reviewing Run-Time Error Flags for Calibrators
7-17
Selecting Controls and Control Rules
7-21
Viewing or Modifying QCSystems Codes
7-24
Viewing Q.C. Data
7-26
Contents-7
Page
7 Using the Calibration Data and Q.C. Statistics Programs

(Continued)
Viewing Q.C. Plots
7-28
Modifying Q.C. Data
7-30
Viewing Summary Statistics
7-33
Printing Q.C. Data Reports
7-35
Printing a QCSystems Report
7-39
Reviewing Run-time Error Flags for Controls
7-41
Deleting Data from the Q.C. Database
7-44
8 Using the HELP and STATUS Programs
8-1
About This Section
8-3
Using the Help Program
8-3
Using the Status Program
8-5
Using System Details
8-8
Using Reagent Status
8-11
Using Sample Status
8-14
Using Pending Status
8-17
Using Communications Status
8-20
9 Maintaining the Express Plus
9-1
About This Section
9-3
Performing Preventive Maintenance Tasks
9-4
Understanding the Hazards
9-5
Cleaning the System Cabinet and Screen
9-6
Cleaning the Sample Integrity Tray
9-7
Cleaning the Probe Tip
9-8
Contents-8
Page
Performing Preventive Maintenance Tasks (Continued)
Performing a Precision Check
9-9
Cleaning the System Tubing
9-12
Cleaning the Fan Filters
9-14
Replacing the Wash and Waste Pump Tubing
9-16
Replacing the In-Line Filter
9-19
Cleaning the Digital Diluter Syringe
9-21
Performing Corrective Maintenance Tasks
9-26
Replacing the Lamp
9-27
Replacing the Fuses
9-31
Replacing and Calibrating the Probe Tip
9-32
Replacing the Digital Diluter Syringe
9-37
Filling the Water Bath
9-43
Replacing Printer Paper
9-45
Backing Up Data, System Calibration, and Program Files
9-46
Restoring Data or System Calibration Files
9-50
Resetting the System
9-52
10 Troubleshooting the Express Plus
10-1
About This Section
10-3
What to Do in Case of Trouble
10-4
Finding Status and Error Messages
10-5
Using the Status Program to Troubleshoot
10-11
Correcting System Status and System Detail Errors
10-13
Contents-9
Page
10 Troubleshooting the Express Plus (Continued)

Correcting Reagent Status Errors
10-44
Reagent Status Calibration Failures
10-47
Reagent Status Normalization and Reblanking Failures
10-47
Correcting Sample Status Errors
10-48
Using Pending Status
10-52
Correcting Communications Status Errors
10-53
Correcting Run-time Errors
10-60
Correcting Error Conditions
10-64
Starting Up After a Power Failure
10-68
Starting Up After a Fatal Disk Error
10-70
Appendixes
A Glossary
A-1
B Safety Summary
B-1
C Service and Supplies
C-1
D Accessories and Options
D-1
E Specifications
E-1
F LIS Communications
F-1
G Relocation Instructions
G-1
Index
Index-1
Contents-10
Figures
Page
2-1
Express Plus
2-8
2-2
Sample Transport Components
2-10
2-3
Primary Sample Tube Tray and Sample Tray Cover
2-11
2-4
Reagent Tray and Transport
2-11
2-5
Wash and Waste Pumps and In-Line Filter
2-12
2-6
Distilled Water Bottle and Waste Bottle
2-13
2-7
Digital Diluter, Solenoid Valve, and Syringe
2-14
2-8
Probe Assembly
2-16
2-9
Cuvette Handling Components
2-18
2-10 Cuvette Waste Drawer and Biohazard Liner
2-19
2-11 Optical Assemblies
2-21
2-12 Communication Subsystem Components
2-22
2-13 Communication Ports (Right, Side Panel)
2-23
2-14 User Interface Subsystem Components
2-24
2-15 Floppy Disk Drive
2-26
2-16 Express Plus Function Keys and Cursor Keys
2-26
2-17 Express Plus Fixed-Function Keys
2-27
2-18 System Keys, Paper Advance Key, and System Printer
2-28
2-19 Screen Zones
2-34
2-20 Software Map for the Express Plus
2-35
2-21 Probe and Fluid Path
2-37
2-22 Cuvette Path
2-39
Contents-11
Figures (Continued)
Page
3-1
Outlier Rejection
3-12
3-2
Flowchart of Control Rule Evaluations
3-36
3-3
Control 1 Results
3-39
3-4
Control 2 Results
3-39
4-1
Main Menu Screen
4-3
4-2
Main Menu Programs and Functions
4-5
4-3
Worklist Program Map
4-7
4-4
Patient Results Program Map
4-11
4-5
Calibration Data Program Map
4-14
4-6
Q.C. Statistics Program Map
4-22
4-7
Definitions Program Map
4-33
4-8
Definitions/Tests/Parameters Screen (Defined Test)
4-35
4-9
Definitions/Profiles/Selection Screen (Example)
4-36
4-10 Definitions/Control/Limits Screen (Example)
4-37
4-11 Definitions/Calibrator/Concentrations Screen (Example)
4-38
4-12 Definitions/Blanks/Selection Screen (Example)
4-39
4-13 Options Program Map
4-49
4-14 Diagnostics/Maintenance Program Map
4-57
4-15 Precision Check Screen (Example)
4-59
4-16 Diagnostics Maintenance/Lamp Alignment Screen
4-60
4-17 Diagnostics Maintenance/System Version Screen (Example)
4-61
4-18 Diagnostics Maintenance/Probe Tip Calibration Screen
4-62
4-19 Load Alternate Program Map
4-64
4-20 Load Alternate Program Screen
4-64
Contents-12
Figures (Continued)
Page
5-1
Options/System Options Screen With Default Values
5-5
5-2
Options/Printing Options Screen (Example)
5-7
5-3
Options/Test Order Screen (Example)
5-9
5-4
Definitions/Tests Screen
5-12
5-5
Definitions/Tests/Parameters Screen (Defined Test)
5-14
5-6
Definitions/Tests (Ratio)/Parameters Screen
5-15
5-7
Definitions/Tests (Off-System)/Parameters Screen
5-15
5-8
Definitions/Tests/Reagents Screen (Example)
5-17
5-9
Definitions/Tests/Assay Order Screen (Example)
5-18
5-10 Definitions/Tests/Calibrator Concentrations Screen

(Example)
5-19
5-11 Definitions/Tests/Controls Screen (Example)
5-20
5-12 Definitions/Tests/QCSystems Screen
5-22
5-13 Definitions/Profiles Screen (Example)
5-24
5-14 Definitions/Profiles/Selection Screen (Example)
5-25
5-15 Definitions/Controls Screen (Example)
5-27
5-16 Definitions/Control/Limits Screen (Example)
5-29
5-17 Definitions/Calibrators Screen (Example)
5-30
5-18 Definitions/Calibrator/Concentrations Screen (Example)
5-31
5-19 Definitions/Blanks Screen (Example)
5-33
5-20 Definitions/Blanks/Selection Screen (Example)
5-34
5-21 Options/Disk Options Screen
5-39
6-1
Fixed Function and Cursor Keys
6-8
6-2
System Keys and Paper Advance Key
6-8
6-3
Startup Screen
6-11
6-4
Preparing the System
6-12
Contents-13
Figures (Continued)
Page
6-5
Worklist/Tests Screen (Example)
6-14
6-6
Sample Loadlist (Example)
6-22
6-7
6-24
6-8
Verifying Conditions and Supplies
6-25
6-9
Reagent Loading Screen (Example)
6-26
6-10 Worklist/Tests Screen (Example)
6-31
6-11 System Status/Pending Status Screen (Example)
6-33
6-12 System Status Screen (Example)
6-37
6-13 System Status/System Details Screen (Example)
6-38
6-14 Run-Time Report for Routine Samples (Example)
6-39
6-15 Patient Results Screen (Example)
6-43
6-16 Collated Patient Report (Example)
6-49
6-17 End-of-Day Cleaning
6-52
7-1
Definitions/Tests/Parameters Screen (Example)
7-8
7-2
Definitions/Tests/Calibrator Concentrations Screen

(Example)
7-9
7-3
Calibration Data Screen (Example)
7-10
7-4
Calibration Data/Parameters Screen (Example)
7-11
7-5
Calibration Data/Data Screen (Example)
7-14
7-6
Reagent Loading Screen (Example)
7-16
7-7
Run-Time Report (Calibrator and Error Log)
7-17
7-8
Definitions/Tests/Controls Screen (Example)
7-22
Contents-14
Figures (Continued)
Page
7-9
Definitions/Tests/QCSystems Screen
7-24
7-10 Q.C. Statistics/Data Screen (Example)
7-26
7-11 Q.C. Statistics/Levey-Jennings Screen (Example)
7-28
7-12 Q.C. Statistics/Data/Details Screen (Example)
7-30
7-13 Q.C. Statistics/Summary Statistics Screen (Example)
7-33
7-14 Q.C. Statistics/Data Screen with Print Functions (Example)
7-35
7-15 Example of Q.C. Data Report (F2 Test Excluded)
7-37
7-16 Example of a Levey-Jennings Report (F2 Control)
7-38
7-17 Q.C. Statistics/QCSystems Screen (Example)
7-39
7-18 QCSystems Report (Example)
7-40
7-19 Run-Time Report (Control Log and Error Log) (Example)
7-41
8-1
Help Screen for Main Menu/Patient Results
8-4
8-2
Status Program Map
8-5
8-3
System Status Screen (Example)
8-6
8-4
System Status/System Details Screen (Example)
8-8
8-5
System Details Options Map
8-8
8-6
System Status/Reagent Status Screen (Example)
8-11
8-7
Reagent Status Options Map
8-11
8-8
System Status/Sample Status Screen (Example)
8-14
8-9
Sample Status Options Map
8-15
8-17
8-11 Pending Status Options Map
8-18
8-12 System Status/Communications Status Screen (Example)
8-20
8-13 Communications Status Options Map
8-21
9-1
Cleaning the Probe Tip
9-8
Contents-15
Figures (Continued)
Page
9-2
Precision Check Screen (Example)
9-9
9-3
Precision Check Result (Example)
9-11
9-4
Front Panel
9-12
9-5
Fan Filter (Right, Side Cover)
9-14
9-6
Fan Filter (view from system back cover)
9-15
9-7
Pump Cover Location
9-16
9-8
Wash and Waste Pump Tubing
9-17
9-9
Stretching the Pump Tubing
9-18
9-10 Removing the Probe Cover
9-19
9-11 In-Line Filter
9-20
9-12 Removing the Top, Front Cover
9-21
9-13 Digital Diluter Syringe
9-22
9-14 Adjusting the Syringe
9-23
9-15 Installing the Top, Front Cover
9-25
9-16 Installing the Probe Cover
9-25
9-17 Preparing for Lamp Replacement
9-27
9-18 Lamp Assembly
9-28
9-19 Adjusting the Lamp
9-30
9-20 Fuseholder Location
9-31
9-32
9-22 Moving the Probe Up
9-33
9-23 Removing the Probe Tip
9-34
9-24 Installing a New Probe Tip
9-35
9-25 Probe Tip Calibration Screen
9-36
9-26 Probe Calibration Constants Report (Example)
9-36
Contents-16
Figures (Continued)
Page
9-37
9-28 Removing the Top, Front Cover
9-38
9-29 Digital Diluter Syringe
9-39
9-30 Adjusting the Syringe
9-40
9-31 Installing the Top, Front Cover
9-41
9-32 Installing the Probe Cover
9-41
9-33 Filling the Water Bath
9-44
9-34 Installing the System Printer Paper
9-45
10-1 System Status Screen (Example)
10-11
10-2 System Status/System Details Screen (Example)
10-13
10-3 Correcting Cuvette Status Errors
10-22
10-4 System Status/Reagent Status Screen (Example)
10-44
10-5 System Status/Sample Status Screen (Example)
10-48
10-52
10-7 System Status/Communications Status Screen (Example)
10-53
G-1
Preparing the System for Relocation
G-7
G-2
Removing the Bottles and Cuvette Waste Drawer
G-7
G-3
Installing Caps in the Water Bath Vent Holes
G-8
G-4
Connecting the Cables
G-9
G-5
Installing the Reagent Tray
G-11
G-6
Installing the Sample Tray
G-12
G-7
Replenishing the Supplies
G-13
Contents-17
Tables
Page
2-1
Sample and Reagent Transport Subsystem Components
2-9
2-2
Fluid Subsystem Components
2-12
2-3
Cuvette Subsystem Components
2-17
2-4
Photometer Subsystem Components
2-20
2-5
Communications Subsystem Components
2-23
2-6
User Interface Subsystem Components
2-25
2-7
System Key Functions
2-29
2-8
Guidelines for Moving Through the Software
2-32
2-9
Screen Components and Fixed-Function Keys
2-33
2-10 Status Zone Information
2-34
3-1
3-28
3-2
Error Flags for a Rate and/or Response
3-29
3-3
Error Flags for a Result
3-30
3-4
Automatic Reruns
3-31
3-5
Automatic Dilution and Rerun
3-32
6-1
Fixed-Function and Special Keys
6-7
6-2
System Key Functions
6-9
6-3
Automatic Reruns
6-34
6-4
Automatic Dilution and Rerun
6-35
6-5
Run-Time Report Flags for Routine Samples
6-40
7-1
Corrective Action: Schedule and Run the Calibrators
7-18
7-2
Corrective Action: Determine Cause of Error, Modify

Data, then Rerun Curve
7-19
7-3
Calibration Error Flags and Corrective Actions
7-20
7-4
Run-time Error Flags for Controls
7-42
Contents-18
Tables (Continued)
Page
9-1
Express Plus Preventive Maintenance Schedule
9-2
Fuse Ratings
10-1 Status and Error Messages
9-4
9-30
10-5
10-2 System Details Status Messages
10-14
10-3 System Status Errors
10-19
10-4 Reagent Status Errors and Flags
10-45
10-5 Sample Status Errors and Flags
10-49
10-6 Communications Status Messages and Errors
10-54
10-7 Run-time Report/Error Flags (All Sample Types)
10-60
10-8 Using System Keys to Correct Errors During Operation
10-65
10-9 Correcting General Error Conditions
10-66
C-1
Replacement Parts
C-5
C-2
Operator Service Kit Parts
C-6
C-3
Ordering Supplies
C-7
C-4
Ordering Accessories and Options
C-8
F-1
Communication Protocols
F-4
F-2
Pin Layout for Enabled Pins
F-5
F-3
Software Setup Options
F-6
G-1
Fuse Ratings
G-5
Preface-1
Preface
This manual accompanies your Express Plus cinical chemistry
system and serves two basic functions:
The first function of this manual is to teach new operators the
principles, correct operation, and preventive maintenance of

the Express Plus.
The second function of this manual is to provide ongoing
support for all operators of the Express Plus. For example,

this manual provides answers to detailed questions and also
provides troubleshooting information.
The first four sections of this mahual provide reference
information about the principles, calculations, and programs of
the Express Plus. Sections 5 through 9 provide step-by-step
instructions for operating the Express Plus. For complete
information about how to use this manual, refer to Section 1,
Using This Manual.
Revision B of the Express Plus Operators Manual was issued
January 2000.
This manual contains the following sections and appendixes:
Section 1
Using This Manual
Section 2
Understanding the Express Plus
Section 3
Understanding the System Calculations
Section 4
Understanding the Express Plus Programs
Section 5
Setting Up the Express Plus
Section 6
Section 7
Using the Calibration Data and Q.C. Statistics

Programs
Section 8
Using the HELP and STATUS Programs
Section 9
Maintaining the Express Plus
Section 10
Troubleshooting the Express Plus
Appendix A
Glossary
Appendix B
Safety Summary
Appendix C
Service and Supplies
Appendix D
Accessories and Options
Appendix E
Specifications
Appendix F
LIS Communications
Appendix G
Relocation Instructions
Preface
Using This Manual
1-1
1 Using This Manual
Page
About This Section
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-2
Using This Manual
Using This Manual
1-3
About This Section

This section explains how to use your Express Plus Operators
Manual, which is shipped with your Express Plus and contains
reference information about the Express Plus and procedures for
operating, troubleshooting, and maintaining the system.

This manual contains information written for clinical laboratory
professionals to:
learn about the Express Plus hardware and software
customize system parameters and test parameters
perform daily operating tasks
maintain system files
perform system maintenance and troubleshooting
1-4
Using This Manual

This manual contains 10 major tabbed sections, plus 7
appendixes. Use this chart to find the information that you need:
If you want to . . .
Refer to section . . .
learn about the Express Plus features
2 Understanding the Express

Plus
learn about the Express Plus hardware,

software, or operating sequence

Plus
learn about the Express Plus test and

calibration calculations
3 Understanding the System

Calculations
learn how the Express Plus performs

control rule evaluations
3 Understanding the System

Calculations
learn about the Express Plus programs

Plus Programs
customize installation (system) options,

printing options, or test definitions for
your laboratory
use the Express Plus to perform your

routine, daily operating tasks
manage your calibration data and

quality control (Q.C.) statistics, and
print Q.C. reports
7 Using the Calibration Data

and Q.C. Statistics
Programs
use the Help program to obtain online

instructions for operating the system
8 Using the HELP and

STATUS Programs
use the Status program to troubleshoot

errors or obtain status information
8 Using the HELP and

STATUS Programs
perform routine and corrective

maintenance for the Express Plus
9 Maintaining the Express

Plus
find the meaning and corrective actions

for a Status error message
10 Troubleshooting the
Express Plus
correct a system error or problem
10 Troubleshooting the
Express Plus
learn the meaning of an unfamiliar

word used in this manual
Appendix A
Glossary
contact Bayer Diagnostics to order

supplies or obtain service for your
Express Plus
Appendix C
Service and
Supplies
interface your Express Plus to an

Laboratory Information System (LIS)
Appendix F
LIS
Communications
move your Express Plus to a new

location
Appendix G
Relocation
Instructions
Using This Manual
1-5

This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify
meaning in the text. Other conventions, such as symbols, are
used to help you identify the kind of information. This chart
explains the conventions used in this manual:
When you see . . .
Then . . .
all capital, italic letters in the

text, such as ENTER
press the key on the Express Plus

keyboard or the system key on the
front panel of the system that has
the label you see in the text
bold type in the text:

with a function key designation,
such as F1 Worklist
press the matching function key on

the system keyboard
describing a screen field or

value (Test Name or Gluc_HK),
or an error message (Error
detected Press Status)
this is the name of a field, a field

value, or a message that shows on
the system screen
WARNING
read the statement next to the

symbol. The statement is alerting
you to an operating hazard that can
cause personal injury.
BIOHAZARD

you to a potentially biohazardous
condition.
CAUTION

you to a possibility of product
damage or loss of data.
NOTE

you to information that requires
your attention.
1-6
Using This Manual

In the text of this manual and on the Express Plus screen you will
read some special terminology related to your activities at the
Express Plus. This chart explains the meaning of those special
terms:
When you read . . .
It means . . .
type
to use the system keyboard to enter information

or data on the screen
scan
to pass the optional, hand-held bar code wand

across the printed bar codes on the Test
Scheduler, patient request, or primary sample
tube, to enter information requested by the
system
select
to make a choice from the available options by

moving the cursor to the option and pressing the
SELECT key
selected
the screen field described in the text is a selected

field. When you move the cursor to a field,
which shows on the screen as underlined, then
press SELECT, the field becomes a selected field.
highlighted
(reverse video)
the screen field described in the text is a selected

field. When you move the cursor to some fields
and press SELECT, the fields become highlighted
(dark text on a box of amber background) to
show that you selected the field. This is also
referred to as reverse video.
removed
the screen field described in the text is no longer

a selected field. When you move the cursor to a
highlighted or selected field, then press SELECT,
that field no longer shows on the screen as dark
text on an amber background, or as underlined.
This indicates that the item is no longer selected.
Using This Manual
1-7

The labels attached to some system panels use symbols with the
text to clarify the meaning of the text. This chart explains the
symbols used on the labels:
When you see . . .
It means . . .
alternating current (AC)
protective conductor terminal
Warning: risk of electrical shock
Warning: risk of personal injury or equipment

damage (refer to your Express Plus Operators
Manual)
Biohazard Warning: risk of potentially

biohazardous infection
ON (Mains supply)
OFF (Mains supply)
Fuse
Keyboard
Bar Code Wand (Hand-held)
Printer
Water
This symbol indicates the system meets the
EMC Directive of the European Union.

specifications of the Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.
1-8
Using This Manual

The Express Plus Operators Manual is part of the Express Plus
document set that is shipped with your system along with your
other user documents. Use the following chart to find
information that you need from the other Express Plus user
documents in the set:
If you need . . .
Then refer to . . .
a quick reference procedure for an

operating or maintenance task, or
a quick reference for troubleshooting an error message
Express Plus Quick Reference

Guide
a reagent application for a routine

chemistry for the Express Plus*
Express Plus Applications Guide
a therapeutic drug monitoring

(TDM) application or a drug of
abuse in urine (DAU) application
for the Express Plus*
Express Plus TDM/DAU

Applications Guide
(accompanies only the Express Plus
Drug Monitoring System)
procedures for installing (or

re-installing) the Express Plus
program software
Express Plus Software Installation

Instructions
* If you need additional information about a Bayer Diagnostics

reagent that you use on the Express Plus, refer to the product
insert that accompanies each reagent kit.
Using This Manual
1-9
Other Express Plus Documents (Continued)

Additional Express Plus user documents are shipped as part of
optional hardware accessory kits or software option kits.
Appendix D, Accessories and Options, in this manual, provides a
place for you to keep any addenda that you receive as part of a
hardware accessory or software option kit.
Use the following chart to find the information you need from
optional Express Plus user documents:
If you need . . .
Then refer to . . .
detailed information for writing an

interface protocol for interfacing
the Express Plus to a peripheral
device (for programmers)
Express Interface Specifications

Manual
detailed procedures for using the

Communications software option
and configuring your Express Plus
for communications
Express Communications Manual

and Express Plus Communications
Enabling Disk Instructions
(shipped with the
Communications software option)
detailed procedures for using the

sample tube tray, hand-held bar
code wand, and Test Scheduler
Express Plus Positive Sample

Identification (PSID) Addendum
(shipped with the Positive Sample
Identification software option)
detailed procedures for connecting

and using the external printer with
the Express Plus
Express Plus External Printer

Addendum
(shipped with the Express Plus
External Printer hardware option)
(shipped with the

Communications software option)
Using This Manual
2-1
2 Understanding the Express Plus
Page
About This Section
2-3
Intended Use
2-3
System Features
2-4
Bar Code Features
2-4
Reagent Carryover Reduction Feature
2-5
Dilution and Rerun Features
2-5
Data Management Features
2-6
Express Plus Subsystems: Principles of Operation

Sample and Reagent Transport Subsystem
2-8
2-9
Fluid Subsystem
2-12
Cuvette Subsystem
2-17
2-20
2-22
2-24
Hardware Accessories and Software Options
2-30
2-32
Screen Zones
2-34
2-35
2-37
2-2
2 Understanding the Express Plus (Continued)

This section of the manual explains the various subsystems and
components of the Express Plus, like the hardware and software,
and explains how the system uses them to assay samples. Use this
chart to find the information that you need in this section.
If you want to learn . . .
Refer to . . .
about the Express Plus capabilites
Intended Use
about the Express Plus features
System Features
how the Express Plus uses its various

subsystems and components
Express Plus Subsystems:

Principles of Operation
about the sample and reagent

transports and how they handle
samples and reagents loaded on the
system
Sample and Reagent Transport

Subsystem
about the fluid subsystem and how it

aspirates and dispenses samples and
reagents, as well as moving other
fluids through the system
Fluid Subsystem
about the cuvette subsystem and how

it handles the cuvettes
Cuvette Subsystem
about the photometer subsystem and

how it measures reaction mixtures
and calculates results
about the communications subsystem

and how it manages the internal
system data
about the user interface subsystem

and how its components form a
communication link between you and
the Express Plus
about the hardware accessories and

software options that you can
purchase for your Express Plus
Hardware Accessories and

Software Options
how the Express Plus software works,

and how you can move through the
software to perform tasks
about the programs and functions

available on the Express Plus
how the Express Plus uses its

subsystems and components to assay
samples
2-3
About This Section

This section provides background information about how the
Express Plus operates and information to help you understand
and use the Express Plus hardware and software.
Intended Use
The Express Plus is a clinical chemistry system that measures and
quantitates concentrations of chemistry analytes in serum or
urine. The system is intended for use by clinical laboratory
professionals.
The Express Plus has the following system capabilities:
assays up to 180 tests per hour for single-reagent applications
accepts up to 26 reagents on-board at one time
allows you to load and assay stat patient samples and controls
allows you to enter requests for up to 360 samples and 48 tests
allows random-access and batch testing
automates pipetting and diluting samples and reagents, and
washing probes and tubing

uses a built-in bar code reader to scan reagents loaded on the
reagent tray
allows you to enter test requests from the keyboard, by using
an optional, hand-held bar code wand, or by downloading the

requests from a Laboratory Information System (LIS)
monitors and reports quality control data and statistics for up
to six controls per test

automatically dilutes and reruns samples, when required
provides online assistance through the integrated Help
program
provides current information about the operating status of the
system through the integrated Status program

provides real-time or collated printing of all results obtained
by the system
provides user interface software languages as a user-selectable
option
allows communication from three RS-232 ports
2-4
System Features
The Express Plus uses extensive software functions for system
setup and verification, automated dilution and rerun of samples,
and data management. These major system features contribute to
the efficiency and ease of use of the Express Plus. The following
paragraphs explain these features of your system.
Bar Code Features
The Express Plus offers two bar code features. These features
reduce the sample and reagent identification errors by
eliminating or minimizing keyboard entry of information about
samples, reagents, and tests.
The bar code features include the reagent bar code scanner and
the optional, hand-held bar code wand and Test Scheduler.
Reagent Bar Code Scanner
The reagent bar code scanner is provided as standard hardware
on the Express Plus. The reagent bar code scanner allows the
system to verify reagent loading, reagent positions on the reagent
tray, and reagent bottle types before the start of each run.
Optional Bar Code Accessories
The optional, hand-held bar code wand and Test Scheduler are
provided as part of the Positive Sample Identification software
option. This option allows you to schedule samples and tests
with minimal keyboard entry, reducing typing errors and the
possibility of incorrect patient identification.
The bar code wand and Test Scheduler allow:
entry of requests into the worklist without typing at the
keyboard
control of sample placement on the sample tray
aspiration of samples directly from the patients primary
sample tubes
association of a unique bar-coded request number with the
patient sample, and association of patient results with the

corresponding bar-coded sample tube
Reagent Carryover
Reduction Feature
2-5
The Express Plus can automatically wash probes and tubing

between the use of reagents that chemically interfere with one
another. This automated feature reduces the amount of reagentto-reagent carryover between tests. The system uses reagent or
system-distilled water to perform the number of wash cycles that
you define to occur between the interfering tests.
The Express Plus can use one or two wash cycles of reagent or
distilled water between tests. If you need to wash with a loaded
reagent, the system uses the reagent from the reagent tray to
minimize operator intervention during the run. If you need to
wash with water, the system automatically uses the distilled water
from the distilled water bottle to wash between interfering tests.
Dilution and Rerun

Features
The Express Plus offers automatic or manual dilution and rerun

features. You maintain control of the automatic operation by
defining a dilution rerun value in the test definition. You can
modify the defined rerun dilution ratio as required. You can
also manually dilute and rerun samples.
Automatic Dilutions and Sample Reruns
The Express Plus automatically dilutes and reruns samples
according to parameters that you define for each test. The
system automatically reruns any samples with results that are
above the concentration limit, or above or below the absorbance
limits that you define for the test, and automatically corrects the
result for the rerun dilution ratio.
If a sample requires dilution and rerun, the Express Plus
performs an automatic dilution according to the rerun dilution
ratio that you define for the test. The rerun dilution ratios you
can use are 1, 2, 5, or 10, depending upon the defined sample
volume for the test.
For example, if you define a rerun dilution of 1:2 for a test that
uses a 30 L sample volume, the system uses 15 L of sample, or
half the defined sample volume, to rerun the test.
If you have a test that uses a sample volume of 6 L, you cannot
use a rerun dilution ratio of more than 1:2, because the smallest
sample volume the digital diluter can use is 3 L. Any other
ratio would require a sample volume smaller than 3 L. In this
case, you can manually dilute the sample before you load it on
the system, then manually correct the result for the dilution.
To obtain more information about appropriate dilution ratios for
the tests you assay on the Express Plus, contact the
Bayer Diagnostics Technical Assistance Center.
2-6
Dilution and Rerun

Features
(Continued)
Manual Dilutions and Sample Reruns

You can manually dilute samples that the Express Plus cannot
dilute automatically due to sample volume restrictions. If you
manually dilute a sample and load it on the sample tray, you
must then multiply the printed result by the appropriate dilution
factor to obtain the corrected result.
If an error flag prints with an automatic rerun result, you can
manually rerun that sample again. If the sample was diluted for
its first rerun, the Express Plus automatically dilutes the sample
before its manual rerun. You can also manually rerun samples
that did not have error flags associated with their results.
Data Management
Features
The Express Plus offers a variety of flexible data management

features. Some of the major features that offer flexibility in data
management are:
the printed results reports and error flags that print on those
reports
the quality control program, its control rule evaluation

methods, and the associated quality control reports
the ability to back up and restore all data files on the system
Results Reports
The Express Plus offers several options for printing patient
results and other results. Two kinds of result reports are
available: run-time reports or collated patient reports. Refer to
Section 5, Setting Up the Express Plus, for more information
about setting the options for your run-time and collated reports.
A run-time report contains the results for an individual test run
for a sample (for example, a Glucose HK result for sample
number 20). This report prints on the system printer or optional
external printer as the system calculates the result at the time of
the run. You can set the printing options for the run-time
reports and modify the option settings as required. Run-time
reports can include any combination of the following data:
patient results, calibration and control results, and/or result
(error) flags that print with the result and provide added
information about the result.
A collated patient report contains the results for all tests run for
a sample. This report can also include demographic information
about the patient. After the tests are completed for a sample,
you can instruct the Express Plus to print the collated report for
that sample. You can set the printing options for the collated
report to include routine samples and/or Stat samples, to contain
a customized report heading, and to print on the system printer
or optional external printer.
Data Management
Features
(Continued)
2-7
Online Quality Control (Q.C.)

The Express Plus maintains an online quality control database of
cumulative data for up to six different controls per test. The
system calculates and maintains actual and lifetime summary
statistics for each control and test combination in the database.
The Q.C. Statistics program provides different data formats that
you can select to view Q.C. data:
the Data screen shows your Q.C. data in a tabular format
the Levey-Jennings screen shows the data on a Levey-Jennings
plot
the Summary Statistics screen shows the expected, actual, and
lifetime cumulative statistics for all of the controls defined for

a test
The stored data includes control results (data), statistics, and
Levey-Jennings plots, each of which are also available as printed
reports. The Q.C. Statistics program uses control rule analysis to
interpret and evaluate the Q.C. data at the time of the run. If a
control result violates a control rule that you define for the test
and control, the system flags the result on the run-time report.
An additional feature of this program is the Automatic Test
Shutdown option. When you enable this option, the system can
automatically stop assaying a test if the defined control rules are
violated.
Refer to Section 7 subtab, Defining Control Values/Managing
Q.C. Data, for more information about the Q.C. Statistics
program features.
Sample and Reagent

Transport Subsystem
2-9
The sample and reagent transport subsystem identifies and

positions samples and reagents for testing. Table 2-1 explains
the sample and reagent transport subsystem components:
Table 2-1. Sample and Reagent Transport Subsystem Components
Component
Description and Function
Primary Sample Tube

Tray
the 20-position, optional sample tray, shown

in Figure 2-3, that holds and positions
centrifuged patient samples in their primary
sample tubes. The primary sample tube
tray can hold the following tube sizes:
13x75, 13x100, 16x75, or 16x100mm.
Sample Integrity Tray
the 40-position circular tray, shown in

Figure 2-2, that holds samples in plastic,
disposable sample cups and rotates each
sample to the sample aspiration position
during testing.
Sample Transport
an electromechanical device, shown in

Figure 2-2, that rotates the sample tray.
The sample transport has a molded base
that houses a motor assembly, a drive hub,
and a printed circuit board. The printed
circuit board has three optical detectors for
sensing the position of the sample transport.

Cover
an amber, plastic cover that fits over the

sample tray, as shown in Figure 2-2. This
tray cover contains a felt material that,
when moistened, helps maintain the
integrity of the samples by reducing sample
evaporation.
(Continued on the next page)
NOTE
If you want to use standard sample cups for

controls and calibrators on the primary sample
tube tray, order primary sample tube inserts (part
number 1453x215 by calling Bayer Diagnostics at
1-800-255-3232.
Fluid Subsystem
2-15
Table 2-2. Fluid Subsystem Components (Continued)
(Continued)
Component
Probe
the assembly, shown in Figure 2-8, that aspirates,

dilutes, and dispenses samples and reagents. The probe
comprises the following assemblies:
an aspiration tip consisting of a stainless steel tube
that holds the fluid, and a copper sleeve that

surrounds the stainless steel tube and preheats the
fluid. A fluid-level detector lead is also attached to
the copper sleeve.
a fluid-level detector wire senses the resistance
between the fluid level and the aspiration tip when

the aspiration tip and fluid-level detector wire are
immersed in fluid.
a fluid-level detector lead provides the electrical
connection between the fluid-level detector wire and
the probe body.
the probe body contains a coiled tube about 890 mm
(35 inches) long, surrounded by a temperaturecontrolled water chamber. A molded housing

encloses and insulates the water chamber.
an inlet port and an inlet/outlet port on the molded
housing at the top of the probe body. The inlet port
is used for the aspiration tubing and the coaxial
inlet/outlet port is used for the water bath.
a probe safety guard, which is a molded plastic cover
attached to the probe body. The safety guard
extends over the aspiration tip and fluid-level
detector wire to help protect you from puncture
wounds in a potentially biohazardous area.
a probe thermistor in the probe body senses the
temperature of the fluid in the probe water
chamber.
WARNING
The probe tip and fluid-level detector wire are

sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise
caution when working around the probe without
the probe cover or probe safety guard installed.
BIOHAZARD
To prevent biohazard contamination, always

wear gloves, goggles, and appropriate protective
clothing when you work around or in the area
of the probe.
Cuvette Subsystem
2-17
The cuvette subsystem positions and preheats the cuvettes in the

system, then uses the preheated cuvettes to hold the reaction
mixtures in the light path for measurement. Table 2-3 describes
the cuvette subsystem components:
Table 2-3. Cuvette Subsystem Components
Component
Cuvette Strips
the strips of disposable, molded acrylic, each

consisting of five connected cuvettes, shown
in Figure 2-9, that hold the reaction mixture
in the light path for measurement.
Cuvette Magazine
a disposable cartridge, shown in Figure 2-9,

that inserts 13 cuvette strips into the cuvette
feeder.
Cuvette Feeder
the device, shown in Figure 2-9, that moves

the cuvette strips into the cuvette track.
The cuvette feeder holds up to 39 cuvette
strips (3 rows of 13 strips, or 195 cuvettes).
Cuvette Preheater
an insulated, aluminum chamber, shown in

Figure 2-9, that heats or cools five cuvette
strips before they enter the cuvette track.
The cuvette preheater maintains the
temperature of the cuvettes at 30 or 37 C.
Cuvette Track
an insulated, aluminum chamber, shown in

Figure 2-9, that incubates the reaction
mixtures in the cuvettes at 30 or 37 C.
The cuvette strips move in the track from
the preheater to the read station, then to the
dispense station where the probe dispenses
the preheated reaction mixtures into the
cuvettes. The cuvettes continue to move
back and forth in the track until the
polychromator measures all of the reaction
mixtures in the cuvette strip.
Cuvette Edge Detector
an electronic device that senses the edge of

each cuvette well in a cuvette strip at the
read station, and triggers the polychromator
to begin measuring the reaction mixtures
contained in the cuvettes.
2-20
The Express Plus photometer subsystem obtains photometric

data and determines the absorbance of the reaction mixtures.
Table 2-4 explains the photometer subsystem components:
Table 2-4. Photometer Subsystem Components
Component
Photometer Board
a printed circuit board that uses the following

assemblies to measure, at two wavelengths, the
amount of light that a sample transmits:
a photodiode array produces a current
proportional to the amount of light that falls

onto the array from a reaction mixture
(incident light). The diode array produces
current at the following wavelengths: 340, 380,
405, 510, 540, 570, and 600 nm. A mask and
filters cover the diode array elements and
reduce stray light so that only a specific
wavelength of light strikes each element.
seven photometer channels and an output
buffer on the photometer board amplify and

convert the signal from the photodiode array
into a frequency that the software uses to
calculate absorbance data. The output of each
photometer channel is a frequency related to
the diode array current. The output buffer
transmits all of the output signals from the
photometer channels and makes these signals
available to the controller.
Optics
the optical assemblies, shown in Figure 2-11,

provide, disperse, and focus the radiant energy
required to measure samples. The optical
assemblies are:
a quartz halogen lamp that provides radiant
energy to travel through the light path.

a polychromator that comprises the imaging
optics and holographic grating, and disperses

the radiation to produce polychromatic light.
imaging optics that focus the light. A plano
convex lens focuses the light from the quartz

halogen lamp into the center of a cuvette
containing a reaction mixture. A biconvex lens
then focuses the light that exits from the
cuvette into the entrance slit of the
polychromator. The light strikes a concave,
holographic grating, which focuses and
disperses the spectrum of light across the
photodiode array on the photometer board.
2-22
Communications
Subsystem
The Express Plus communications subsystem components, shown

in Figure 2-12, form a communication link among the various
parts of the Express Plus. Figure 2-12 shows the component
interactions within the communications subsystem and with
other subsystem components (the solid lines in Figure 2-12
indicate the communications subsystem components; the dotted
lines indicate components of other subsystems). These
communication subsystem components collect, verify, process,
and manage system data. Table 2-5 explains the
communications subsystem components.
Refer also to the next section, User Interface Subsystem, for
information about the optional bar code wand, Test Scheduler,
and external printer.
Figure 2-12. Communication Subsystem Components
Screen
Probe Board
Floppy Disk Drive
Track Board
Keyboard
Transport Boards
System Keys
Bar Code Wand
Reagent Bar Code

Scanner
RS-232 Ports
Hard Disk Drive
Central
Processing
Unit
(CPU)
Photometer Board
External Printer
Parallel Port
Rev. B 1/2000
User Interface
Subsystem
2-25
Table 2-6 describes the components of the the user interface

subsystem:
(Continued)
Table 2-6. User Interface Subsystem Components
Component
Screen
a cathode ray tube (CRT), shown in Figure 2-14,

that shows the program information in text or
graphic formats and prompts you to take
operational actions. The screen is a nine-inch,
diagonal CRT with text in amber on a dark
background.
Floppy Disk Drive
a drive, shown in Figures 2-14 and 2-15, that uses

3 -inch floppy disks to store and retrieve
calculations, parameters, calibrations, and results.
The CPU transfers data from the floppy disk to
Random Access Memory (RAM). When data is
collected and calculated, you can move the data to
a floppy disk for storage. The floppy disk drive
has an eject pushbutton that opens the drive for
disk removal and a drive indicator that illuminates
when the disk drive accesses the floppy disk to
read or write information on that disk.
Keyboard
an alphanumeric keyboard, shown in Figures 2-14,

2-16, and 2-17, used to select programs and
commands, and enter data into the system. The
system uses the following keys on the keyboard:
function keys (F1 through F8), shown and
described in Figure 2-16, are used to select

software options that show on the screen. The
functions associated with the function keys vary
with each screen.
four cursor keys, shown in Figure 2-16, are
used to move the cursor on the screen from

one screen field to another.
fixed-function keys, shown and described in
Figure 2-17, are dedicated keys used to perform

specific system functions.
System Keys
the keys located on the front panel of the system

that you use to start, stop, or pause operations.
System keys are shown in Figure 2-18 and
described in Table 2-7.
Paper Advance
Key
the key shown in Figure 2-18 that moves the

printer paper through the system printer.
System Printer
a 40- or 80-column thermal printer, shown in

Figure 2-18, that prints parameters, tests, data,
and reports.
NOTE
For more information about using the system

keys and the paper advance key, refer to
Section 6, Operating the Express Plus.
User Interface
Subsystem
(Continued)
2-29
Table 2-7. System Key Functions

Press . . .
st rt
To . . .
start the testing sequence from the beginning, or
resume testing that you previously stopped or paused.
When you press START, the Express Plus:
primes the lines if you filled the distilled water
bottle
verifies the system operating temperatures
goes to the Warming Up or Running state
identifies the reagents on the reagent tray
waits for you to verify reagent loading
information, then starts the tests in the worklist

stop
stop the testing sequence. When you press STOP, the

Express Plus:
stops dispensing the samples and reagents
stops measuring the reaction mixtures that are
dispensed into cuvettes

erases any test results that are not completed
stops system operations
waits for you to restart the tests in the worklist
p use
interrupt operations at the next available stopping

point. When you press PAUSE, the Express Plus:
stops dispensing new tests after completing the test
in progress, dispenses the reagents for multireagent tests, then stops all dispensing operations
continues measuring reaction mixtures that contain
samples
waits for you to press START to resume assaying
tests at the point of interruption
2-30
Hardware Accessories
and Software Options
The following hardware accessories and software options are

available for the Express Plus:
External Printer
The Express Plus external printer is an optional hardware
accessory. The external printer is a stand-alone, dot-matrix
printer. For specific setup and operating details, refer to the
operating manual for your external printer.
The external printer is used to print worklists, run-time reports,
patient reports, quality control reports, and test results on a
collated patient report. The external printer connects to the
parallel printer port at the right side of the system. The printer
configuration is set by Bayer Diagnostics Field Service
Engineers at the time of installation.
For more information, refer to the Express Plus External Printer
Addendum, shipped with your external printer.
Positive Sample Identification Software Option

The Positive Sample Identification (PSID) Option is required for
using the bar code wand, primary sample tube tray, and Test
Scheduler for positive sample identification. These components
allow you to scan a bar code label on a primary sample tube and
enter the patient request into the worklist without using the
keyboard. The system associates the results for a sample with the
bar code label on the primary sample tube. You can also scan
the test requests from bar codes printed on the Test Scheduler.
The optional bar code wand, shown in Figure 2-14, and the Test
Scheduler can:
scan and schedule bar-coded patient samples
scan and schedule bar-coded tests, profiles, calibrators,
controls, and blanks defined for the Express Plus, which allows
for faster, more efficient worklist scheduling
enter data and select options without using the keyboard,
which helps eliminate typing errors

For more information, refer to the Express Plus Positive Sample
Identification (PSID) Addendum, shipped with the software
option kit.
Hardware Accessories
and Software Options
(Continued)
2-31
Communications Software Option

This software option is required for communicating between a
host Express Plus and any of the following peripheral devices:
a remote Express Plus
a Bayer Diagnostics 664, Fast 4 System
an external computer, such as a Laboratory Information
System (LIS)
For information about cabling, configuring the ports, enabling the
software option, and programming for communications, refer to
the following documents that are shipped with the
communications software option:
Express Plus Communications Enabling Disk Instructions
Express Interface Specifications Manual
To order accessories or software options, call Bayer Diagnostics.
Refer to Appendix C, Service and Supplies, for
Bayer Diagnostics addresses and telephone numbers for
placing your orders.
2-32

The Express Plus uses extensive software functions to collect data
and communicate with you. The software is designed so that you
can easily access information and perform required tasks. The
Express Plus software uses the following software components:
programs
A program is a top-level software component that presents you

with a list of related functions called a menu. The Express
Plus software has eight programs in its Main Menu.
menus
A menu is a list of options available within a program. You

select the option you need from a menu on the screen.
Making a selection from a menu can cause a new menu or a
function screen to show on the screen.
screens
A screen is a page of information that shows on the system

screen. This information can be data to review, information to
enter, or tasks to perform. Screen zones are components used
at each screen. Refer to Screen Zones for more information.
fields
A field is an area on a screen where you can enter data or

make a selection for the associated option.
prompts
A prompt is an instruction that shows on the screen and

explains what to do to perform an action or to show another
screen.
To move through the software, follow the general guidelines
explained in Table 2-8. You will also use the screen components
and keys described in Table 2-9 to move through the software.
Table 2-8. Guidelines for Moving Through the Software
If . . .
Then . . .
a menu shows on
the screen
press the function key that corresponds to the

option you need
a screen shows
without a blinking
cursor
press a function key to select the corresponding

option
a screen shows with

a blinking cursor
use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the

required field, then type an entry or press
SELECT to place or remove the highlighting
(reverse video) or underlining from a screen field
or option
2-33
Moving Through the Software (Continued)

You can use the screen components and fixed-function keys
described in Table 2-9 to move around the screens and move
through the Express Plus software. Refer to Figure 2-17 for the
locations of the fixed-function keys on the Express Plus
keyboard.
Table 2-9. Screen Components and Fixed-Function Keys
Component or Key
Reverse Video
a text attribute that shows dark text on a field of

amber background to enclose a field that you
selected, such as a calibrator concentration
Cursor
a blinking horizontal bar that shows your position

on a screen
Cursor Keys
the four arrow keys that you use to move the

cursor in the required direction on a screen (left,
right, up, or down) to access screen fields or
options
SELECT
the toggle key that either places or removes the

reverse video or underlining from a screen field
or option
TAB
the key that moves the cursor from one screen

field to the next, going across the screen from left
to right
ENTER
the key that accepts the entries or selections that

you make at a screen
EXIT
the key that moves the software to another screen

and causes any entries or modifications to store in
system memory
CANCEL
the key that allows you to stop a function that

you selected to use, and returns any field entries
to the values that were shown before you began
the function
MAIN MENU
the key that moves you to the Main Menu screen

from anywhere in the software
2-34
Screen Zones
The operating information that shows on each screen is grouped

into five categories. Each category always shows in the same
screen position or zone as shown in Figure 2-19. Table 2-10
explains the information that shows in the Status zone.
Figure 2-19. Screen Zones
STATUS ZONE
shows the systems operating status, date, time,
and the number of used cuvettes. Refer to
Table 2-10 for more information.
31-MAR-1992
15:11
Definitions
PROGRAM ZONE
shows the information or program that you can
select from the current screen.
FUNCTION KEY ZONE

shows the functions or actions that are available at
the current screen. Key labels F1 through F8 vary
as the screens change.
Cuvettes Used: 120

Maximum: 195
Error detected
Press Status
Test Name: Glucose

Test Bar Code:015
Test: Gluc_HK
Test Type: Endpoint

Units: mg/dL
Curve Type: Blanked Linear

No. of Decimal Places: 0
Primary Wavelength: 340 nm

Read Time/Interval: 20
Factor:
Secondary Wavelength: 380 nm

Sample Blank? No
Tests
PLACEKEEPING ZONE
shows where you have moved in the software, from
the Main Menu selection to where you are now.
PROMPT ZONE
shows the prompts and messages that explain what
you should do or what the system requires.
Status:
Warming Up
Parameters
Review data, then

modify if
required.
Calibration Interval: 72 Hours

Normalization/Reblanking Interval: 8 Hours
No. of Calibrators: 3
No. of Replicates: 2
Press <EXIT> to
store definition
or review another
test.
F1
Low Blank A Limit: -0.100

Low A Limit: 0.000
Low Normal: 65
Linearity Limit: 750
F2 Reagents
High Blank A Limit: 0.250

High A Limit:2.000
High Normal: 110
Curve S.D. Limit: 8.0000
F3 Assay F4 Calib F5 Controls F6 QCSystem

Order
Concs.
F7
F8
Table 2-10. Status Zone Information

This shows . . .
And it means . . .
31-MAR-1992
15:11
this is the current date and time
Status:
the current operating status of the Express Plus:
Warming Up means the system is warming up;

wait until the status is Ready
Ready means the system is ready to operate
Running means the system is assaying tests
Reading means the system has stopped

dispensing and is measuring the cuvettes
Standby means either the voltages to the lamp

are reduced and the water bath is in a standby
state, or the track is in the home position
Diagnostics means you are currently in the

Diagnostics/Maintenance program
Cuvettes Used: XXX

Maximum: 195
the number of used cuvettes and the maximum

number of cuvettes that the waste drawer holds
Error detected
Press Status
the system encountered an error; go to the

System Status screen for details about the error
2-35
The Main Menu contains eight programs (F1 through F8). Each
program has various functions and/or actions that you can select.
Figure 2-20 is a map of the Express Plus programs.
Figure 2-20. Software Map for the Express Plus
Main Menu
F1 Worklist
F2 Patient Results
F3 Calibration Data
Worklist/Tests:
(Patient) Screen
Patient Results
Screen
Calibration Data
Screen
F1
Next Request
F1
Next Request
Previous Request
Previous Request
F2
F3
Find Request
F3
Find Request
F4
Insert Request
F4
Edit Request
F2
F5
F6
F7
F8
Erase Request
F7
Load Sample
F8
Worklist
Calibration Data/
Parameters
Screen
F4 Q.C. Statistics
Q.C. Statistics
Screen
F1
F2
F8
Data
Data
Levey-Jennings
F3
Summary Stats
F8
QCSystem
Calibration Data/
Data Screen
More
F4
Edit
Results
Demographics
F1
F2
F3
F6
F8
Recalculate
Rerun
Accept
Erase
Parameters
2-36
Figure 2-20. Software Map for the Express Plus (Continued)
(Continued)
Main Menu
(Continued)
F5 Definitions
Definitions
Menu
F1
F2
Test
Profile
F6 Options
Options Menu
F1
F2
System Options
Printing Options
F3
Control
F3
Test Order
F4
Calibrator
F4
Communications
F5
Blank
F5
F6
Disk Options
Diagnostics/
F7 Maintenance
Diagnostics/
Maintenance
Menu Screen
Alternate
F8 Load
Program
Load Alternate
Program Screen
Precision Check
F1
F2
Manual Operations
F8
F3
Lamp Alignment
F1
F4
F5
Boot Floppy
More
System Version
Probe Tip Calibration
Reset System
The Express Plus also uses an online Help program that provides
instructions and explanations about screens, screen fields,
function keys, fixed-function keys (such as STATUS or PRINT),
and system keys (such as START or PAUSE).
There is also a Status program, which provides online
information about the operating status of the system, reagents,
samples, and worklist. The Status program is very useful in
troubleshooting and correcting system status errors.
For more information about the Express Plus software, refer to
Section 4, Understanding the Express Plus Programs, and to
Section 8, Using the HELP and STATUS Programs.
2-38
Operational Sequence (Continued)

4. The waste pump moves the waste water from the wash station
to the waste bottle.
5. The probe moves to the aspiration position and the reagent
tray rotates the required reagent bottle into the aspiration
position.
6. As the aspiration tip and fluid-level detector wire move into
the reagent bottle, the electrical resistance between them
changes. The fluid-level detector wire senses the change in
resistance and determines the fluid level, then stops the
downward travel of the probe.
7. The digital diluter controls the volume of reagent that the
probe aspirates from the reagent bottle.
8. The wash pump again moves wash water from the distilled
water bottle through the in-line filter and the solenoid valve,
which then directs the flow of wash water to the wash station
to wash the outer surfaces of the aspiration tip and fluid-level
detector wire. The waste pump then moves the waste water
from the wash station to the waste bottle.
9. The probe moves to the sample aspiration position as the
sample transport rotates the correct sample cup to the sample
aspiration position.
10. The fluid-level detector wire senses the change in resistance
and determines the fluid level in the sample cup, then stops
the downward travel of the probe.
11. The digital diluter controls the volume of sample that the
probe aspirates from the cup.
12. Water from the temperature-controlled water bath moves
from the water bath into the water chamber in the probe
body to keep the probe at a constant temperature of 30 or
37 C. A thermistor in the probe body senses the
temperature of the water in the water chamber.
13. The copper sleeve that surrounds the stainless steel aspiration
tip preheats the reaction mixture, which is now held in the
tip, to the temperature of the water in the water chamber.
2-40
Operational Sequence (Continued)

18. After the defined lag time for the dispensed test elapses, the
cuvette containing the reaction mixture moves along the track
for measurement:
a. As the cuvette moves, the system focuses the light from
the quartz-halogen lamp through the plano convex lens
and into the center of the cuvette.
b. The biconvex lens focuses the light that exits from the
cuvette into the entrance slit of the polychromator.
c. The concave, holographic grating in the polychromator
focuses and disperses the spectrum of light across the
photodiode array on the Photometer Board.
d. The mask and glass filters that cover the photodiode
array elements reduce the stray light and cause only a
specific wavelength of light to strike each element.
e. The photodiode array produces a current proportional to
the amount of light that falls on the array from the
reaction mixture (incident light), and measures (at the
two defined wavelengths) the amount of light that the
reaction mixture transmits.
f.
Each of the seven photometer channels transmit a

frequency that is related to the diode array current. The
photometer channels and output buffer on the
Photometer Board convert the current to an amplified
voltage, which is then converted to a frequency that the
digital counters on the Cuvette Track Controller Board
measure.
g. The output buffer transmits all of the output signals from

the photometer channels to the Cuvette Track Controller
Board.
19. The central processing unit (CPU) uses the programmed test
parameters and the data transmitted from the Cuvette Track
Controller Board to calculate the test result for each reaction
mixture.
20. After the Express Plus measures all the reaction mixtures in a
cuvette strip, the track ejects the cuvette strip into the cuvette
waste drawer.
21. The Express Plus transmits the results to the system printer.
The printer generates the run-time report if you selected to
use that printing option.
3-1
3 Understanding the System Calculations
Page
About This Section
3-5
3-6
3-8
Polychromatics
3-8
Monochromatics
3-9
Common Bichromatics
3-9
Sample Blanking
3-9
3-10
Data Selection
3-11
Substrate Depletion
3-11
Outlier Rejection
3-11
3-13
Kinetic Test Type
3-13
Endpoint Test Type
3-15
Two-Point Test Type
3-15
Calibration Methods
3-17
Linear Curve Types
3-17
Blanked Linear Curve Type
3-20
Limited Linear Curve Type
3-21
Enzyme Linear Curve Type
3-21
3-2
Page
Calibration Methods (Continued)

3-22
1-Logit4 Curve Type
3-24
2-Logit5 Curve Type
3-24
3-Exponential5 Curve Type
3-25
4-Polynomial5 Curve Type
3-25
Two-Point Normalization
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
Normalization or Reblanking Failures
3-30
3-31
3-33
3-33
1-2s Rule
3-34
1-3s Rule
3-34
2-2s Rule
3-34
4-1s Rule
3-34
10x Rule
3-35
Using a Combination of Control Rules
3-35
3-37
3-40
3-3

This section of the manual explains the various system
calculations and internal processes used by the Express Plus
when calculating results, calibration curves, and evaluating
control rules. Use this chart to find the information that you
need in this section.
Refer to . . .
how the Express Plus calculates

sample absorbances
how the Express Plus uses blanks and

zero calibrators
how the Express Plus uses

polychromatics to correct absorbance
readings
Polychromatics

monochromatic absorbance readings
to calculate results
Monochromatics

monochromatic absorbance readings
to calculate results
Common Bichromatics
how the Express Plus corrects for

sample blanking
Sample Blanking
how the Express Plus performs a

monochromatic absorbance check to
verify that readings fall within the
linearity of the system internal
absorbance limits
Monochromatic Absorbance
Check
how the Express Plus uses the

various data selection algorithms to
select subset cuvette readings and
calculate results
Data Selection
Substrate Depletion
Outlier Rejection
how the Express Plus calculates the

response values (delta absorbance)
for each test type
about the various calibration

methods, including normalization
and reblanking, available on the
Express Plus
Calibration Methods
about the various error flags and

calibration failures that the Express
Plus uses while calculating results or
calibrating a test
Summary of Error Flags and

3-4

Refer to . . .
how the Express Plus determines if a

sample will be rerun or diluted and
rerun
how the Express Plus uses the

control rules that you defined for
each test and control to judge
whether the control results represent
the expected or previously observed
performance
How the Express Plus Uses

Control Rules
how the Express Plus uses a

combination of control rules defined
for the same test and control
Using a Combination of
Control Rules
how the Express Plus applies control

rules in a typical test (example)
some special considerations to

remember when using the Express
Plus Q.C. Statistics program
Special Considerations for

Q.C. Statistics
About This Section

This section contains information about the calculations and
internal processes performed by the Express Plus:
absorbance
blanks and zero calibrators
polychromatics
monochromatic absorbance check
data selection
response values
calibration methods
summary of curve types
summary of error flags and calibration failures
summary of automatic reruns
control rules and how they are used
3-5
3-6
Absorbance readings are taken on samples every ten seconds as
the samples move in front of the photometer. As light passes
through the cuvette and sample onto the photodiode, the
photometer circuit generates a current for each wavelength. This
current is inversely proportional to the amount of light absorbed
at each wavelength and is called the sample current.
The sample current readings are taken until the read interval
entered at the Read Time/Interval field on the Definitions/Tests/
Parameters screen, elapses. The readings are then calculated into
a result.
Zero currents are the readings taken when there is nothing
blocking the light source and the photodiode. The zero current
is a reading taken on air. This reading represents zero
absorbance.
After each retrace of the cuvette track, a new zero current for
each wavelength is taken at least once every twenty seconds. If
zero currents cannot be taken, the last set of zero currents are
used.
Absorbance is calculated as:
Abs(x) =
2-Log (%T)
where:
Abs (x) =
the absorbance at a specific wavelength (x)

(this is not a bichromatically-corrected absorbance)
Log
the common logarithm function (base 10)
%T
the percent transmittance at wavelength (x)
Since 2 is the Log (100), the equation becomes:

Abs(x) = Log (100)-Log (%T)
Abs(x)=-Log
%T
100
3-7
Calculating Absorbance (Continued)

In the ideal case, %T is calculated as:
%T=
Sample Current 100

Zero Current
where:
Sample Current
= The electrical output generated by the

photometer when reading the sample at
wavelength (x)
Zero Current
= the electrical output generated by the

photometer at wavelength (x) when the
photometer is fully exposed to the light
source. This current represents 100%T (0%)
absorbance.
Since the ideal case is not usually observed, the equation for %T
requires another term. When the shutter is closed and no light
enters the photometer, there is still a current generated by the
circuit. This current is called the dark current.
During each retrace of the cuvette track, the system takes several
dark current readings at each wavelength, then averages the
readings for each wavelength. The system then subtracts the
average from the sample current and zero current for each
wavelength before it calculates %T as:
%T=
Sample Current -Dark Current 100

Zero Current -Dark Current
where:
Dark Current
= the current reading generated by the

photometer at wavelength (x) when no light
is entering the photometer
3-8
Calculating Absorbance (Continued)

The final equation for absorbance is:
Ln (log base e) is used because the co-processor
does not support log base 10 functions.
NOTE
Absorbance (x)=
Sample Current (x) -Average Dark Current (x)
-Ln
Zero Current (x) -Average Dark Current (x)

-Ln (10)
where:
-Ln
= the negative of the natural logarithm function

(log base e)
Average Dark
Current (x)
= average of the dark current readings at

wavelength (x) produced by the photometer
circuit (occurs when no light hits the
photodiode because the shutter is closed)

The Express Plus treats blanks and zero calibrators the same
during calibrations, but you cannot schedule blanks and zero
calibrators to calibrate the same test. But, if a test uses blanks in
its calibration, you can use zero calibrators instead of blanks.
Regardless of the test type or curve type, the system checks the
low blank absorbance and high blank absorbance of every blank
and zero calibrator replicate. These blank absorbance checks
obtain the average of the absorbances at the primary wavelength
and check the absorbance against the low blank absorbance and
high blank absorbance limits for the test. If the low blank
absorbance and/or high blank absorbance checks fail, a failed
calibration occurs unless you obtain a valid rerun of the failed
blank or zero calibrator.
Polychromatics
The system takes absorbance readings every ten seconds at each
wavelength defined at the Primary Wavelength and Secondary
Wavelength fields on the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen for
a test. If one or two wavelengths are defined and the Sample
Blank? field is set to Yes, the system adjusts the absorbance
readings to yield a single corrected absorbance reading for every
ten seconds in the read interval. The system uses these corrected
absorbance readings for data selection and the remainder of the
result calculations.
3-9
Monochromatics
If a primary wavelength is defined at the Primary Wavelength

field on the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen for a test, and
the Secondary Wavelength field is defined as None, all
absorbance readings used to calculate a result are
monochromatic. The system uses the raw absorbance readings
and does not adjust them unless the Sample Blank? field is set to
Yes.
Common Bichromatics
If a secondary wavelength is selected at the Secondary

Wavelength field on the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen for a
test, the system subtracts the absorbance at the secondary
wavelength from the absorbance at the primary wavelength to
give a bichromatic absorbance reading. This is done for all pairs
of primary and secondary absorbance readings in the read
interval.
For endpoint test types, bichromatics corrects for wavelengthindependent absorbance differences from cuvette to cuvette. For
kinetic test types, absorbance differences between cuvettes affect
results only through the rejection of data for substrate depletion
or absorbance flagging. Bichromatics also corrects for
interferences from substances that have the same absorbances or
rates of change at the primary and secondary wavelengths.
Sample Blanking
Sample blanking is applied after absorbance readings are

calculated for bichromatics. The system uses sample blanking
for multiple-reagent tests only when you select Yes at the Sample
Blank? field on the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen for a test.
The system takes two absorbance readings just before the last
reagent addition. The system then multiplies the average of the
two corrected absorbances by the value in the cuvette (at the
time of the blank reading) and divides that value by the full
reaction volume.
This sample blank offset calculation gives the sample blank
correction. The sample blank correction is then subtracted from
all the absorbances taken in the read time/interval defined at the
Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen for the test.
This equation explains how the system corrects the sample blank
absorbance for the change in volume after adding the last
reagent:
Sample Blank Offset=
Abs1 + Abs2
2
VB
VA
3-10
Sample Blanking
(Continued)
where:
Abs1 =
the corrected absorbance ten seconds before the last

reagent addition
Abs2 =
the corrected absorbance immediately before the last

reagent addition
VB
total volume before last reagent is added
VA
final volume after last reagent is added

The Express Plus uses the monochromatic check on each
monochromatic reading to ensure that the readings fall within the
linearity of the system internal absorbance limits. Points are not
deleted, but a flag is set if any point falls outside of the following
internal limits:
If any reading at the primary or secondary wavelength is
greater than 2.5 A, the High Pr Abs. or High Sc Abs. flag is set.
If any reading at the primary or secondary wavelength is less
than-0.5 A, the Low Pr Abs. or Low Sc Abs. flag is set.
3-11
Data Selection
The Express Plus uses the data selection algorithms to select the
subset of readings taken on each cuvette. The system then uses
these readings to calculate results. Unless the test is
monochromatic, the system corrects all readings by bichromatics
and sample blanking. All testing uses only the readings taken
during the read time/interval defined at the Definitions/Tests/
Parameters screen for the test.
Substrate Depletion
Only kinetic test types go through substrate depletion testing.

The system compares all points to the low absorbance limit and
high absorbance limit for the test. If a point exceeds the low
absorbance limit or high absorbance limit, the system deletes that
point. If more than half of the points are deleted, the system
flags the result as Low absorbance limit exceeded or High
absorbance limit exceeded.
At least two points are required to calculate a rate. If deleting a
point causes less than two points to remain, the system flags the
result as Low or High, does not delete the point, and stops
substrate depletion testing.
NOTE
Outlier Rejection
Low and high absorbance checks are also

performed for endpoint and two-point test types
but these checks are performed differently than
for kinetic test types. Low and high absorbance
checks are performed for endpoint and twopoint test types after outlier rejection on the
average of the absorbances for each read
interval (not on each reading). Refer to
Calculating Response Values for more
information.
The kinetic and endpoint test types go through outlier rejection

testing. Before outlier rejection testing begins, the following is
required:
a kinetic test type has at least four readings (read time is 30
seconds)
an endpoint test type has at least three readings (read time is
20 seconds)
If the minimum number of readings is not met for the test type,
the system does not perform outlier testing. The minimum
number of readings is required since the system uses linear and
quadratic regression to detect the outliers.
3-12
Outlier Rejection
(Continued)
The system does not flag when outlier rejection testing stops
because there are not enough readings. Outlier rejection testing
does stop when the following occurs:
three readings are left for a kinetic test type
two readings are left for an endpoint test type
The system checks each reading against the absorbance versus a

time regression line for an endpoint test type or a parabola for a
kinetic test type. Of all the points that differ from the regression
line (or parabola) by more than four times the standard deviation
of the line (or parabola) or by more than four times the outlier
noise lower limit of 0.001A (whichever is greater), the point that
is farthest from the line (or parabola) is rejected (deleted).
After the system rejects an outlier, it computes the regression and
begins outlier rejection testing again with the first of the
undeleted points. If two or more outliers are rejected, the system
flags the result as Outlier and stops outlier rejection testing.
Refer to Figure 3-1 for an example of outlier rejection. The
dotted line represents a line with an outlier point. The solid line
is the corrected line with the outlier point deleted. Figure 3-1 is
a graphic example of outlier rejection and does not show on the
Express Plus screen.
Figure 3-1. Outlier Rejection
0.5
Line with Outlier
Line After Outlier Rejection
590
600
0.4
Absorbance
0.3
0.2
530
540
560
560
570
Time
580
3-13

The calculations for the kinetic, endpoint, and two-point test
types convert the multiple readings taken at different times into
one response value (delta absorbance). This value is then used in
the remaining calculations. All calculations at this point use the
readings not deleted during data selection unless otherwise noted
in the following paragraphs.
Kinetic Test Type
Linear regression is used to determine the reaction rate

(response) in delta absorbance per minute for a kinetic test type.
The calculation is as follows:
Response=
N XY - X Y
N X2 - ( X)2
where:
N =
number of data points
X =
time value
Y =
bichromatically-corrected absorbance
If there are three or more points, the system uses a quadratic

regression (three-parameter polynomial). This quadratic
regression determines the curvature (nonlinearity) used to flag
the sample as nonlinear. If the rise in absorbance during the
read interval is large compared to the rise in absorbance of the
regression line, the sample is considered nonlinear. The
coefficients of the parabola are:
Y = a2X2 + a1X+a0
The coefficients of the parabola that fit the absorbance versus
time data with a minimum mean square error are determined by
using quadratic regression equations.
If there are four or more points, the Express Plus calculates to
permit flagging of the sample for noise.
3-14
Kinetic Test Type
Nonlinearity and noise are calculated as follows:
(Continued)
Nonlinearity
a2T2
(RT)2+(NMultNoiseSys)2
(Y2)-a2 (X2Y)-a1 XY-a0 Y
Noise =
N-3
where:
R
reaction rate (response)
length of the user-defined read time/interval,

(including points that may have been deleted by
substrate deletion and outlier rejection using the
entire read time avoids reducing the computed
value in proportion to the effective read time)
NMult
value (approximately 36) selected to prevent false

flagging of samples with low reaction rates when the
nonlinear value exceeds its flagging limit
NoiseSys
expected S.D. of the bichromatic readings at the

observed absorbance level (the absorbance level is
the average of the undeleted readings in the userdefined read time/interval)
NoiseSys=
(SDp2+SDs2)
where:
SDp = expected S.D. of the primary wavelength readings at
their average absorbance level
SDs = expected S.D. of the secondary wavelength readings at
their average absorbance level
The flagging limit for noise is two times the system noise. The
flagging limit for nonlinearity is 0.4
NOTE
For a monochromatic test, system noise is equal

to SDp.
Endpoint Test Type
3-15
For an endpoint test type, the values in the user-defined read

time/interval are averaged to determine the mean absorbance
(response). The Express Plus compares this mean absorbance
(response) to the high absorbance limit and low absorbance limit,
then calculates the response as follows:
Response =
Y
N
If the high absorbance limit or low absorbance limit is exceeded,

the system sets the high absorbance or low absorbance flag for
the sample. For three or more readings in the read interval, the
system determines a linear regression line to permit noise flagging
based on the standard deviation of the line.
Noise is calculated as follows:
(Y2)-a2 (X2Y)-a1 XY-a0 Y
Noise =
N-3
where:
Slope
= slope of the linear regression
Intercept = Y (Abs) intercept of the linear regression line

N
Two-Point Test Type
= number of data points
For a two-point test type, there is one reading taken at each read
time/interval defined for the test at the Definitions/Tests/
Parameters screen. The response obtained for a two-point test
type is the difference between the second interval absorbance
and the first interval absorbance. The system calculates the
response as:
Response = Abs Interval2 - Abs Interval1
where:
Abs Interval2
absorbance reading within the read window

for the second interval
Abs Interval1
absorbance reading within the read window

for the first interval
3-16
Two-Point Test Type

(Continued)
The average delta absorbances determined in the response

calculation are not per minute. An average delta absorbance is
the time between two readings.
The system compares each absorbance to the high absorbance
limit and low absorbance limit. If one of the limits is exceeded,
the high absorbance or low absorbance flag is set for the sample.
Calibration Methods
The Express Plus can use any of eight curve types to calculate a
calibration curve. The linear curve type calculations determine
the response versus concentration calibration curve from the
calibrators. The nonlinear curve type calculations use the curve
to quantitate sample concentrations from the responses.
If the acceptance criteria for a linear or nonlinear calibration is
not met, the calibration or normalization is invalid and the curve
is not automatically accepted.
This section explains the following:
linear curve types
reblanking of stored curves
nonlinear curve types
two-point normalizations
qualitative curve types
summary of curve types
Linear Curve Types
The kinetic, endpoint, and two-point response determination

methods can all use linear calibration curves. These linear
calibration curves are determined by running blanks and
calibrators. You can also preprogram a factor and run only
blanks.
The curve types for the three types of linear calibrations are:
blanked linear
limited linear
enzyme linear
The system calculates, in basically the same way, factors and

standard deviations for all three linear curve types. The manner
used to calculate a result is what separates the three calibration
methods.
3-17
3-18
Linear Curve Types

(Continued)
If a blank and only one calibrator are run, the factor is

determined as:
ConcStd
RStd - RBlk
ConcStd=
where:
ConcStd
concentration of the calibrator
RStd
response of the calibrator
RBlk
response of the blank
When using more than one blank and calibrator, the factor is
determined as:
X(Xi - X0)2
X(Xi - X0)(yi -y0)
Response=
where:
Xi =
concentration of the Ith calibrator replicate
X0 =
concentration of the low calibrator
yi
response of the Ith calibrators
y0
average responses of the low calibrator
If there are at least three data points when using two or more
calibrator concentrations or at least two data points when using
one calibrator concentration, the system calculates a standard
deviation of the regression line (residual error). The standard
deviation of the regression line using N-2 is calculated as:
S.D. =
Factor
[ (yi - yi)2]
(N-2)
where:
yi
(yi - yi)2=
N
expected response for concentration Xi

sum of the squares of the differences between the
measured and expected response
Linear Curve Types

(Continued)
3-19
If there are at least three data points when using two or more
calibrator concentrations or at least two data points when using
one calibrator concentration, the system calculates a standard
deviation of the regression line (residual error). The standard
deviation of the regression line using N-2 is calculated as:
S.D. =
Factor
[ (yi - yi)2]
(N-2)
where:
yi
expected response for concentration Xi
(yi - yi)2
sum of the squares of the differences between the

measured and expected response
The system calculates and prints the standard deviation in

concentration units, then checks it against the standard deviation
limit. The factor in the S.D. equation is the absolute value of the
factor. The standard deviation obtained in this equation is
checked against the curve S.D. to verify the goodness of the fit.
The equation uses N-2 when two or more calibrator
concentrations and one blank are used to calibrate the test. The
factor is calculated and three points are required for a standard
deviation or in this case the standard error of estimate. The
N-2 is replaced by N-1 if one calibrator concentration is used.
The factor is preprogrammed and a simple standard deviation is
calculated. The calculated standard deviation is then checked
against the standard deviation limit defined at the Curve S.D.
Limit field on the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen. If the
standard deviation exceeds the limit defined for the test, the
calibration is rejected and flagged as Invalid. If no standard
deviation limit is defined for the test, the system does not check
the standard deviation.
Usually only the specified number of replicates are run. If an
error occurs, the system reruns blank and calibrator replicates up
to twice the number of replicates scheduled. There is no
automatic rerun of good replicates to lower the standard
deviation.
3-20
Blanked Linear Curve Type
The result for a blanked linear curve type is the average of the
reagent blank responses subtracted from the sample response
before multiplying by the factor to give the concentration.
The blanked linear result is calculated as follows:
Result = (Sample Response-Average Reagent Blank)Factor
Reblanking Blanked Linear Curves
The Express Plus can reblank the curve of a test with a blankedlinear curve type. This resets only the intercept of the calibration
curve for the test. It does not affect the slope of the calibration
curve.
A current, valid calibration curve for the test must exist to
initially reblank a test. Once a test is reblanked, it can be
successively reblanked until a full calibration is required for the
test.
The result for a blanked-linear test is the average of the reagent
blank responses subtracted from the sample response before
multiplying by the factor to give the concentration. After the
system performs a full calibration, it calculates the blanked linear
result as follows:
Result = (Sample Response-Average reagent blank)Factor
CAUTION
After reblanking a calibration curve, verify that

the replicate values that print on the run-time
report are appropriate for the test. Since the
Express Plus does not compare replicate values,
inappropriate values can cause inaccurate
results.
After reblanking, the average reagent blank value used in the

calculation is simply replaced by the average of the reblanking
values, while the factor value does not change.
Limited Linear Curve Type
3-21
The result for a limited linear curve type is the average of the
low calibrator replicates subtracted from the sample response
before multiplying by the factor and adding the low calibrator
concentration to the given concentration.
The limited linear result is calculated as:
Result=
Enzyme Linear Curve Type
(Sample response-Average low calibrator response)

Factor+Low calibrator concentration
The result for an enzyme linear curve type is the sample rate
(response) in delta absorbance per minute multiplied by the
factor. For an enzyme linear curve type, the factor is always
user-programmed. The blank is used only as a check of reagent
quality (refer to the Blanks and Zero Calibrators section.) The
enzyme linear result is calculated as follows:
Result = Sample ResponseFactor
NOTE
The endpoint and two-point response

determination methods do not give responses in
delta absorbance per minute. Only a kinetic
response determination gives responses in delta
absorbances per minute.
When you calculate a factor for an enzyme test
that uses an endpoint or two-point test type as
the response determination method, keep the
following in mind to ensure the calculation of
correct test results:
an endpoint response determination method
gives responses in absorbance

a two-point response determination method
gives responses in delta absorbances per startto-start time
3-22
You can combine any of the response determination methods

with the nonlinear response versus concentration curves for the
nonlinear curve types. The response is multiplied by a userdefined factor to scale the response. After the response is scaled,
it is called a rate even though the response may be a scaled
absorbance or absorbance difference.
Rates are obtained for calibrators using at least as many unique
concentrations as there are curve parameters to be determined.
The curve that minimizes the mean square error in rate is
determined by the iterative Gauss-Newton method.1
The curve types for the nonlinear calibrations are:
1-Logit4
2-Logit5
3-Exponential5
4-Polynomial5
A change of parameter with Z=a'Kc is used for the Logit models

(1-Logit4 and 2-Logit5) to allow faster convergence when the
value of a' approaches zero.
The parameters used for the nonlinear curve type calculations
are:
R
rate
= concentration of calibrators
R0 = response predicted by the mathematical model at

concentration C=0
Ln = natural logarithm function
e
= base of the natural logarithm function
a'
= ea
= a'Kc
a, b, c, d = various parameters which define the nonlinear

elements of each model
Kc = predicted difference between R00 (the rate for a calibrator
with infinite concentration) and R0 (Kc is a scale
parameter for 1-Logit4 and 2-Logit5)
K
= a scale parameter for Model 3
R. Cook and D. Wellington (1980), Data Handling for Emit

Assays, Syva Corp, Palo Alto, Ca.

(Continued)
3-23
After fitting the curve to the data, the system accepts the curve if
the curve standard deviation is less than any user-defined limit
for that test. If no limit is specified, no check on the S.D. is
performed. The equation for standard deviation is:
NConc Reps(i)
S.D. =
i=1
j=1
[(yij-y
i)2 + (y
i-yi)2]
(NConc-x)
where:
NConc =
number of different calibrator concentrations
Reps(i) =
number of replicates for the ith concentration
yij
rate of the jth replicate for the ith concentration
yi
average rate of the ith concentration
yi
rate predicted by the curve for the ith concentration
4 for a 1-Logit4 curve type

5 for a 2-Logit5 curve type
5 for a 3-Exponential5 curve type
5 for a 4-Polynomial5 curve type
If N-x=0, then N-x is replaced with 4 for a 1-Logit4 curve

type, or replaced with 5 for a 2-Logit5, 3-Exponential5, or
4-Polynomial5 curve type.
If the S.D. is unacceptable, the calibration fails and the system
does not dispense samples for that test until the user intervenes.
You can accept the curve, delete or change calibrator rates and
concentrations, or request the system to refit the curve.
The rate prints on the run-time report along with the
concentration. The rate is not accessible after the run-time
report prints. The following occurs when the rates are outside
the range:
Samples with rates outside the range defined by the lowest
calibrator print with the flag Under, followed by the lowest
calibrator concentration.
Samples with rates outside the range defined by the highest
calibrator print with the flag Over, followed by the highest
calibrator concentration.
3-24
1-Logit4 Curve Type
For a 1-Logit4 curve type, if the rate is plotted against the

logarithm of concentration, a sigmoidal curve that approaches R0
at a low concentration and R0+Z/a' at a high concentration
occurs. The curve has a center of symmetry at concentration
C50=(1/a)(1/b), where the slope is maximum and the rate is
halfway between the values for zero and infinite concentration.
For this curve, the parameter a is constrained at each iteration
to prevent a from going negative.
For a 1-Logit4 curve type, an iteration is accepted even if the
mean square error increases as long as the parameters b and Z do
not move toward zero by more than half their magnitude or move
away from zero by more than their magnitude. A rejected
iteration is repeated by increasing the damping and trying again.
The calculation for a 1-Logit4 curve type follows. Sample results
are then quantitated as:
R = R0 +
Z(Cb)
1 + a(Cb)
C = ex
where:
x=
-Ln
-a
(R-R0)
b
2-Logit5 Curve Type
For a 2-Logit5 curve type, you must run at least one zero
calibrator to ensure convergence of the curve fit iterations. This
convergence of the curve fit iterations is accepted for a 2-Logit5
curve type and 3-Exponential5 curve type only if the mean
square error decreases.
For a 2-Logit5 curve type, the parameters a, b, and c are all
constrained at each iteration to prevent them from going
negative. If parameters b and c are zero after the iterations
converge, the flat curve is useless and the system does not accept
the curve. Sample quantitation uses the Gauss-Newton method
of iteration since the curve equation does not have a solution for
C in closed form.
The calculation for a 2-Logit5 curve type is:
R = R0 +
Z(Cb)(e(cC))
1 + a(Cb)(e(cC))
3-Exponential5 Curve Type
3-25
For a 3-Exponential5 curve type, the parameter c is constrained

at each iteration to prevent it from going negative. Otherwise,
the curves rate increases as the concentration approaches zero.
If the new value of the parameter c is zero, the parameter
a=Ln(a) is kept from increasing above zero; otherwise, the
curve rate increases as the concentration approaches zero.
If the curve has a maximum or minimum rate within the
concentration range of the calibrators, the system selects the
largest set of adjacent calibrator concentrations that do not go
over or under the range. Curve is useless - under concentration
minimum shows on the Calibration Data/Parameters screen if the
calibrators are below the range. Curve is useless - over
concentration maximum shows on the Calibration Data/
Parameters screen if the calibrators are above the range. Both
messages show on the Calibration Data/Parameters screen if
calibrators at both ends are rejected. The run-time report flags
Under or Over print for samples with rates outside the range of
rates for the selected calibrators. Sample quantitation uses the
Gauss-Newton method of iterations. This method is simpler than
using the solution to the cubic equation in closed form.
The calculation for a 3-Exponential5 curve type is:
R = R0 +Ke
4-Polynomial5 Curve
Type
CAUTION
[b(Ln(C)) + Ln(a)(Ln(C)2) + c(Ln(C)3)]
The 4-Polynomial5 curve type can sometimes fit

abnormal data to the curve and the system can
print erroneous results. For example, if the
reagent is expired, the system can use the
4-Polynomial5 curve type to quantitate the
results and the system will not flag the error.
For a 4-Polynomial5 curve type, you must run at least one zero
calibrator, since its average rate is used as curve parameter R0.
This calculation is linear in the other four parameters, allowing
linear regression to be used instead of Gauss-Newton iterations.
The linear regression curve fit minimizes the mean square error
in Ln(C) rather than in rate.
Since the curve predicts a rate of R0 at concentration C0=ea
instead of at zero, Under prints when the samples rate is below
that of the lowest nonzero calibrator. If the curve equation is
satisfied by more than one value of R for any value of C between
the lowest nonzero and highest calibrator concentrations, the
system prints Curve is nonmonotonic and does not accept the
calibration. The calculation for a 4-Polynomial5 curve type is:
Ln(C)=a+b[(R-R0)/100]+c[(R-R0)/100]2+d[(R-R0)/100]3
Sample quantitation consists of raising e to the power given by
the right-hand side of the curve equation.
3-26
Two-Point
Normalization
To minimize the expense and inconvenience of running a large

number of immunoassay calibrators every day, the system can
run the lowest nonzero calibrator and the highest calibrator, with
at least two replicates of each calibrator. The concentrations for
these calibrators cannot be less than the concentration of the
lowest nonzero calibrator or greater than the concentration of
the highest calibrator used to establish the original curve. You
cannot select two consecutive calibrator concentration values.
If Curve is useless - under concentration minimum or Curve is
useless - over concentration maximum shows on the Calibration
Data/Parameters screen for the calibration curve at a particular
concentration, the normalizer concentrations cannot be less than
or greater than the concentrations that define the range.
A normalizing slope is calculated as:
m=
S(NH) - S(NL)
RH - RL
where:
S(NH) =
rate predicted by the stored curve for the high

normalizing calibrator
S(NL) =
rate predicted for the low normalizing calibrator
RH
average rate of the high normalizer
RL
average rate of the low normalizer
A normalizing intercept is then calculated as:

k = S(NL)-m(RL)
The system replaces the measured sample rates with m(R)+k
before printing the rates on the run-time report and before
quantitating these rates against the original curve. This
normalization calculation is mathematically equivalent to the
following:
assuming that the nonlinear curve parameters a, b, and c for
the 1-Logit4, 2-Logit5, and 3-Exponential5 curve types have

not changed since the original calibration
determining new R0 and Z or K parameters that are valid until
the next normalization

Two-point normalization cannot be applied to a 4-Polynomial5
curve type. A normalization with a slope of 1 and an intercept of
0 occurs whenever a full calibration curve is accepted.
3-27
You program a factor for a qualitative curve type. The system

uses this factor to multiply the determined response and yield a
result:
Result=Sample Response Factor
The numeric result prints (if enabled), along with a POS or NEG
flag. The flag indicates the presence or absence of the required
analyte as defined by subtracting the calibrator result from the
sample result. A qualitative curve type is used to assay Drugs of
Abuse in Urine (DAU) assays.
Since only the POS or NEG flag shows in the result field of the
final report or on the Patient Results screen, you lose any
numeric value unless you enable the system printer. You cannot
run blanks for the qualitative test type.
If multiple low calibrator replicates are run, a standard deviation
is calculated as:
S.D. =
(y
i - y0)2
N-1
where:
N
number of replicates for the low calibrator
yi
response of the Ith calibrators
y0
average of the replicates for the low calibrator
The S.D. is compared to the limit defined at the Curve S.D. Limit
field on the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen. If the S.D.
exceeds the limit, the calibration is flagged as invalid. If no curve
S.D. limit is defined, the system does not check the standard
deviation.
3-28

When you define a test, you can combine any test type
determination method with any curve type. Only blanked linear
and limited linear curve types allow you to program your own
factor or have the system calculate the factor from the calibrators.
For enzyme linear, qualitative, 1-Logit4, 2-Logit5,
3-Exponential5, and 4-Polynomial5 curve types, you must
program a factor.
Whether a factor is preprogrammed or calculated from
calibrators for a blanked linear or limited linear curve type
depends upon whether you type a value at the Factor field on the
Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen.
Refer to Table 3-4 for a summary of the curve types:
Table 3-1. Summary of Curve Types
Curve Type
Factor
Blank or
Zero Cal.
Used?
Blanked Linea
User-defined
Yes
Blanked Linear
Calculated
Yes
2 through 6
Enzyme Linear
User-defined
Yes
Limited Linear
User-defined
No
Limited Linear
Calculated
No
2 through 6
Qualitative
User-defined
No
Logit 4
User-defined
No
4 through 6
Logit 5
User-defined
Yes
5 and 6
Exponential 5
User-defined
No
5 and 6
Polynomial 5
User-defined
Yes
5 and 6
NOTE
Calibrator Concs.
(including blanks)
You cannot run a blank and a zero calibrator

for the same calibration, normalization, or
reblanking.
3-29

This section gives a summary of:
rate and/or response error flags
result error flags
calibration failures
normalization failures
reblanking failures
Refer to Tables 3-2 and 3-3 for a summary of the flags that can
show on the Patient Results screen while the system calculates a
result or calibrates a test:
Table 3-2. Error Flags for a Rate and/or Response
This flag . . .
Means . . .
High abs
the absorbance of the sample is above the

linear region of the curve (for an
endpoint, two-point, or kinetic test type)
High pr abs
one or more data points at the primary

wavelength exceeded the internal high
absorbance limit for the system
(High primary absorbance)

High sc abs
(High secondary absorbance)
one or more data points at the secondary

wavelength exceeded the internal high
absorbance limit for the system
Low abs
the absorbance of the sample is below

the linear region of the curve (for an
endpoint, two-point, or kinetic test type)
Low pr abs

wavelength are lower than the internal
low absorbance limit for the system
Low sc abs
one or more data points at the secondary

wavelength are lower than the internal
low absorbance limit for the system
(Low secondary absorbance)

Noise
the SD of the best fit line (curve for

kinetic test type) is greater than two
times the expected S.D.
Nonlinear
a rate reaction for a test is not linear

(kinetic test type)
Outlier
two or more points were deleted because

they are outside of the line (curve for
kinetic test type) by more than four
times the S.D. of that line or curve
3-30
Summary of Error Flags and Calibration Failures (Continued)

Table 3-3. Error Flags for a Result
This flag . . .
Means . . .
Control out
the control result failed the control rule

evaluation defined for the test
High conc.
the concentration is above the range for

the test
(High primary absorbance)
Over
the sample concentration is higher than

the concentration of the highest calibrator
in a quantitative immunoassay test
(1-Logit4, 2-Logit5, 3-Exponential5, or
4-Polynomial5 curve type)
Under
the sample concentration is lower than

the concentration of the lowest calibrator
in a quantitative immunoassay test
(1-Logit4, 2-Logit5, 3-Exponential5, or
4-Polynomial5 curve type)
Calibration failures can occur if the following conditions are

true:
The monochromatic average for a blank or zero calibrator
exceeds the low blank absorbance limit or high blank

absorbance limit.
The curve for a nonlinear curve type is nonmonotonic. (There
is no one-to-one correspondence between the response result

and the concentration.)
The standard deviation limit for the curve was exceeded.
An individual replicate was flagged while the system was
calculating its rate or response.

The calculated factor had more digits than can show on the
system screen.
Normalization or
Reblanking Failures
Normalization or reblanking failures can occur if an individual

replicate was flagged while the system was calculating its rate or
response.
3-31

The Express Plus automatically assays a sample a second time for
a specific test if the test result for that sample shows an error flag.
The Express Plus does not verify a result against the high and low
normal limits except it prints the result; therefore, the system will
not rerun a sample if it exceeds the high or low normal limits.
Depending on the flag, some samples are automatically diluted
before the system reruns the samples. The Express Plus will
rerun tests with sample volumes that are 5 L or less, but it will
not dilute those samples.
Table 3-4 is a summary of when the system will automatically
rerun a sample. Table 3-5 is a summary of automatic dilution
and rerun information.
Table 3-4. Automatic Reruns
This sample . . .
Is rerun if . . .
And is rerun . . .
patients and
controls
the rate, response, or

result was flagged for
any reason (only if it was
not rerun before)
once
diluted reruns for

patients and
controls
the Over flag was set
linearity flag was set

the High abs flag was
set and the factor is
positive
once if the following

conditions exist:
it has not been
rerun before
it is not a
qualitative test
the Low abs was set
the dilution ratio is
the High conc.
and the factor is

negative
blanks and
calibrators
a blank or calibrator was

flagged for any reason
>1
until twice the
number of scheduled
replicates are run
3-32
Summary of Automatic Reruns (Continued)

Table 3-5. Automatic Dilution and Rerun
Error Flag
Dilution?
Control out
No
High absorbance limit exceeded. (negative factor)
No
High absorbance limit exceeded. (positive factor)
Yes
High blank limit exceeded.
No
High Concentration.
Yes
Low absorbance limit exceeded. (negative factor)
Yes
Low absorbance limit exceeded. (positive factor)
No
Low blank limit exceeded.
No
Noise limit exceeded.
No
Nonlinearity limit exceeded.
No
Outlier
No
Over
Yes
Primary wavelength abs is high.
No
Primary wavelength abs is low.
No
Secondary wavelength abs is high.
No
Secondary wavelength abs is low.
No
Under
No
3-33

The Express Plus has several statistical functions to help you
monitor the performance of the system and the accuracy and
precision of your results.
The control measurements are designed for applications where
stable control materials are available and are analyzed repeatedly
over long periods of time. These procedures provide:
data analysis and display via control charts (Levey-Jennings),
so that computerized data handling is not necessary

easy adaptation and integration into the existing control
practices in clinical laboratories

a low level of false rejection or false flags
an improved capability for detecting performance variations
some indication of the type of control rule violation(s)
occurring when a test is flagged, to aid in problem solving

Control rules are used as a criterion for judging whether the
observations represent stable or unstable performance of the
analytical method. They attempt to signal when the control
measurements no longer represent the expected or previously
observed performance. If a control result violates a defined
control rule1, the result is flagged on the run-time report.
There are several control rules that you can define for a
test/control pair. The system uses the control rules to
systematically evaluate the control results using the 1-2s rule first,
then moving to each additional control rule defined for the
test/control pair. If a control result violates a defined rule, the
system stops the evaluation process and flags the control result
with that rule violation flag.
The following explanations of the control rules assume that all
the control rules are defined for a test/control pair.
For additional information about the control rules, refer to:

Westgard, J.O., Barry, Patricia L., and Hunt, Marian R., Clin.
Chem. 27/3, 493-501 (1981)
3-34
1-2s Rule
The Express Plus uses the 1-2s rule to determine if further

evaluation of a control result is required. The system
automatically evaluates this rule for all defined tests. If a control
result exceeds the 2 S.D. limit, the system then evaluates the
result against other control rules defined for the test; if other
rules are not defined, the system prints 1-2s next to the control
result as a warning, but does not shut down the test.
1-3s Rule
The 1-3s rule detects control results which exceed typical

random variation. If the control result is outside the 3 S.D. limit,
the system prints 1-3s next to the control result.
2-2s Rule
The 2-2s rule detects systematic changes, such as shifts in control

results. If the current control result and the previous result for
the same test/control pair exceed the same 2 S.D. limit, the
system prints 2-2s next to the result. The Express Plus does not
evaluate 2-2s across control materials.
4-1s Rule
The 4-1s rule detects systematic changes, such as small shifts in

control results. If the current result and the three preceding
control results for the selected test exceed the same 1 S.D. limit
on the same side of the mean, the system prints 4-1s next to the
result.
The system first applies this rule across control materials by using
the most recent control result and the three preceding control
results, regardless of control materials. Since this rule uses the
most recent control results to evaluate across control materials,
this evaluation might not always include each different control
material defined for the test.
If the Express Plus finds four control results across control
materials that do not violate the 4-1s rule, then it evaluates the
4-1s rule within a single control material.
If the system cannot find four control results across control
materials, it cannot evaluate the 4-1s rule, so it prints 1-2s next
to the result.
If the Express Plus finds four control results within a control
material that do not violate the 4-1s rule, then it evaluates the
10x
rule.
If the system cannot find four control results within the control
material, it cannot evaluate the 4-1s rule, so it goes on to

evaluate the 10x
rule. If the 10x
rule is not defined for the
test/control pair, the system prints 1-2s next to the result.
10x
Rule
3-35
The 10x
rule detects small shifts in control results. If the current
control result and the nine preceding control results for the
selected test fall on the same side of the mean, the system prints
10x
next to the result.
The Express Plus first applies this rule across control materials
by using the most recent control result and the nine preceding
control results, regardless of control materials. Since this rule
uses the most recent control results to evaluate across control
materials, this evaluation might not always include each different
control material defined for the test.
If the Express Plus finds ten control results across control
materials that do not violate the 10x

rule, then it evaluates the
10x
rule within a single control material.
If the system cannot find ten results across control materials, it
cannot evaluate this rule, so it prints 1-2s next to the result and
stops the control rule evaluation process.

If the system cannot find ten results within a control material,
it cannot evaluate this rule, so it prints 1-2s next to the result
and stops the control rule evaluation process.
Using a Combination
of Control Rules
The Express Plus uses a combination of control rules to apply a

series of decision criteria to the analytical process.
The 1-2s rule is used as a warning rule and when violated, the
Express Plus performs a more detailed evaluation of the data
using the other control rules defined for the test/control pair. If
the control evaluation does not exceed a 2 S.D. limit, the result is
valid and the system reports the result without a control rule
error flag.
If the control evaluation exceeds a 2 S.D. limit, violating the 1-2s
rule, the system evaluates the control sequentially by applying the
1-3s, 2-2s, 4-1s, and 10x
rules, or whatever combination of these
rules is defined for the test/control pair. If none of the defined
rules is violated, the result is valid and reported. If any one of
the defined rules is violated, the system prints next to the result
the control rule error flag of the first rule violated, indicating that
the result is out-of-control.
Refer to Figure 3-2 for the control rule evaluation process flow,
and the priorities of the control rules.
3-36
Using a Combination
of Control Rules
Figure 3-2. Flowchart of Control Rule Evaluations
(Continued)
Start
Evaluating
Rules
Does
result violate
1-2s rule?
No
System reports
the result
No
Stop
Evaluating
Rules
Yes
System reports
the result with
the 1-3s flag
Yes
System reports
the result with
the 2-2s flag
Yes
System reports
the result with
the 4-1s flag
Yes
Is 1-3s rule
defined for
the test?
Yes
No
Is 2-2s rule
defined for
the test?
No
Yes
No
Is 4-1s rule
defined for
the test?
No
System reports
the result with
the 1-2s flag
Does
result violate
2-2s rule?
No
Yes
No
Is 10x rule
defined for
the test?
Does
result violate
1-3s rule?
Does
result violate
4-1s rule?
System
automatically
reruns sample
No
Yes
Does
result violate
10x rule?
Yes
System reports
the result with
the 10x flag
Yes
No
Is
Automatic Test
Shutdown
ON?
Yes
System shuts
down the
test
No
Is
this an initial
result (not a
rerun)?
No
Stop
Evaluating
Rules
Sample
Interpretation
3-37
The following scenario offers a sample interpretation of the

application of control rules for a typical Express Plus test (refer
to Figures 3-3 and 3-4).
For this scenario, the operator has:
defined the following at the Definitions/Control/Limits screen:
Control
Expected Mean
Expected 1 S.D.
Control 1
2.5
0.5
Control 2
6.0
1.0
defined control rules 2-2s and 10x

for the test/control pair (the
system automatically uses the 1-2s rule for all tests)

collected the following control results:
Control
Result
Date
Interpretation
Control 1
2.9
1-1-92
2.9 is within 1 S.D., so the system

does not start control rule evaluation
Control 2
6.6
1-1-92

Control 1
2.9
1-2-92

Control 2
7.1
1-2-92
7.1 is >1 S.D. but <2 S.D.

1-2s rule is not violated, so the
system does not start control rule
evaluation
Control 1
3.3
1-3-92
3.3 is >1 S.D. but <2 S.D.

evaluation
Control 2
7.2
1-3-92
7.2 is >1 S.D. but <2 S.D.

evaluation
Control 1
3.2
1-4-92
3.2 is >1 S.D. but <2 S.D.

evaluation
Control 1
3.0
1-5-92

3-38
(Continued)
Control
Result
Date
Interpretation
Control 1
3.6
1-6-92
3.6 is >2 S.D.

starts evaluation of selected
control rule(s)
preceding Control 1 value (3.0)
is not greater than 2 S.D. (2-2s

rule is not violated)
although all preceding results
across and within controls lie on

the same side of the mean, 10
points are not available for this
control (10x
value is flagged 1-2s
Control 2
8.2
1-7-92
8.2 is >2 S.D.

control rule(s)
is not greater than 2 S.D. (2-2s

current value and preceding 9
values across controls

(regardless of control material)
are on same side of mean (10x
rule is violated)
result is flagged 10x
and further
control rule evaluation stops

Control 1
3.9
1-8-92
3.9 is >2 S.D.

control rule(s)
is also greater than 2 S.D. (2-2s
rule is violated)
result is flagged 2-2s and further
control rule evaluation stops
(Continued)
3-39
Figure 3-3. Control 1 Results (Example)

QC Levey-Jennings Report
09-MAR-1992 14:28
Test: XXX
Plot Type:
Control Name: Control 1

Expected Mean:
2.5
One SD:
0.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
01-MAR-1992
08-MAR-1992
Figure 3-4. Control 2 Results (Example)

QC Levey-Jennings Report
09-MAR-1992 14:28
Test: XXX
Plot Type:
Control Name: Control 2

Expected Mean:
6.0
One SD:
1.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
01-MAR-1992
08-MAR-1992
3-40

All control results, including reruns, go into the Q.C. database
for the test/control pair.

You cannot manually add or modify a Q.C. result in Q.C.
Statistics.
The number of possible points stored per test is 2047. The
system uses all the data points when calculating the lifetime
mean, and stores the data points in reverse chronological
order, such that 2048 overwrites 1, and 2049 overwrites 2, etc.,
when calculating the actual mean.
For QCSystems Summary Reports, if the number of points for
the test is 1, the system prints 0.0 as the S.D.

For QCSystems Summary Reports, if the number of points for
the test is 0, the system prints NO RESULTS (a Mean or 1 S.D.
is not printed).
Only control results for a defined control go into the Q.C.
database.
If you select Expected Mean at the Control Rule Evaluation field
on the Definitions/Tests/Controls screen, but you do not define

the Expected Mean or 1 S.D. at the Definitions/Control/Limits
screen, the system cannot evaluate those controls.
If you select Expected Mean at the Control Rule Evaluation field
on the Definitions/Tests/Controls screen, and N = 1, the

system cannot evaluate those controls.
When you select Lifetime at the Plotted Against field on the
Q.C. Statistics/Levey-Jennings screen, and you have only a few

data points stored in the Q.C. database for the test/control
pair, the results might appear skewed until you collect enough
data points to stabilize the statistics.
The system stores actual control results (not POS or NEG) for
qualitative tests in the Q.C. database. The system also shows

actual control results on the Q.C. Statistics screens and reports.
The system does not use excluded data points when evaluating
control rules.
4 Understanding the Express Plus Programs
4-1
Page
About This Section
4-3
4-3
Worklist Program
4-7
4-11
4-14
4-21
Definitions Program
4-32
Options Program
4-49
4-57
4-64
4-2
4 Understanding the Express Plus Programs (Continued)

This section of the manual explains the Express Plus software
programs and functions. Use this chart to find the information
that you need in this section.
Refer to . . .
about the program choices available

at the Express Plus main menu
Using the Main Menu

Programs
how to use the Worklist program to

create or modify a worklist of tests
and samples
Worklist Program
how to use the Patient Results

program to view, modify, or print
patient results
how to use the Calibration Data

program to review calibration status,
review or edit calibration data, and
accept, erase, or rerun a calibration
curve
how to use the Q.C. Statistics

program to view control results and
Levey-Jennings plots, and print Q.C.
statistics
how to use the Definitions program

to review or modify the factorydefined test parameters, or customize
parameters for tests, profiles,
calibrators, controls, and blanks
Definitions Program
how to use the Options program to

set or modify the system, printing,
test order, and communications
options, and use the disk options to
backup or restore data files
Options Program
how to use the Diagnostics/

Maintenance program to verify
system operation or troubleshoot
your Express Plus
Diagnostics/Maintenance
Program
how to use the Load Alternate

Program program to re-install system
software

(also refer to your Express
Plus Software Installation
Instructions)
4-3
About This Section

This section describes the Express Plus Main Menu programs and
functions. Software maps illustrate the program menus and
screens that you can use in each program.
You access the Help and Status programs by pressing the fixedfunction keys labeled HELP and STATUS. You can press HELP at
any program screen to obtain more information about the
operations, screen fields, or function keys available at that screen.
You can press STATUS at any screen to obtain current system
status information.
For information about using the Help program to obtain
online instructions and explanations, refer to Section 8, Using

the HELP and STATUS Programs.
For information about using the Status program to view system
status information, refer to Section 8, Using the HELP and
STATUS Programs.
For details about using the Status program to troubleshoot the
Express Plus, refer to Section 10, Troubleshooting the Express

Plus.

The Main Menu screen, shown in Figure 4-1, lists the programs
that the Express Plus shows after the Startup screen activities are
completed, or whenever you press MAIN MENU.
Figure 4-1. Main Menu Screen
Main Menu
F1 Worklist
F2 Patient Results
F3 Calibration Data
Press the required
function key.
F4 Q.C. Statistics
F5 Definitions
F6 Options
F7 Diagnostics/Maintenance
F8 Load Alternate Program
4-4
Using the Main Menu Programs (Continued)

You access each Main Menu program by pressing the function
key that corresponds to the program at the Main Menu.
Figure 4-2 shows the Main Menu programs and functions. Use
the following chart to select the program that you need:
Press . . .
create or modify a worklist that contains the

tests scheduled for patient samples, controls,
calibrators, or blanks
F1 Worklist
review or edit patient results
F2 Patient Results
print collated patient reports

review calibration curve status
F3 Calibration Data
review or edit calibration data

accept, erase, or rerun a calibration curve
review quality control (Q.C.) data in tabular or
Levey-Jennings plot formats
F4 Q.C. Statistics
print Q.C. data and statistical reports, or print

QCSystems reports
review or customize parameters for factorydefined tests
F5 Definitions
define new tests, profiles, calibrators, controls,

or blanks
set or modify options for the system, printing,
test order, or communications
F6 Options
back up or restore files, or format a floppy disk

to use with the Express Plus
verify system operation or troubleshoot
problems in system hardware
F7 Diagnostics/
this is a special program that you use only to

re-install system software
F8 Load Alternate
Maintenance
Program
The rest of this section explains each Main Menu program and
provides:
a software map of each program
a chart that describes the functions of each program
a chart that briefly describes the screen fields of each program
4-5

Figure 4-2. Main Menu Programs and Functions
Main Menu
Patient Results
F1 Worklist
F2
Worklist/Tests:
(Patient) Screen
Patient Results
Screen
Next Request
Next Request
F1
Previous Request
F2
F3
Find Request
F3
Find Request
F4
Insert Request
F4
Edit Request
Erase Request
F7
Load Sample
F8
F1
F2
F5
F6
Previous Request
Worklist
F3
Calibration Data
Screen
Calibration Data/
Parameters
Screen
F8
F4
Q.C. Statistics
Q.C. Statistics
Screen
F1
F2
F8
Data
F3
F8
Data
Levey-Jennings
Summary Stats
QCSystem
Calibration Data/
Data Screen
More
F4
F7
Calibration Data
Edit
Results
Demographics
F1
F2
Recalculate
Rerun
F3
Accept
F6
Erase
F8
Parameters
4-6

Figure 4-2. Main Menu Programs and Functions (Continued)
Main Menu
(Continued)
F5 Definitions
Definitions
Menu
F1
F2
Test
Profile
F6 Options
Options Menu
F1
F2
System Options
Printing Options
F3
Control
F3
Test Order
F4
Calibrator
F4
Communications
F5
Blank
F5
F6
Disk Options
Reset System
Diagnostics/
F7 Maintenance
Diagnostics/
Maintenance
Menu
F1
Precision Check
F2
Manual Operations
F3
Lamp Alignment
F4
F5
System Version
Probe Tip Calibration
Alternate
F8 Load
Program
Load Alternate
Program Screen
F1
Boot Floppy
4-7
Worklist Program
The Worklist program contains the options that allow you to
create and manage a worklist of your patient samples, controls,
calibrators, and blanks. You can also move to the Patient Results
program from the Worklist program. Refer to Section 6,
Operating the Express Plus, for more information about using the
Worklist program to schedule your daily worklists.
Use the Worklist program to:
schedule your daily worklist of tests for patient samples,
controls, calibrators, and blanks

enter patient demographic information for patient samples
review, modify, erase, or add to a current worklist
load a single or Stat sample while the system is assaying tests
print a sample loadlist to help you load the scheduled samples
in the correct sample tray positions (press PRINT at the
Worklist/Tests screen)
Figure 4-3 shows the Worklist program and its options:
Figure 4-3. Worklist Program Map
F1 Worklist
Worklist/Tests
Screen
F1
Next
Request
F2
Previous
Request
F3
Find
Request
F1
F1
Request
Number
F2
Cup
Number
F3
F4
Erase
Worklist
Patient
Name
F4
Insert
Request
F2
F5
Erase
Request
Patient
ID
F5
Erase
Request
F3
F6
Patient
Name
First
Request
F6
Load
Sample
F4
F7
Patient
ID
Last
Request
F7
* At the Worklist/Tests screen, the functions of F7 and F8 can

change, depending upon the sample type that you select.
Repeat
F8
4-8
Worklist Program (Continued)

When you select F1 Worklist at the Main Menu, the Worklist/
Tests screen shows the first request in the worklist with the
default sample type as Patient. The sample type is a toggle
selection. To select Calibrator, Control, or Blank as the sample
type, move the cursor to Sample Type, press SELECT until the
required sample type shows, then press the required function key
(F7 and F8 functions change, depending upon the sample type
you select):
To . . .
Press . . .
show the request with the next scheduled cup

number
F1 Next Request
show the request with the next lower cup

number
F2 Previous
show the request you want by searching for the

request number, cup number, patient name,
patient ID number, or by searching for the first
request, last request, or repeated request
F3 Find Request
Request
These Find functions keys show on the screen:

F1 Request Number to find a request by
number
F2 Cup Number
to find a request by cup
F3 Patient Name
to find a request by name
F4 Patient ID
to find a request by ID
F5 First Request
to find the first request
F6 Last Request
to find the last request
F7 Repeat
to repeat the last Find
create a new request with the next available
request and cup numbers
F4 Insert Request
erase a request or erase the entire worklist
F5 Erase Request
These Erase function keys show on the screen:

F1 Erase Worklist to erase the entire worklist
F2 Erase Request to erase the current request
F3 Patient Name
to erase a request by name
F4 Patient ID
to erase a request by ID
load a Stat or single sample while the system is
assaying samples or idle
F6 Load Sample
4-9

To . . .
Press . . .
automatically schedule the calibrators defined

for the test in the worklist, when the Sample
Type is Calibrator
F7 Schedule
Calibs.
These Schedule Calibs. function keys show on

the screen:
F1 Calibrate
to schedule a full calibration
F2 Normalize to schedule defined normalizers
for a nonlinear curve
F2 Reblank
to schedule the zero calibrators
for a blanked linear curve
go to the Patient Results screen from the
Worklist/Tests/Patient, Demographics, or
Control screen to view, modify, or enter results
F7 Results
go to the Demographics screen from the

Worklist/Tests/Patient screen to enter patient
demographic information
F8 Demo-
go to the Worklist/Concentrations screen from

the Worklist/Tests/Calibrator screen to review,
modify, insert, or erase the concentrations for
the selected calibrator
F8 Concen-
go to the Worklist/Tests screen from the

Worklist/Tests/Demographics or Concentrations
screen to schedule more tests and samples
F8 Tests
graphics
trations
Use this chart to locate the meanings of the fields (shown in

alphabetical order) that can show on the Worklist screens:
This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Worklist/
Age
the patients age or date of

birth (max. 8 alphanumeric
characters)
Demographics screen
Blanks
the set of up to 10 defined

blanks
Blanks screen
Calibrator
Name
the name of the selected

calibrator
Concentrations screen
Calibrators
the set of up to defined 10

calibrators
Calibrators screen
Comments
5 lines (40 characters each) of

comments about the patient
Demographics screen
4-10

This field . . . Shows . . .
At the Worklist/
Conc.
the concentrations of the

calibrator defined for the
selected test
Controls

controls
Controls screen
Patient ID
the unique code that

identifies the patient
(maximum 12 alphanumeric
characters)
Demographics screen
Patient
Name
the patients name (maximum

30 characters)
Demographics screen
Tests (Patient) screen
Profiles

profiles
Profiles screen
Request
Number
the unique number that

identifies the request in the
worklist
All Worklist screens
Sample
Type
the type of sample that uses

the request (Patient, Control,
Calibrator, or Blank)
All Worklist screens,

except Concentrations
and Demographics
Sex
the patients gender or none

(maximum 8 alphanumeric
characters)
Demographics screen
Stat?
whether the sample is a Stat

(Yes or No)

Demographics screen
Control screen
Tests
the set of up to 48 tests

defined on the system

Control screen
Calibrator screen
Blank screen
Tray/Cup
Number
the alphabetic sample tray

code that identifies the
sample tray installed on the
system (tray codes: A
through I)
All Worklist screens
the cup number that

identifies the cup position for
the request and sample
(sample or pediatric cups use
1 through 40;
primary sample tubes use
1 through 20)
4-11

The Patient Results program contains the options that allow you
to view, enter, modify, or delete test results for any patient or
control sample. There is a Patient Results screen for each patient
or control sample that you scheduled in the worklist. You can
also move to the Worklist program from the Patient Results
program. Refer to Section 6, Operating the Express Plus, for
more information about using the Patient Results program.
Use the Patient Results program to:
view patient or control results for completed tests
manually enter patient or control results for any defined test,
including factory-defined, user-defined, and off-system tests

(you cannot enter results for ratio tests)
modify or delete patient or control results for any test
NOTE
If you manually enter (type) a result for a

scheduled test, the test is no longer selected. If
a test is rescheduled and assayed again, the
assayed test result replaces the result that you
entered manually.
Figure 4-4 shows the Patient Results program and its options:
Figure 4-4. Patient Results Program Map
F2
Patient Results
Patient Results
Screen
F1 Next
Request
F1
Request
Number
F2
F2 Previous
Request
Cup
Number
F3
Patient
Name
F3 Find
Request
F4
Patient
ID
F4 Edit
Request
F5
First
Request
F7 Worklist
F6
Last
Request
F8 More
F7
Repeat
4-12
Patient Results Program (Continued)

When you select F2 Patient Results at the Main Menu, the Patient
Results screen shows for the first patient or control request in the
worklist. Press the function key that corresponds to what you
need to do:
To . . .
Press . . .
show the request with the next scheduled cup

number
F1 Next
show the request with the next lower cup number
F2 Previous
Request
Request
show the request you want by searching for the

request number, cup number, patient name,
patient ID number, or by searching for the first
request, last request, or repeated request
F3 Find
Request
These Find functions keys show on the screen:

F1 Request Number to find a request by number
F2 Cup Number
F3 Patient Name
F4 Patient ID
F5 First Request
F6 Last Request
F7 Repeat
obtain a cursor on the screen and modify or delete
the results for the selected request
F4 Edit
go to the Worklist/Tests screen to view the worklist

for the selected request
F7 Worklist
view the remaining results for the selected request

when all the available results do not show on one
screen
F8 More
print a collated report of the results shown on the

Patient Results screen
PRINT
These Print functions keys show on the screen:

F1 Current Request to print a report for the request
shown on the screen
F2 Patient Name
to print a report for all the

requests with a specified
patients name
F3 Patient ID
to print a report for all the

requests with a specified
patients ID number
F4 Cup Range
to print reports for the specified

range of cup numbers
F8 All Requests
to print reports for all the

patient and control requests
Request
4-13
Patient Results Program (Continued)

alphabetical order) that show on a Patient Results screen:
This field . . .
Shows . . .
Control Name
the name of the control that uses the selected

request, when the Sample Type for the request is
Control
Flag
the result error flag that can print next to a control

or patient result (only the highest priority result
error flag shows; the run-time report shows all of
the flags that affect a sample)
Patient Name
the name of the patient
Request
Number
the unique number that identifies each entry in the

worklist
Result
the test result(s) for the selected request (POS or

NEG shows for qualitative tests)
Sample Type
the type of sample (Patient or Control) indicated for

the request
Test
the defined tests
Tray/Cup
Number
the alphabetic tray code that identifies the sample

tray installed on the system (tray codes: A through I)
the cup number that identifies the cup position for
the request and sample (sample or pediatric cups use
1 through 40; primary sample tubes use 1
through 20)
4-14

The Calibration Data program contains the options that allow
you to view and manage test calibrations and calibration data.
For more information about using the Calibration Data program,
refer to Section 7, Using the Calibration Data and Q.C. Statistics
Programs.
Use the Calibration Data program to:
review the calibration curve for any test
accept, erase, or rerun an invalid calibration curve
modify the data and recalculate a calibration curve
Figure 4-5 shows the Calibration Data program and its options.
Figure 4-5. Calibration Data Program Map
F3
Calibration Data
Calibration Data
Screen
Calibration Data/
Parameters
Screen
F8
Data
Calibration Data/
Data Screen
F4
F1
Edit
Recalculate
F2
Rerun
F3
Accept
F6
Erase
F8
Parameters
Calibration Data/
Parameters
Screen
F1
Recalculate
F2
Rerun
F3
Accept
F6
Erase
F8
Data
4-15
Calibration Data Program (Continued)

When you select F3 Calibration Data at the Main Menu, the
Calibration Data screen shows with the current calibration status
of each defined test.
When you select the test you want to view or modify, the
Calibration Data/Parameters screen shows with the current
calibration, normalization, or reblanking parameters and one
function key available: F8 Data.
If you need to edit the calibration data, press F8 Data to go to the
Calibration Data/Data screen, then press F4 Edit. The Edit
functions show on the screen. Press the function key that
corresponds to what you need to do:
NOTE
You cannot edit an error, curve S.D., mean, or

the curve status. If you need to modify those
statistics, recalculate the curve.
To . . .
Press . . .
calculate the curve again
F1 Recalculate
rerun the calibration curve:
F2 Rerun
1. Move the cursor to the required data point(s).

2. Press DELETE to delete the value(s).
3. Load the calibrators on the sample tray.
accept a calibration curve to override an invalid
curve status
F3 Accept
erase a new curve, or erase a normalized or

reblanked curve, if the curve status is invalid or
incomplete
F6 Erase
erase a new curve if the curve status is invalid and

the stored curve for the test is expired (you must
assay a new set of calibrators for the test)
F6 Erase
go to the Calibration Data/Parameters screen and

use the Edit function keys
F8 Parameters
4-16

alphabetical order) that can show on the Calibration
Data/Parameters and Calibration Data/Data screens:
At the Calibration
Calibration
Status
the status of the calibration data

for a selected test
Data and
Data/Data screens
Conc.
the calibrator concentrations used

to calibrate the test (refer to
Definitions for more information).
Low Cal. shows instead of the
calibrator concentrations for
qualitative curve types, and is the
calibrator used to determine the
negative or positive responses.
Data/Data screen
Curve
Parameters
the parameters used to calculate

the curve (dependent upon the
curve type selected for the test):
Curve Type:
Parameters:
blanked linear
Low Cal., Factor
enzyme linear
Low Cal., Factor
limited linear
Low Cal., Factor
qualitative
Low Cal., Factor
1-Logit4
R0, Z, a, b
2-Logit5
R0, Z, a, b, c
3-Exponential5
R0, K, a, b, c
4-Polynomial5
R0, a, b, c, d
Data/
Parameters screen
Where:
Low Cal. is the mean response of
the lowest calibrator
Factor is the factor calculated from
the calibrator values
K, R0, and Z are nonlinear
parameters used to scale the curve:
K and Z are slopes
R0 is the predicted rate of a
concentration of zero (intercept)
a, a, b, c, and d are nonlinear curve
parameters
Curve S.D.
the standard deviation of the data

for the calibration line or curve
(for linear curves, multiplied by
the absolute value of the factor to
convert to concentration units)
Data/
Parameters screen
4-17

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Calibration
Data (1, 2, 3)
the reading for a particular

replicate of the indicated
concentration (one-replicate
minimum per concentration)
Data/Data screen
Error (1, 2, 3)
the difference between the actual

responses read from the cuvette
and the response predicted from
the calibration curve
Data/Data screen
Last
Calibration
that a full calibration was the last

action taken for the selected
curve, and shows the date that the
current calibration curve was
calculated
Data/Parameters
screen
Last
Normalization
that a normalization was the last

calibration curve was normalized
Data/Parameters
screen
Last
Reblanking
that a reblanking was the last

calibration curve was reblanked
Data/Parameters
screen
Maximum
the concentration value that was

below the concentration
maximum
Data/Parameters
screen (for
normalized curves)
Mean
Response
the mean of all responses for a

given concentration
Data/Data screen
Minimum
the concentration value that was

below the concentration
minimum
Data/Parameters
screen (for
normalized curves)
Normalization
Parameters

the normalized curve, when the
curve is invalid. The parameters
for the normalized curve are:
Curve Type:
Parameters:
1-Logit4
Slope, Intercept
2-Logit5
Slope, Intercept
3-Exponential5
Slope, Intercept
4-Polynomial5
Slope, Intercept
Data/Parameters
screen (for
normalized curves)
Normalization
Status
the status of the normalization

data for a selected test
Data/Parameters
screen (for
normalized curves)
4-18

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Calibration
Reason for
rejection
the curve is not valid for one of

the following reasons (refer to the
Section 7 tab, Defining
Calibration Values/ Calibrating
Tests, for an explanation of each
message):
Data/Parameters
screen
Curve data is useless

Curve is nonmonotonic
Curve is useless - under concentration
Curve is useless - over concentration
Curve is useless - outside concentration
range
Bad replicate
A replicate sets SD was too high
Curve SD was too high
Factor is outside the predicted range
for a factor
Reblanking
Parameters

the reblanked curve, when the
curve is invalid. The parameters
for the reblanked (blank linear)
curve are Low Cal. and Factor.
Where:
Low Cal. is the mean reagent
blank response
Factor is the factor calculated
from the calibrator values
Data/Parameters
screen (for
reblanked curves)
Reblanking
Required
the date and time that the curve

for the selected test requires
reblanking
Data/Parameters
screen
Recalibration
Required

for the selected test requires full
calibration
Data/Parameters
screen
Renormalization Required

for the selected test requires
normalization
Data/Parameters
screen
Reblanking
Status
the status of the reblanked data

for a selected test
Data/Parameters
screen (for
reblanked curves)
4-19

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Calibration
Rep. S.D.
the standard deviation of all

replicates for a certain calibrator
level (for linear curves,
multiplied by the absolute value
of the factor to convert to
concentration units)
Data/Data screen
Test
the abbreviation for the selected

test (maximum number of
characters is 7)
Data/Parameters
and Data/Data
screens
Test Name
the name of the selected test
Data/Parameters
and Data/Data
screens
4-20

The Calibration Data/Parameters screen shows the status of the
stored calibration curve for the test that you select. Refer to the
Section 7 tab, Defining Calibration Values/Calibrating Tests, for
an explanation of your options for each calibration status.
This chart explains the status terms:
This term . . .
Means . . .
CURRENT
the test did not exceed the defined calibration

interval.
EXPIRED
the test requires calibration before you can assay the

patient and control samples scheduled in the
worklist.
INCOMPLETE
the test is scheduled, but not all the data points are
collected, or you edited data point(s) but did not
recalculate the curve.
IN PROCESS
the calibrators are scheduled or running, or all data

points are not yet stored.
INVALID
a new calibration curve was calculated for the test,

but the system did not automatically accept the
curve, and you did not manually accept the curve.
The system cannot assay the patient or control
samples scheduled in the worklist for this test until
the calibration status is modified or new calibrators
are scheduled and run.
NONE
calibration data is not stored for the test; this

occurs when you modify the test definition.
NORMALIZED
the calculated curve was normalized; the system will

use this curve to calculate results for the test.
REBLANKED
the calculated curve was reblanked and the intercept

was updated; the system will use this curve to
calculate results for the test.
SCHEDULED
calibrators for this test are pending in the worklist,

but data points are not yet stored.

The Q.C. Statistics program enables you to view and manage your
quality control (Q.C.) data. For more information about using
the Q.C. Statistics program, refer to Section 7, Using the
Calibration Data and Q.C. Statistics Programs.
Use the Q.C. Statistics program to:
review the Q.C. statistics for any test/control pair as tabular
data, a Levey-Jennings plot, or a summary

print Q.C. statistics reports and QCSystems reports
Figure 4-6 shows the Q.C. Statistics program and its options.
4-21
4-22
Q.C. Statistics Program (Continued)

Figure 4-6. Q.C. Statistics Program Map
F4
Q.C. Statistics
Q.C. Statistics
Screen
F1 Data
LeveyF2 Jennings
Summary
F3 Stats
F8
Q.C. Statistics/
Summary
Statistics Screen
Q.C. Statistics/
Levey-Jennings
Screen
F1 Data
F2
F1
Data
Details
F3
Q.C. Statistics/
QCSystems
Screen
LeveyF2 Jennings
Summary
Stats
F4
F4
Q.C. Statistics/
Levey-Jennings/
Details Screen
LeveyF2 Jennings
QCSystem
F4
Edit
Update
F4 Stats
Edit
F5
F8
Next
Control
More
F6
Previous
Control
F7
Move
Left
F8
Update
Plot
Next
F7 Entry
Previous
F8 Entry
Q.C. Statistics/
Data Screen
F1 Details
LeveyF2 Jennings
Summary
F3 Stats
F4
Update
Data
Q.C. Statistics/
Data/Details
Screen
F1 Data
F4
Edit
Next
F7 Entry
Previous
F8 Entry
Next
F5 Control
Previous
F6 Control
Next
F7 Page
Previous
F8 Page
Move
Right
4-23

When you select F4 Q.C. Statistics at the Main Menu, the Q.C.
Statistics screen shows the tests defined for the Express Plus.
You move the cursor to the test you want to view, then select the
function key that corresponds to the format in which you want to
view the data or print a QCSystems report:
To . . .
Press . . .
view Q.C. statistics in tabular format for the

selected test/control(s)
F1 Data
view Q.C. statistics as a Levey-Jennings plot for

the selected test/control(s)
F2 Levey-Jennings
view the expected, actual, and lifetime Q.C.

statistics for the selected test/control(s)
F3 Summary Stats
print a QCSystems report
F8 QCSystem
4-24

Q.C. Statistics/Data Screen
When you press F1 Data at the Q.C. Statistics screen, the Q.C.
Statistics/Data screen shows the control data for the last 30
calendar days for the first control defined for the selected test.
The screen has these functions available (also refer to Q.C.
Statistics/Details Screens in this section):
To . . .
First . . .
Then press . . .
view details for a data

point, enter or modify
Operator or Comments
field values, or exclude a
data point from the
cumulative statistics
move the cursor to

the required data
point
F1 Details
view the data as a LeveyJennings plot
F2 Levey-Jennings
view statistics for all the

controls defined for the
test
F3 Summary Stats
view more data for the

same control and test,
over another date range
move the cursor to
F4 Update Data
Start Date and/or

End Date, then
press SELECT to
set the date(s)

view data for the next
control defined for the test
F5 Next Control
view data for the previous

F6 Previous Control
view the next 10 data

points for the same
control
F7 Next Page
view the previous 10 data

points for the same
control
F8 Previous Page
print a Q.C. report

(for an explanation of the
Q.C. data reports, refer to
the Section 7 tab, Defining
Control Values/Managing
Q.C. Data)
press PRINT
F1 Test All Data

F2 Test Excluded
F4 Control All Data
F5 Control Excluded
4-25

Q.C. Statistics/Levey-Jennings Screen
When you press F2 Levey-Jennings at the Q.C. Statistics screen,
the Q.C. Statistics/Levey-Jennings screens shows the LeveyJennings plot data for the last 30 calendar days for the first
control defined for the selected test. The screen has these
functions available (also refer to Q.C. Statistics/Details Screens in
this section):
To . . .
First . . .
F1 Data
view the data in tabular

format
view details for a data
point, enter or modify
field values, or exclude
a data point from the
cumulative statistics
move the cursor to

the required data
point
F2 Details
F3 Summary Stats
view statistics for all the

test
same control and test,
over another date range,
or select another vertical
axis on which to scale the
plot (expected mean,
actual mean, or lifetime
mean)
Then press . . .
press F4 Edit, then

move the cursor to:
1. Start Date and/or
End Date, then
press SELECT to
set the date(s).
F4 Update Plot
2. Plotted Against,
then press SELECT
to select the
vertical axis
view data for the next

control defined for the
test
F5 Next Control
view data for the previous

F6 Previous
view 10 data points to the

left of the cursor
F7 Move Left
view 10 data points to the

right of the cursor
F8 Move Right
print a Q.C. report

(refer to the Section 7 tab,
Defining Control Values/
Managing Q.C. Data)
Control
press PRINT
F1 Test
F2 Control
4-26

Q.C. Statistics/Summary Statistics Screen
When you press F3 Summary Stats at the Q.C. Statistics screen,
the Q.C. Statistics/Summary Statistics screen shows the first three
controls defined for the selected test with the expected, actual,
and lifetime statistics for the controls. The screen has these
functions available:
To . . .
First . . .
Then press . . .

format
F1 Data
view the data as a LeveyJennings plot
F2 Levey-Jennings

controls and test, over
another date range
move the cursor

to Start Date
and/or End Date,
then press SELECT
to set the date(s)
view data for three more

test (if there are no more
statistics to show, this
function key is not
available)
F4 Update Stats
F8 More
Q.C. Statistics/QCSystems Screen

When you press F8 QCSystem at the Q.C. Statistics screen, the
Q.C. Statistics/QCSystems screen shows the pool numbers
defined at the Definitions/Controls screen. Function keys are not
available at this screen; however, you can print a report of the
Q.C. statistics for the controls within the defined pool numbers.
To print the report, move the cursor to the required pool number
at the Q.C. Statistics/QCSystems screen, then press PRINT to
obtain the report. The statistics include N, mean, and one S.D.,
for each test and control lot number.
For a detailed explanation of QCSystems reports, refer to the
Section 7 tab Defining Control Values/Managing Q.C. Data.
4-27

Q.C. Statistics/Details Screens
When you press F1 Data or F2 Levey-Jennings at the Q.C.
Statistics screen, the Q.C. Statistics/Data or Q.C. Statistics/LeveyJennings screen shows. A Details function key is available at
each of those screens. To modify the Q.C. data shown on those
screens, you move the cursor to the data point to modify, then
press the Details function key.
When you press F1 Details at the Q.C. Statistics/Data screen, or
press F2 Details at the Q.C. Statistics/Levey-Jennings screen, the
selected Details screen shows and has these functions available:
To . . .
Press . . .
At the Q.C. Statistics/

format
F1 Data
Data/Details screen
view the data as a

Levey-Jennings plot
F2 Levey-
Levey-Jennings/Details
screen
enter or modify the

field values
F4 Edit
Data/Details or
screens
exclude a data point

from the cumulative
Q.C. statistics, or include
a previously excluded
data point
F4 Edit
Data/Details or
screens
view the next data point

for the same control
F7 Next
Data/Details or
screens
view the previous data

point for the same control
F8 Previous
Jennings
Entry
Entry
Data/Details or
screens
For detailed instructions on modifying data at the Details screens,

refer to the Modifying Q.C. Data procedure, at the Section 7 tab
Defining Control Values/Managing Q.C. Data.
4-28

alphabetical order) that can show on the Q.C. Statistics screens:
Actual
the actual control statistics,

including:
1 SD one standard deviation
calculated for the data
points included in the
statistics for the
selected date range
CV% coefficient of variation
calculated for the data
points included in the
statistics for the
selected date range
Mean mean value calculated
for the data points
included in the
statistics for the
selected date range
N
total number of data
points used to calculate
the actual statistics
Data;
Data/Details;
Levey-Jennings/
Details;
Summary Statistics
screens
Comments
modifiable, operator-entered
comments (up to 30
alphanumeric characters)
Data/Details; LeveyJennings/Details screens
Control

control, which was defined at
the Definitions/Controls
screen
all Q.C. Statistics

screens
Control
Rules
the control rules selected for

the test
Data/Details; LeveyJennings/Details screens
Date
(Time)
the date (time) that the

control was assayed and
calculated (results show in
reverse date/time order)
Data;
Data/Details; LeveyJennings; LeveyJennings/Details
screens
End Date
the last date in the date range

for which to show control
results (default is the most
recent entry in the Q.C.
database)
Data;
Levey-Jennings;
Summary Statistics;
QCSystems screens
Excluded
an asterisk to indicate a data

point that is excluded from
the cumulative and actual Q.C.
statistics
Data; Data/Details;
screens
4-29

Expected
the expected statistics for the

selected control (defined at
the Definitions/Control/
Limits screen), including:
1 SD
one standard deviation

value defined for the
selected control
Mean
mean value defined

for the selected control

Data;
Data/Details;
Levey-Jennings/Details;
Summary Statistics
screens
Expiration
Date
expiration date of the selected

control
Data/Details;
Summary Statistics
screens
Lifetime
the lifetime, cumulative

control statistics, including:
Summary Statistics
screen
1 SD
one standard deviation

value calculated since
the last time the Q.C.
database was erased
CV%
coefficient of variation
calculated since the last
time the Q.C. database
was erased
Mean
mean value calculated

since the last time the
Q.C. database was
erased
total number of data

points used to calculate
the lifetime statistics
Lot
Number
the lot number of the

selected control (defined at
the Definitions/Control/
Limits screen)
Data/Details;
Summary Statistics
screens
Operator
the operators initials or ID

(up to 3 alphanumeric
characters)
Data Details;
screens
Plot
Statistics
the actual statistics for the

plotted data, within the
date range shown. These
statistics do not include
excluded data points.
Levey-Jennings screen
4-30

Plotted
Against
the vertical axis used to scale

the Levey-Jennings plot.
This field toggles between:
Actual

Levey-Jennings screen
control performance is plotted

against the actual
mean and 1 S.D.
values for the date
range shown on the
screen
Expected control perform-
ance is plotted
against the expected
mean and one S.D.
values defined for
the selected control
Lifetime
control performance is plotted

against the lifetime
mean and one S.D.
(all the values for
the selected control
since the last time
the Q.C. database
was erased)
Result
the control result
Data;
Data/Details;
Levey-Jennings;
screens
Rule
the control rule defined for

the selected test/control pair
that the selected control result
violated (refer to Selecting
Controls and Control Rules,
at the Section 7 tab, Defining
Control Values/Managing Q.C.
Data, and refer to Section 3,
Understanding the System
Calculations, for explanations
of the control rules).
Data;
Data/Details;
Levey-Jennings;
screens
Start Date
the first date in the date

range for which to show
control results (default is the
oldest entry in the Q.C.
database, or 30 calendar
days before the end date,
whichever is shorter)
Data;
Levey-Jennings;
Summary Statistics
screens
4-31

Status*
the status (error) flag for the

selected test/control pair (the
system shows only the
highest priority error flag for
a control result).
Data;
Data/Details;
screens
Test
the test abbreviation for the

selected test
Data;
Levey-Jennings;
Summary Statistics
screens
Time
the time that the control was

calculated (results show in
reverse date/time order)
Data;
Data/Details;
Levey-Jennings;
screens
* Refer to the Reviewing Run-time Error Flags for Controls procedure,

at the Section 7 tab, Defining Control Values/Managing Q.C. Data,
for a list and explanation of the status (error) flags for controls.
4-32
Definitions Program
The Definitions program enables you to define, modify, or erase
parameter values for tests, profiles, controls, calibrators, and
blanks, and associated parameter values for assay order, reagents,
calibrator concentrations, and control rules. For more
information about using the Definitions program to set up your
system, refer to Section 5, Setting Up the Express Plus.
Use the Definitions program to:
define, modify, or erase customized tests, profiles, controls,
calibrators, and blanks

modify or erase factory-defined parameter values for tests
Figure 4-7 shows the Definitions program and its options.
4-33
Definitions Program (Continued)

Figure 4-7. Definitions Program Map
F5
Definitions
Definitions Menu
Screen
F1 Test
Profile
F2
F3
Definitions/
Profiles Screen
F1 Insert
F4
Definitions/
Controls Screen
Erase
F2
Control
F1 Insert
Definitions/
Profiles/Selection
Screen
F2
Calibrator
Definitions/
Calibrators Screen
Erase
F1 Insert
F2
Definitions/
Blanks Screen
Erase
F1 Insert
Definitions/
Calibrator/
Concentrations
Screen
Definitions/
Control/Limits
Screen
Blank
F5
F2
Erase
Definitions/
Blanks/Selection
Screen
Definitions/Tests
Screen
F1
Insert
F2
Erase
F3
Restore
Definitions/Tests/
Parameters
Screen
F2
Reagents
F3
Assay Order
F4
Calib. Concs.
F5
Controls
F6
Definitions/Tests/
Assay Order
Screen
Definitions/Tests/
Reagents
Screen
ParamF1 eters
ParamAssay
F1 eters
F3 Order
F2
ParamReagents
F1 eters
F2
Calib.
F4 Concs.
Calib.
Controls
F4 Concs. F5
F6
More
ParamReagents
F1 eters
F2
ParamReagents
F1 eters
F2
Reagents
F8
Definitions/Tests/
QCSystems
Screen
Definitions/Tests/
Controls
Screen
Definitions/Tests/
Calibrator
Concentrations
Screen
QCSystem
F5
Assay
F3 Order
Controls
QCSystem
F6
F5
Assay
F3 Order
Controls
QCSystem
F6
Assay
F3 Order
Calib.
F4 Concs.
F5
Calib.
QCSystem
F4 Concs. F6
QCSystem
Controls
4-34

When you select F5 Definitions at the Main Menu, the Definitions
menu screen shows the program options. Press the function key
that corresponds to the option that you need:
To . . .
Press . . .
define, modify, or erase parameters for tests,

including reagents, assay order, calibrator
concentrations, controls, and QCSystem codes
F1 Test
define, modify, or erase profiles
F2 Profile
define, modify, or erase controls
F3 Control
define, modify, or erase calibrators
F4 Calibrator
define, modify, or erase blanks
F5 Blank
Definitions/Tests Screens
When you press F1 Test at the Definitions menu screen, the
Definitions/Tests screen shows the tests currently defined for the
Express Plus and has these functions available:
To . . .
First . . .
Then press . . .
modify a currentlydefined test
move the cursor to

the test to modify
SELECT
define a new test
verify that less

than 48 tests are
currently defined
F1 Insert
erase a defined test
move the cursor to

the test to erase
F2 Erase
restore a modified test

to its factory-programmed
parameter values
move the cursor to

the test to restore
F3 Restore
NOTE
If 48 tests are defined when you press F1 Insert,

the system tells you the maximum number of
tests already exists. If less than 48 tests exist
when you select a test or insert a test, the
Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen shows.
When you erase a test definition, all results,
definitions, and Q.C. statistics for that test are
erased.
4-35

When you select a test or press F1 Insert at the Definitions/Tests
screen, the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen shows (refer to
Figure 4-8) for the selected test and has the following functions
available (when you select a function at the Definitions/Tests/
Parameters screen, the system goes to the selected screen where
these functions are also available):
To . . .
Press . . .
define the reagent parameter values for the test
F2 Reagents
define the wash fluids and wash counts to

reduce reagent carryover
F3 Assay Order
define the calibrator concentrations for the test
F4 Calib. Concs.
define the controls and control rules for the test
F5 Controls
define the QCSystems codes to use with Bayer

Diagnosticss QCSystems program
F6 QCSystem
Figure 4-8. Definitions/Tests/Parameters Screen (Defined Test)
Definitions
Test Name: Albumin

Test Bar Code: 001
Test: Alb
Test Type: Endpoint

Units: g/dL

Tests
Parameters
Review data, then

modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
store definition
or review another
test.
F1
Primary Wavelength: 600nm Secondary Wavelength: 540nm

Sample Blank? No
Factor:
Normalization/Reblanking Interval:
Hours
Low Blank A Limit: 0.010
Low A Limit: -0.250
Low Normal:
3.5
Linearity Limit:
8.0
F2 Reagents F3 Assay
Order
F4 Calib.
Concs.

High A Limit: 0.800
High Normal: 5.3
F5 Controls F6 QCSystem F7
F8
4-36

Definitions/Profiles Screens
When you press F2 Profile at the Definitions menu screen, the
Definitions/Profiles screen shows the profiles currently defined
for the Express Plus and has these functions available:
To . . .
First . . .
Then press . . .
modify a currentlydefined profile
move the cursor to the

profile to modify
SELECT
define a new profile
verify that less

than 10 profiles are
currently defined
F1 Insert
erase a defined profiles

profile to erase
F2 Erase
When you select a profile or press F1 Insert at the Definitions/

Profiles screen, the Definitions/Profiles/Selection screen shows.
Refer to Figure 4-9. The system shows the tests that make up the
profile highlighted on the screen. At this screen, you can type
the name for the profile, move the cursor to each test, then press
SELECT to select or remove the test(s) for the profile definition.
NOTE
If 10 profiles are defined when you press

F1 Insert, the system tells you the maximum
number of profiles exists; otherwise, the system
goes to the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen.
Figure 4-9. Definitions/Profiles/Selection Screen (Example)
Definitions
Profiles
Selection
Press <SELECT>
to select the test
indicated by the
cursor.
Press <EXIT> to
store definition
or review another
profile.
Profile Name: Cardiac

Tests:
Alb
TBili
Creat
Trig
ACP_T
TIBC
ALP
BUN
GGT
UA
ACP_P
ALT
Ca
Gluc_HK
HBD
Mg
Profile Bar Code:
Amy
Chlor
IPhos
HDL
Fe
AST
Chol
LDH_L
CO2
ExFe
DBili
CK
TP
ACP_NP
UIBC
4-37

Definitions/Controls Screens
When you press F3 Control at the Definitions menu screen, the
Definitions/Controls screen shows the controls currently defined
for the Express Plus. The screen has these functions available:
To . . .
First . . .
Then press . . .
modify a currentlydefined control

control to modify
SELECT
define a new control
verify that less

than 13 controls are
currently defined
F1 Insert
erase a defined control

control to erase
F2 Erase
When you select a defined control or press F1 Insert at the

Definitions/Controls screen, the Definitions/Control/Limits screen
shows for the selected control. Refer to Figure 4-10. You can
type the information shown at the top of the screen for the
control, then type each expected mean and one S.D. that you
determine in your laboratory for the tests. If all the tests that use
the control cannot show on one screen, F8 More is available.
NOTE
If 13 controls are defined when you press

number of controls exists; otherwise, the system
goes to the Definitions/Control/Limits screen.
Figure 4-10. Definitions/Control/Limits Screen (Example)
Definitions
Control Name: QCSNorm

Control Bar Code: 01
Control
Limits
Review data then

modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
store the definition
or review another
control.
F1
F2
Expected
Test
Mean
Alb
3.3
ALT
AST
TBili
0.7
Ca
Chol
141.
Creat
Gluc_HK 88.
LDH_L
Trig
74.
HDL
CO2
F3
F4
Lot Number: 020802

Pool Number: 01
Expiration Date: 14-FEB-1992
Expected
Expected Expected
1 SD
Test
Mean
1 SD
0.30
ALP
Amy
DBili
0.1
0.10
0.20
BUN
16.0
3.00
Chlor
98.
4.0
21.0
CK
GGT
9.0
IPhos
TP
5.5
0.30
11.0
UA
5.1
0.50
HBD
ACP_NP
F5
F6
F7
F8 More
4-38

Definitions/Calibrators Screens
When you press F4 Calibrator at the Definitions menu screen, the
Definitions/Calibrators screen shows the calibrators currently
defined for the Express Plus and has these functions available:
To . . .
First . . .
Then press . . .
modify a currentlydefined calibrator

calibrator to modify
SELECT
define a new calibrator
verify that less

than 10 calibrators are
currently defined
F1 Insert
erase a defined calibrator

calibrator to erase
F2 Erase
When you select a calibrator or press F1 Insert at the

Definitions/Calibrators screen, the Definitions/Calibrator/
Concentrations screen shows for the selected calibrator. Refer to
Figure 4-11. The tests that use the selected calibrator show on
the screen. You can type the lot number, bar code, and the
calibrator concentration for each test that uses this calibrator.
NOTE
If 10 calibrators are defined when you press

number of calibrators exists; otherwise, the
system goes to the Definitions/Calibrator/
Concentrations screen.
Figure 4-11. Definitions/Calibrator/Concentrations Screen (Example)
Definitions
Calibrator
Concentrations
Review data and

modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
store the
definition or
review another
calibrator.
Calibrator Name: Multi1

Calibrator Bar Code: 09
Test
Conc.
Test
Alb
4.7
ALP
Amy
AST
TBili
2.1
BUN
Chlor
93.
Chol
Creat
3.2
GGT
IPhos
2.8
LDH_L
Trig
96.
UA
HBD
CO2
ACP_P
ACP_T
Fe
ExFe
TIBC RATIO
Lot Number: L39M

Conc.
15.5
174.
3.0
22.5
RATIO
Test
Conc.
ALT
DBili
0.4
Ca
9.9
CK
Gluc_HK 114.
TP
7.6
HDL
ACP_NP
Mg
2.4
UIBC RATIO
4-39

Definitions/Blanks Screens
When you press F5 Blanks at the Definitions menu screen, the
Definitions/Blanks screen shows the blanks currently defined for
the Express Plus and has these functions available:
To . . .
First . . .
Then press . . .
modify a currentlydefined blank

blank to modify
SELECT
define a new blank
verify that less

than 10 blanks are
currently defined
F1 Insert
erase a defined blank

blank to erase
F2 Erase
When you select a blank or press F1 Insert at the Definitions/

Blanks screen, the Definitions/Blanks/Selection screen shows for
the selected blank. Refer to Figure 4-12. The tests that use the
selected blank show highlighted on the screen. Type the name of
the blank and the blank bar code. Next, move the cursor to each
test that will use the blank, then press SELECT to to select or
remove the test from the definition for the blank.
NOTE
If 10 blanks are defined when you press

number of blanks exists; otherwise, the system
goes to the Definitions/Blanks/Selection screen.
Figure 4-12. Definitions/Blanks/Selection Screen (Example)
Definitions
Blanks
Selection
Press <SELECT> to
select the test
indicated by the
cursor.
Press <EXIT> to
or review another
blank.
Blank Name: H2O1

Tests:
Alb
TBili
Creat
Trig
ACP_T
TIBC
ALP
BUN
GGT
UA
ACP_P
Blank Bar Code:
ALT
Ca
Gluc_HK
HBD
Mg
Amy
Chlor
IPhos
HDL
Fe
AST
Chol
LDH_L
CO2
ExFe
DBili
CK
TP
ACP_NP
UIBC
4-40

alphabetical order) that can show on the Definitions screens:
This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Definitions/
Bar Code
(Rgnt 1, 2,
3, 4)
the alphanumeric bar codes of

the reagents that are used for the
selected test (obtained from the
Test Scheduler)
Tests/Reagents
screen
Blank Bar
Code
the alphanumeric bar code for

the selected blank
Blanks screen
Blank Name
the name of the selected blank
Blanks screen
Bottle Type
the bottle type of the reagent or

diluent (toggles are Plastic, Glass,
or Special; default: Plastic).
When using the Special bottles,
the maximum reagent volume
per test is 80 L per test.
Tests/Reagents
screen
Calibration
Interval
the time (in hours) that can

elapse before the curve for the
selected test requires calibration
(range 0 to 999; default: none).
If this interval is set to none,
calibration is not required for the
test. If this interval is set to zero,
the test is calibrated each time it
is run.
Tests/Parameters
screen
Calibrator
Bar Code

the selected calibrator (obtained
from the Test Scheduler)
Calibrator/
Concentrations
screen
Calibrator
Name

calibrator
Calibrator/
Concentrations
screen
Conc.
the calibrator concentrations

used to calculate a curve for the
selected test
Calibrator/
Concentrations
screen
Conc. n
the unique concentrations for the

calibrators that you defined for
the test at the Definitions/Tests/
Parameters screen
Tests/Calibrator
Concentrations
screen
Control Bar
Code

the selected control (obtained
from the Test Scheduler)
Tests/Controls and
Control/Limits
screens
4-41

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Definitions/
Control
Name
the name of the selected control
Control/Limits
screen
Control Rule
Evaluation
the evaluation criteria for the

selected control rules for the test.
This field toggles between:
Tests/Controls
screen
Expected evaluates control

Mean
performance against
Lifetime
Mean
the expected mean and

one S.D. defined as
target values for the
control at the
Definitions/Control/
Limits screen
evaluates control
performance against
the lifetime mean and
one S.D., which are
calculated from the
actual results stored in
the Q.C. database.
If the S.D. is zero, the
system cannot evaluate
control results.
Control
Rules
the set of control rules defined for

the selected test. The system only
evaluates the control rule if the
rule is defined for the selected
test. All tests are automatically
evaluated using the 1-2s rule.
Refer also to Section 3,
Understanding the System
Calculations.
Tests/Controls
screen
Controls
the names of the controls defined

for use with the selected test.
Control results do not store in the
Q.C. database if controls are not
defined on the system.
Tests/Controls
screen
Curve S.D.
Limit
the standard deviation limit for

the curve (in concentration units
for blanked linear, enzyme linear,
and limited linear curve types)
Tests/Parameters
screen
Curve
Type
the calibration curve type for the

selected test (qualitative, linear,
or nonlinear). Refer also to
Section 3, Understanding the
System Calculations.
Tests/Parameters
screen
4-42

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Definitions/
Diluent
Volume
the volume of diluent used to

dilute a reagent when reagent
and diluent are dispensed
simultaneously (allowable
volumes: 3 to 394 L for initial
dispense; 3 to 150 L for
additional reagent dispenses)
Tests/Reagents
screen
Expected 1
S.D.
the target one S.D. defined for

the selected control (range: 0.00
to 999999; default: none)
If the S.D. is zero, the system
cannot evaluate control results.
Control/Limits
screen
Expected
Mean
the value of the target mean

defined for the selected control
(range: 0.00 to 999999;
default: undefined)
Control/Limits
screen
Expiration
Date
date that the current vial of the

selected control expires
Control/Limits
screen
Factor
the value by which a response is

multiplied to obtain a result
Tests/Parameters
screen
Fluid 1 Bar
Code
bar code used for the non-water

wash fluid 1, which is defined
for the selected test and used to
wash between the selected test
and the test highlighted on the
Assay Order screen
Tests/Assay Order
screen
Fluid 2 Bar
Code
bar code used for the non-water

wash fluid 2, which is defined
for the selected test and used to
wash between the selected test
and the test highlighted on the
Assay Order screen
Tests/Assay Order
screen
High A Limit
highest bichromatic absorbance
Tests/Parameters
screen
limit allowable for kinetic tests

highest response limit
allowable for endpoint tests
highest interval response limit
allowable for two-point tests
High Blank A
Limit
highest average monochromatic

absorbance limit allowable at
the primary wavelength for a
reagent blank
Tests/Parameters
screen
4-43

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Definitions/
High Normal
upper limit of the normal

concentration for the selected test
Tests/Parameters
screen
Lag Time
the elapsed time between two

reagent dispenses, or between the
final dispense cycle and the start
of read time (range: 0 to 600
seconds, in even multiples of 10).
use 600 seconds or less for the
total lag time
use a lag time of at least 20
seconds for an additional
single or double dispense,
after an initial single-reagent
dispense
use a lag time of at least 30
seconds for a three-reagent
dispense, for an initial tworeagent dispense, or for a
single-reagent dispense for a
diluted sample
minimum lag time between
the last dispense and the start
of read time is 10 seconds
to dispense two reagents
simultaneously, use a lag
time of 0 for the first reagent
to dispense three reagents
simultaneously after an
initial single-reagent dispense,
use a lag time of 0 for the first
and second reagents
Tests/Reagents
screen
Linearity
Limit
the maximum concentration

that is still within the linear
region of the curve and used to
identify samples that exceed the
linear concentration area of the
curve (flags as High Conc.)
Tests/Parameters
screen
Lot Number
lot number of the selected

calibrator
Calibrator/
Concentrations
screen
Lot Number
lot number of the selected control
Control/Limits
screen
4-44

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Definitions/
Low A Limit
lowest bichromatic
Tests/Parameters
screen
absorbance limit allowable

for kinetic tests
lowest response limit
allowable for endpoint tests
lowest interval response limit
allowable for two-point tests

Low Blank A
Limit
lowest average monochromatic

absorbance limit at the primary
wavelength for a reagent blank
Tests/Parameters
screen
Low Normal
lower limit of the normal

concentration for the selected
test
Tests/Parameters
screen
Method Code
two-digit code defined by

Bayer Diagnostics QCSystems
for the test method used for the
selected test (range: 0 to 99;
default: factory-defined code)
Tests/QCSystems
screen
No. of
Calibrators
number of calibrators
(including blanks) the system
assays and uses to calibrate the
curve for the test (range: 0 to 6;
default: 1)
Tests/Parameters
screen
No. of Decimal
Places
number of places to the right of

the decimal point that the
system shows on the screen and
prints on collated reports for
the test results (range: 0 to 3;
default: 0)
Tests/Parameters
screen
No. of
Replicates
number of times each calibrator

is assayed for the test (range: 1
to 3; default: 1)
Tests/Parameters
screen
Normalization/
Reblanking
Interval
time (in hours) that can elapse

before the calibration curve for
the test requires normalization
or reblanking (normalization is
for nonlinear curve types only;
reblanking is for blanked linear
curve types only)
Tests/Parameters
screen
Pool Number
pool number defined for the

selected control and supplied by
Control/Limits
screen
4-45

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Definitions/
Predilution
Ratio
ratio of total volume to sample

volume used when the system
performs a predilution of a
sample (range: 10 to 100;
default: 1)
Tests/Reagents
screen
Primary
Wavelength
first wavelength used to take

readings on the cuvette. This
reading is compared to the
second or background
wavelength reading (available
wavelengths: 340, 380, 405, 510,
540, 570, and 600 nm).
Tests/Parameters
screen
Profile Bar
Code
bar code used for the selected

profile and obtained from the
Test Scheduler
Profiles/Selection
screen
Profile Name
name defined for the selected

profile
Profiles/Selection
screen
Ratio
Definition
mathematical expression of up
to 58 characters used to
describe how to calculate a ratio
test (allowable math operators
are: +, -, , (, ), and /)
Tests/Parameters
screen
Read
Time/Interval
two-point test types: the

start-to-start time, in 10second intervals, for the two
read intervals
all other test types: the total
time period, 10-second
intervals, when readings are
taken on the sample
Tests/Parameters
screen
Reagent Code
two-digit code defined by

for the reagent used for the
selected test (default: factorydefined code)
Tests/QCSystems
screen
Reagent
Diluent Bar
Code
bar code defined for the reagent

diluent for the selected test
Tests/Reagents
screen
Reagent
Diluent Bottle
Type
bottle type used by the defined

reagent diluent (toggles: Plastic,
Glass, and Special; default:
Plastic). When using Special
bottles, the maximum reagent
volume is 80 L per test.
Tests/Reagents
screen
4-46

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Definitions/
Reagent
Volume
amount of reagent used in the

reaction mixture:
total reaction volume is 250
to 450 L
use 3 to 394 L for
Reagent 1
use 3 to 400 L for
Reagent 2 as part of the
initial dispense (if Reagent 2
is not part of the initial
dispense, use 3 to 150 L)
use 3 to 150 L for
Reagent 3 and Reagent 4
minimum volume for any
dispense is 50 L
maximum volume for first
dispense is 400 L (for
example: sample plus one or
two reagents)
maximum volume for
additional reagent dispenses
is 150 L
if two reagents are aspirated
and both use a diluent, the
system treats it as a threereagent dispense
use no more than three fluids
(including diluent and
sample) in one dispense
when using Special as the
reagent bottle type,
maximum reagent volume is
80 L per test
Tests/Reagents
screen
Rerun Dilution
Ratio
ratio of the defined sample

volume to the volume used for
an automatic rerun of the
sample (toggles: 1, 2, 5, or 10
depending on the sample
volume). For example, if you
specify a 1:2 ratio, the system
aspirates half the sample
volume.
Tests/Reagents
screen
Rgnt 1, 2, 3, 4
first, second, third, and fourth

reagents defined for the test
Tests/Reagents
screen
Sample Blank?
whether a sample blanking is

used for the selected test
(toggles: Yes or No; default:
No)
Tests/Parameters
screen
4-47

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Definitions/
Sample
Diluent Bar
Code
bar code defined for the sample

diluent for the selected test
Tests/Reagents
screen
Sample
Diluent Bottle
Type
bottle type used by the defined

sample diluent (toggles: Plastic,
Glass, and Special; default:
Plastic). When using Special
bottles, the maximum reagent
volume is 80 L.
Tests/Reagents
screen
Sample
Volume
volume of sample used to assay

the test, or volume of diluted
sample if the system performs a
predilution of the sample:
sample volume is 3 to 30 L
total reaction volume is 250
to 450 L
Tests/Reagents
screen
Secondary
Wavelength
second wavelength used to take

a reading on the cuvette. This
reading is used as the
background reading of the
cuvette to compensate for the
absorption of the cuvette
(available wavelengths: 340, 380,
405, 510, 540, 570, and 600 nm,
or none)
Tests/Parameters
screen
Test
the abbreviation for the selected

test (up to 7 alphanumeric
characters)
all Tests screens
Test Bar Code
bar code used for the selected

test (obtained from the Test
Scheduler)
all Tests screens
Test Code
three-digit code defined by

for the selected test (range: 0 to
999; default: factory-defined
code)
Tests/QCSystems
screen
Test Name
name of the selected test
all Tests screens
Tests
defined tests used as part of a

profile, or selected to use the
same controls, blanks, or
calibrators
Profiles, Controls,
Calibrators, and
Blanks screens
4-48

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Definitions/
Test Type
calculation method used for the

selected test:
Endpoint
obtains values at
intervals and averages
them to determine
the mean absorbance
(response) relative to
a zero point
Kinetic
calculates results
from the change in
bichromatic
absorbance over a
period of time
Off-System another system assays
the tests and the
Express Plus includes
the results in the
collated report
Ratio
calculates a result,
using the results of
other tests in a
defined mathematical
expression
Two-point
calculates the total
response as the
difference between
two readings
Tests/Parameters
screen
Units
units used to report test

concentrations (maximum of 10
characters)
Tests/Parameters,
Tests/QCSystems
screens
Units Code
three-digit code representing the

units used to report results and
defined by Bayer Diagnostics
QCSystems for the selected test
Tests/QCSystems
screen
Wash Count
number of washes to use between

the selected test and the highlighted test at the Assay Order
screen (toggles: 1 or 2; default: 1)
Tests/Assay Order
screen
Wash Fluid
wash fluid to use for the washes

between the selected test and the
test highlighted at the Assay
Order screen (toggles: NONE,
Water, Fluid 1, or Fluid 2; default:
NONE)
Tests/Assay Order
screen
4-49
Options Program
The Options program contains the system, printing,
communications, and disk options that allow you to manage the
set up and customizing of your Express Plus.
Refer to Section 5, Setting Up the Express Plus, for more
information about using the Options program to set up and
customize the available options.
Refer to Section 9, Maintaining the Express Plus for procedures
on backing up and restoring data and system calibration files, and
resetting the system.
If you have communications enabled for your Express Plus, refer
to the documents that accompany your Express Plus
Communications software option for details on setting the
communications configuration and protocols.
Use the Options program to:
customize the installation option settings
customize the selection of the default printer and the printing
of collated reports
customize the order in which the system shows the tests on the
screen and prints the test names on reports

configure the system for communications with another device
select the disk option procedures that you want to use
erase the system databases, then reset them to their factory-
programmed values
Figure 4-13 shows the Options program and its functions:
Figure 4-13. Options Program Map
F6 Options
Options Menu
Screen
System
F1 Options
Printing
F2 Options
F3
Backup
Data
Files
Restore
F2 Data
Files
F3 Backup
F4 Restore
F5
System
System
Calibrations
Calibrations
F1
Test
Order
CommuniF4 cations
F5
Disk
Options
Backup
Program
Files
F6
F6
Reset
System
Format
Floppy
Disk
4-50
Options Program (Continued)

When you select F6 Options at the Main Menu, the Options
menu screen shows the program functions. Press the function
key that corresponds to the function that you need:
To . . .
Press . . .
customize the installation option settings, such as

operating temperature, sample tray format, language,
screen saver, automatic test shutdown, and software
options
F1 System
customize the selection of the default printer (system

or external) and the printing of run-time and collated
reports
F2 Printing
customize the order in which the system shows on the

screen and prints the test names
F3 Test
configure the system for communications with a

peripheral device
F4 Communi-
Options
Options
Order
cations
When you configure the system to communicate with

another device, the following function keys show on
the screen:
F1 Download to transmit a worklist from a host
Worklist
computer to an Express Plus
F2 Upload
Results
transmit a series of patient and

control results available from the
Express Plus to a host computer
F3 Reset
Channel
initialize the communications

channel for the port you need to reset
(not active for LIS 2, LIS 2 Plus, or
unconfigured channels)
CAUTION
If you are using communications on your system,

refer to the backup and restore procedures in
Section 9, Maintaining the Express Plus, for
steps you need to take to prepare the
communications for those disk option functions;
otherwise, the system will produce a fatal error
that can cause the system software to require
reloading.
4-51

To . . .
Press . . .
select the disk option procedures that you want to use,

such as formatting a disk, or backing up and restoring
files
F5 Disk
Options
When you select this function, these function keys

show on the screen:
F1 Backup
Data Files
use to copy worklists, patient

and control results, Q.C. statistics,
and definitions from the hard disk to
floppy disk(s); (1 disk, or 4 disks
with Q.C.)
F2 Restore
Data Files
use to copy worklists, patient

and control results, Q.C. statistics,
and definitions from the backup
floppy disk(s) to the hard disk
F3 Backup
System
Calibrations
use to copy system calibration

values from the hard disk to a
floppy disk; (1 disk)
F4 Restore
System
Calibrations
use to copy system calibration

values from the backup floppy
disk to the hard disk
F5 Backup
Program
Files
use to copy system program

files from the hard disk to
floppy disk(s); (7 disks)
F6 Format
Floppy Disk
use to format a floppy disk in

the system floppy disk drive (all
disks used to make backup disks
must be formatted)
erase the databases for definitions, worklist, and

patient results, then reset the system databases to their
factory-programmed values
NOTE
F6 Reset
System
To backup your Q.C. statistics with your other

data files, you need four formatted disks;
otherwise, you need one formatted disk to
backup the data files without Q.C. statistics.
Use only a 3.5-inch, high-density, double-sided
disk that is not write-protected for making
backup disks or restoring data files. If you use
another type of disk, the system shows an error
message.
For detailed information about backing up and restoring files,

and resetting the system, refer to Section 9, Maintaining the
Express Plus.
4-52

alphabetical order) that can show on the Options screens:
At the Options/
Automatic
Test
Shutdown
whether the automatic test

shutdown feature is enabled or
disabled (toggles: Yes or No;
default: No). When enabled, the
system prevents the affected test
from being assayed when a control
result violates a selected control
rule for the test (violation of 1-2s
rule does not stop testing)
System Options
screen
Baud Rate
the speed at which the system

sends or receives data when it is
communicating with another
device. The same baud rate must
be set for the other device to
transmit or receive data (toggles:
110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600; default: 9600).
Communications
screen
Collate By
how to identify the samples when

the host or remote system requests
worklist information from, or
transmits results to, another device
(toggles: Cup Number or Request
Number; default: Cup Number)
Communications
screen
Collated
Reports
your selection of how the system

should print the collated patient
reports (toggle: ON or OFF;
default: OFF). Two collated
reports are available:
Automatic print for Stats
when set to ON, the system
automatically prints Stat results
when all tests in the worklist
are completed
Printing Options
screen
Automatic print for routine

samples
when set to ON, the system
automatically prints the results
for routine samples when all the
test in the worklist are
completed
Data Bits
the number of data bits

transmitted for each character
(toggles: 7 or 8; default: 8). Set
the data bits for each
communication port in use.
Communications
screen
4-53

At the Options/
Default
Printer
the printer you select to use to

print run-time or collated reports.
(toggles: System, DEC or
Proprinter; default: System).
Printing Options
screen
Device
the device connected to the selected

RS-232 port (toggles: Analyzer,
LIS3, LIS2 Plus, LIS2, or NONE;
default: NONE). Set this field for
each communications port in use.
Communications
screen
Device
Number
the number you assign to a

connected device (allowable
integers: 1 through 99; default: 1)
A 664 Fast 4 always uses device
number 99.
Communications
screen
Enable
Polling
when the Express Plus is

communicating with a connected
LIS device that uses the LIS3
protocol (toggles: Yes or No;
default: Yes)
Communications
screen
Enable
Screen
Saver
whether the screen saver option is

selected for use. The screen saver
helps prevent phosphor etching of
the system screen (toggles: Yes or
No; default: Yes).
System Options
screen
Host Device/
Remote
Device
your selection of the Express Plus

as the host or remote device
(toggles: Host or Remote; default:
Host).
Host
the Express Plus (host)
manages the other devices
(remote) connected to it
Remote the Express Plus (remote)
relies on another device
(host) for its worklist
information
Communications
screen
Operating
Temperature
the temperature the system uses to

assay tests (toggles: 30 C or 37 C;
default 37 C)
System Options
screen
Options
the software options available for

the Express Plus and whether those
options are enabled (options:
Positive Sample Identification and
Express Communication Package)
System Options
screen
4-54

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Options/
Parity
the part of the format the system

uses to transmit data to a
connected device (set for each
communications port in use). The
same parity is used to transmit and
receive data (toggles: NONE, ODD,
EVEN, MARK, or SPACE; default:
NONE).
Communications
screen
QCSystems
Instrument
Code
the two-digit code that is factoryprogrammed for the Express Plus

by Bayer Diagnostics QCSystems
(must be set to 81)
System Options
screen
Receiving
Tray/Cup
the sample tray and cup number

currently being downloaded in a
batch worklist from a host
computer (shows after you press
F1 Download Worklist and while
the batch worklist is transmitted)
Communications
screen
Report
Heading
the heading that you type for the

system to print on your collated
reports (maximum of six lines of
40 characters)
System Options
screen
Request
Number
the request number currently

being downloaded in a batch
worklist from a host computer
(shows after you press
F1 Download Worklist and while
the batch worklist is transmitted)
Communications
screen
RS-232 Ports:
Port Number 1
Port Number 2
Port Number 3
the configured communications

ports used to connect devices to
the Express Plus (each port has its
own configuration settings)
Communications
screen
4-55

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Options/
Run-Time
Reports
the reports that automatically

print on the system or external
printer at the time of a run
(toggles: ON or OFF)
Calibrator/Control Log
when ON, the system automatically prints calibrator and
control results at the time of a
run (default: ON)
Error Log
when ON, the system automatically prints any error flags
with the results at the time of a
run (default: ON)
Result Log
when ON, the system automatically prints patient and control
results at the time of a run
(default: ON)
Send Run-Time Reports to default
printer
when ON, run-time reports will
print on the default printer.
When OFF, run-time reports
will print on the system printer.
(default: OFF)
Printing Options
screen
Sample Tray
Format
the tray that the system uses to

sequentially number the sample
positions during a run
(toggles: 40-Position or 20Position; default: 40-Position)
40-Position you can use up to
nine 40-position
sample trays
(A through I)
20-Position you can use up to
nine 20-position
sample trays
(A through I)
System Options
screen
System
Language
the language you select to use to

show the text on the system screen
(default: English)
System Options
screen
4-56

This field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Options/
Stop Bits
the number of stop bits the system

uses to maintain synchronization
between itself and a connected
device. The same number of stop
bits is used to transmit and receive
data (toggles: 1, 1 , or 2;
default: 1)
Communications
screen
System Clock
the date (DD-MMM-YYYY) and

time (HH:MM) set for the internal,
24-hour system clock. The date
and time show on the screen, print
on the reports, and is used to
monitor calibration intervals.
System Options
screen
Transmit
Results
Incrementally?
whether the Express Plus will

automatically send results to a
device that uses an LIS3, LIS2
Plus, or LIS2 protocol as they are
calculated at the system or
received from a remote device
(toggles: Yes or No; default: No).
Communications
screen
XON/XOFF
that the Express Plus does not

require XON/XOFF values for data
transmission (this field is set to
OFF and is not modifiable)
Communications
screen
NOTE
For complete information about using the

Express Plus Communications software option,
refer to the following documents:
Express Plus Communications Enabling Disk

Instructions
4-57
The Diagnostics/Maintenance program enables you to perform
several maintenance, calibration, and troubleshooting procedures
for your Express Plus. Refer to Section 9, Maintaining the
Express Plus, for complete maintenance information. Refer also
to Section 10, Troubleshooting the Express Plus, for complete
troubleshooting information.
Use the Diagnostics/Maintenance program to:
perform startup and end-of-day procedures
perform a precision check of the system
align the lamp
calibrate the probe tip
perform various manual operations of the system components
view the current system software, hardware, and firmware
version numbers for various system components

Figure 4-14 shows the Diagnostics/Maintenance program and its
functions:
Figure 4-14. Diagnostics/Maintenance Program Map
F7 Diagnostics/Maintenance
Diagnostics/
Maintenance
Menu Screen
Precision
F1 Check
F1
Start-ofDay
F2
End-ofDay
Manual
F2 Operations
Prime
F3 Digital
Diluter
F4
Lamp
F3 Alignment
Select
Reagent
F5
Select
Sample
System
F4 Version
F6
Wash
Position
Probe Tip
F5 Calibration
F7
Load
Cuvette
Strip
F8
Purge
Cuvette
Track
4-58
Diagnostics/Maintenance Program (Continued)

When you select F7 Diagnostics/Maintenance at the Main Menu,
the Diagnostics/Maintenance menu screen shows the program
functions. Press the function key that corresponds to the
function that you need:
To . . .
Press . . .
assay several replicates of a sample for a selected

test to verify the precision of the system
F1 Precision
manually operate some of the system components

when error conditions occur.
F2 Manual
Check
Operations
These functions are available on the screen:

F1 Start-of-Day
prepare the system for operation:

homes the digital diluter
homes the sample transport
homes the reagent transport
resets the sample tray to cup
number 1
primes the digital diluter
removes used cuvettes from the
track
loads a clean cuvette into the
track
F2 End-of-Day
prepare the system for shutdown:

cleans the probe
resets the sample tray to cup
number 1
removes used cuvettes from the
cuvette track
F3 Prime Digital
Diluter
circulate enough water through

the digital diluter to fill the
tubing and diluter
F4 Select
Reagent
rotate the reagent tray to the

dispense position for the selected
reagent position
F5 Select
Sample
rotate the sample tray to the

dispense position for the selected
sample cup or pediatric cup
F6 Wash
Position
position the probe at the wash

station
F7 Load Cuvette
Strip
load a cuvette strip into the

cuvette track
F8 Purge Cuvette
Track
move a cuvette strip into the

cuvette track, then purge the
remaining strips from the track
4-59

To . . .
Press . . .
adjust the lamp for a maximum photometer

reading, or align a new lamp after you install it
F3 Lamp
view the software, hardware, and firmware version

of various system components
F4 System
calibrate the fluid level limits, for a sample cup or

pediatric cup, after you replace the probe tip
F5 Probe Tip
Alignment
Version
Calibration
Diagnostics Maintenance/Precision Check Screen

When you press F1 Precision Check at the Diagnostics/
Maintenance menu screen, a Diagnostics Maintenance/Precision
Check screen shows the defined tests. When you select a test, the
next Diagnostics Maintenance/Precision Check screen shows and
the system prompts you to take the actions required to start the
Precision Check. When the Precision Check completes, the
system shows the mean, S.D. and C.V. for the selected test, along
with the results and any error flags for each sample replicate.
Refer to Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15. Precision Check Screen (Example)
Diagnostics/
Maintenance
Precision
Check
Precision check
complete. Press
<EXIT> to select
another test, or
press <START> to
rerun.
Test Name: Gluc_HK

Replicate
Number Result
1
271.174
3
263.189
5
264.287
7
264.123
9
263.005
11
262.227
13
264.937
15
260.443
17
263.155
19
259.678
Mean: 263.005
S.D. :
2.904
C.V. : 1.105 %
Flag
Replicate
Number
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Result
265.908
259.001
260.783
259.228
264.489
262.696
265.003
263.995
261.489
263.300
Flag
4-60

Diagnostics Maintenance/Lamp Alignment Screen
When you press F3 Lamp Alignment at the Diagnostics/
Maintenance menu screen, a Diagnostics Maintenance/Lamp
Alignment screen shows and the system prompts you to take the
actions required to start the Lamp Alignment. When the Lamp
Alignment completes, the system shows the photometer reading
obtained during the alignment procedure and prompts you to
adjust the lamp to obtain the maximum photometer reading (the
reading must be greater than 1.00). Refer to Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16. Diagnostics Maintenance/Lamp Alignment Screen
Diagnostics/
Maintenance
Lamp
Alignment
Remove waste and

distilled water
bottles and tray,
then adjust lamp
to obtain maximum
photometer
reading.
To align the lamp:

1) Using the horizontal adjustment thumbscrew (on the
right-hand side of the lamp housing), adjust the
horizontal position of the lamp.
2) Using the vertical adjustment thumbscrew (on the
bottom of the lamp housing), adjust the vertical
position of the lamp.
3) Using the focus adjustment thumbscrew (on the front of
the lamp housing), adjust the focus of the lamp to
maximize the photometer reading.
4) Repeat Steps 1 through 3 until you obtain a maximum
photometer reading.
5) If you cannot adjust the lamp intensity to a value
greater than 1.00, replace the lamp.
Photometer Reading: 1.684
Reading must be greater than 1.00
4-61

Diagnostics Maintenance/System Version Screen
When you press F4 System Version at the Diagnostics/
Maintenance menu screen, a Diagnostics Maintenance/System
Version screen shows the software, hardware, and firmware
versions of the Main CPU, the sequencer, the I/O processor, and
each Machine Controller Board. Refer to Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17. Diagnostics Maintenance/System Version Screen
(Example)
Diagnostics/
Maintenance
System Version
Main CPU
Software Version: MAIN V1.00
Operating System: MTSAPO V1.00
Sequencer
Software Version: SEQ V1.00
Operating System: MSQAPO V1.00
I/O Processor Version: IO V1.00
Machine Controllers
Track:
Probe:
Diluter:
Transports:
Hardware
3
3
3
3
Firmware
TRACK
V2.0
PROBE
V2.01
DILUTER
V2.0
TRANSPORT V2.08
4-62

Diagnostics Maintenance/Probe Tip Calibration Screen
When you press F5 Probe Tip Calibration at the Diagnostics/
Maintenance menu screen, a Diagnostics Maintenance/Probe Tip
Calibration screen explains how to perform the probe tip
calibration. This procedure is required after replacing the system
probe tip to ensure that the system uses the correct fluid level for
sample cups or pediatric cups. Refer to Figure 4-18.
When the probe tip calibration completes successfully, a probe
tip calibration report prints and provides a comparison of
calibration values between the current calibration and the last
time you calibrated the probe tip. If the difference between any
pair of values is more than 15 units, you need to calibrate the
probe tip again.
NOTE
If errors occur during the calibration, the system

stops and does not store the calibration values.
If the calibration is successful the Probe
Calibration Constants report prints.
Figure 4-18. Diagnostics Maintenance/Probe Tip Calibration Screen
Diagnostics/
Maintenance
Probe Tip
Calibration
To calibrate fluid level limits after replacing probe tip:

1) Load an empty reagent bottle (glass) in position 1 and
a full bottle of deproteinizing solution in position 26
on the reagent tray. Install the reagent cover.
2) Load an empty sample cup in position 1 on the sample
tray, install the cover, then press <SELECT> to select
the cup type: Sample Cup
Please wait. The

system is
performing the
selected
function.
3) Ensure that at least two cuvette strips are visible in

the cuvette feeder.
4) Verify the water levels in the distilled water bottle
and waste water bottle. Fill or empty as required.
5) Press <ENTER> to begin the calibration.
NOTE: If errors occur during the calibration, the
calibration stops, and no values are stored. If the
calibration is successful, a report prints on the
default printer.
4-63

alphabetical order) that can show on the Diagnostics/
Maintenance screens:
This
field . . .
Shows . . .
At the Diagnostics/
Maintenance
C.V.
the coefficient of variation of all

the Precision Check results
Precision Check
screen
Firmware
the firmware versions of the track,

probe, diluter, and transports
System Version
screen
Flag
any flags associated with the

Precision Check results. Refer to
Section 10, Troubleshooting the
Express Plus, for more information
Precision Check
screen
Hardware
the hardware versions of the track,

probe, diluter, and transports
System Version
screen
I/O
Processor
Version
the version of the I/O processor
System Version
screen
Machine
Controllers
the hardware and firmware

versions of the machine controllers
(track, probe, diluter, and
transports)
System Version
screen
Main CPU
the software version and operating

system version of the main Central
Processing Unit (CPU)
System Version
screen
Mean
the mean of all of the Precision

Check results
Precision Check
screen
Photometer
Reading
the photometer reading obtained

during the lamp alignment
procedure, or during the lamp
adjustment sequence
Lamp Alignment
screen
Replicate
Number
the number of times the system

reads the Precision Check sample
Precision Check
screen
Result
the result obtained for each

Precision Check replicate
Precision Check
screen
S.D.
the standard deviation of all the

Precision Check results
Precision Check
screen
Sequencer
the software version and operating

system version of the sequencer
System Version
screen
Test Name
the test used for the Precision

Check
Precision Check
screen
4-64

Load Alternate Program contains program functions used to help
Bayer Diagnostics Field Service Engineers troubleshoot your
Express Plus and enable you to load system software updates.
Figure 4-19 shows the Load Alternate Program and its options:
Figure 4-19. Load Alternate Program Map
F8 Load Alternate Program
Load Alternate
Program
Screen
F1
Boot
Floppy
CAUTION
The Calibrations and Manual Tests program is for

use by Bayer Diagnostics Field Service
Engineers only. Unauthorized use of this
program can damage your system and void your
warranty.
When you press F8 Load Alternate Program at the Main Menu, the
Load Alternate Program screen shows with the cursor at Express
Plus User Programs. Use this program only if you need to reload
your system software. Refer to Figure 4-20.
Figure 4-20. Load Alternate Program Screen
Load Alternate
Program
Alternate Programs
Express Plus User Programs
Calibrations and Manual Tests
Press <SELECT>
to select the
program indicated
by the cursor.
F1 Boot
Floppy
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
5-1

About This Section
Page
5-3
Setting Installation Options

5-5
Defining and Customizing Parameters

5-11
5-12
Defining Test Parameters
5-14
Defining Profiles
5-24
5-26
Defining Controls
5-27
5-30
Defining Blanks
5-33
Backing Up the Settings

5-37
5-41
5-2
5 Setting Up the Express Plus (Continued)

This section of the manual provides step-by-step procedures for
setting certain software options, such as system options that you
can set at installation, test order options, and printing preference
options. This section also includes step-by-step procedures for
setting or modifying test, profile, calibrator, control, and blank
parameters to customize those parameters for your laboratory.
Use this chart to find the procedures that you need in this
section.
Refer to . . .
set these system options:

operating temperature
sample tray format
date and time
language used for online text
QCSystems instrument code
whether to use the screen saver or
the automatic test shutdown
features
Tab:
set the other available options:

your printing preferences for
printing reports
the default printer to use for your
system
the test order that shows on the
screen
Tab:
define or modify parameter values

for tests, profiles, calibrators,
controls, or blanks
Tab:
Defining and Customizing
Parameters
make backup disks of your data files

(system options, definitions,
calibration curve data, worklist data,
patient results, and Q.C. data if
required)
Tab:
restore the data files information

back onto the system
Tab:
5-3
About This Section

The Express Plus has several options that you can set after
installing your system. Once you set the options, the Express
Plus stores the values in system memory. You only need to set
the options once; however, if you need to use a new value for an
option, you can modify that setting.
This section explains the following options:
System Options
Printing Options
Test Order
Definitions Program options
Refer to Section 4, Understanding the Express Plus Programs, for

details on the remaining functions available in the Options and
Definitions programs, and the screen fields and function keys for
those programs.
5-5

To set or modify the installation options:
1. At the Main Menu, press F6 Options.
2. At the Options menu screen, press F1 System Options.
3. At the Options/System Options screen, shown in Figure 5-1,
move the cursor to the option that you need to set or modify.
CAUTION
Selecting a new system language erases all

customized test definitions, customized options,
Q.C. statistics and the worklist, including all
results.
Figure 5-1. Options/System Options Screen with Default Values
Options
System Options
Operating Temperature: 37C

Sample Tray Format: 40-Position
System Clock: 20-MAR-1992 13:25
System Language: English
Review data and

modify if
required.
Enable Screen Saver? Yes
Press <EXIT> to
store what you
modified.
Automatic Test Shutdown? Yes
QCSystems Instrument Code: 81
Options:
Positive Sample Identification:
DISABLED
Express Communications Package: DISABLED
5-6
Setting or Modifying Options (Continued)

4. Press SELECT to select the value for the option setting, or
type a value:
To set the . . .
Move the cursor to . . .
temperature the system uses to

assay tests
Operating Temperature, then

press SELECT to set the value at
30C or 37C
method for sequentially

numbering the sample positions
Sample Tray Format, then press

SELECT to set the value
(40-Position or 20-Position)
current date and time that

shows in the Status zone; also
used to time calibration
intervals and print on reports
System Clock, then press

SELECT to set: DD-MMM-YYYY
(day-month-year), and HH:MM
screen saver option
Enable Screen Saver, then press

SELECT to set the value (Yes to
enable or No to disable)
when enabled, if the keyboard is

not used for 15 minutes, the
screen turns off to avoid
phosphor etching; press any
keyboard key to turn the screen
back on
(hours:minutes)
two-digit instrument code

supplied by Bayer Diagnostics
QCSystems
QCSystems Instrument Code
option that stops the test if

control results violate a defined
control rule (1-2s rule violations
do not stop testing)
Automatic Test Shutdown, then

press SELECT to set the value
(Yes to enable or No to disable)
optional software options. You

must have the optional software
installed to enable or disable
these functions; refer to the
software option addendum.
not modifiable at this screen;

ENABLED or DISABLED shows on
the screen to indicate if you have
the option installed on your
system
NOTE
(this field is not modifiable;

factory-defined default is 81)
For detailed instructions on setting up the

system for hardware accessories or software
options, refer to the addendum, instructions, or
manuals that accompany the option or
accessory.
5-7

NOTE
If you set the sample tray format option to

20-Position, you can use the 40-position tray, but
you can enter requests for the first 20 positions
only.
If you set the sample tray format option to
40-Position, you can use the 20-position trays,
but if requests in the worklist use cup numbers
higher than 20, those requests are not assayed.
To store the settings or modifications press EXIT.
If you press CANCEL after setting or modifying
the options, the values reset to their previous
settings and the system clock resets to the time
shown in the Status zone.
If you press MAIN MENU to return to the Main
Menu after setting or modifying the options, the
settings or modifications do not store in system
memory.
5. Press EXIT to store the system option settings in system

memory and return to the Options menu screen.
6. At the Options menu screen, press F2 Printing Options.
7.
At the Options/Printing Options screen, shown in Figure 5-2,

move the cursor to the option that you want to set or modify.
Figure 5-2. Options/Printing Options Screen (Example)
Options
Printing
Options
Run-Time Reports
Calibrator/Control Log: ON
Error Log: ON
Result Log: ON
Send Run-Time Reports to default printer: OFF
Default Printer: System
Review data and

modify if
required.
Collated Reports
Automatic print for Stats: ON
Automatic print for routine samples:OFF
Press <EXIT> to
store what you
modified.
Report Heading:
General Laboratories
123 Main Avenue
Oberlin, Ohio 44012
5-8

8. Press SELECT to set the option, or type a value.
To set the . . .
reports that automatically print

on the system or external
printer while the system assays
tests (when these options are set
to ON, the system or external
printer prints the results or flags
at run time)
Calibrator/Control Log, then

press SELECT to set the
option to ON (print) or OFF
(do not print)
Error Log, then press SELECT
to set the option to ON (print)

or OFF (do not print)
Result Log, then press

SELECT to set the option to
ON (print) or OFF (do not

print)
printer you want to use to print
run-time reports
Send Run-Time Reports to

default printer, then press
SELECT to set the option to OFF
(print on the system printer) or

ON (print on the default printer)
default printer you want to use
to print reports
If you select DEC or Proprinter
as the default printer, but you
do not connect the DEC or
IBM Proprinter-compatible
printer to the system, the
Express Plus can fail to show
detected errors in the Status
zone.
Default Printer, then press

SELECT to set the option to
System (system printer), DEC
(approved DEC printer), or

Proprinter (approved IBM
Proprinter-compatible printer)
For more detailed information
on approved printers, contact the
Technical Assistance Center at
1-800-255-2121 in the
Continental United States, or call
your subsidiary or authorized
agent.
5-9

To set the . . .
collated reports that

automatically print when the
tests are completed
Automatic print for Stats, then

press SELECT to set the
option to ON (print) or OFF
(do not print)
Automatic print for routine

samples, then press SELECT
to set the option to ON (print)

or OFF (do not print)
heading that you want to print
at the top of each collated
patient report
each line of the Report Heading,

then type the required heading
(up to six lines of 40 characters)
9. Press EXIT to store the printing options settings in system

10. At the Options menu screen, press F3 Test Order.
11. At the Options/Test Order screen, shown in Figure 5-3, move
the cursor to the test that you want to move, then press
SELECT to highlight the test.
5-10

Figure 5-3. Options/Test Order Screen (Example)
Options
Test Order
Alb
TBili
Creat
Trig
ACP_T
TIBC
ALP
BUN
GGT
UA
ACP_P
ALT
Ca
Gluc_HK
HDL
Mg
Amy
Chlor
IPhos
HBD
Fe
AST
Chol
LDH_L
CO2
ExFe
DBili
CK
TP
ACP_NP
UIBC
Press <SELECT> to
select the test
that you want to
move.
Press <EXIT> to
store what you
modified.
12. Move the cursor to the test that you want to show after the
selected test in the test order, then press SELECT again. The
test that you selected moves to the position you indicate.
NOTE
If you press SELECT twice when the cursor is at

the same test abbreviation, the test is not
selected and cannot move to its new position.
13. Press EXIT to store your customized test order in system

5-11

The Definitions program options enable you to define or modify
the parameter values for a test, profile, control, calibrator, or
blank to customize those options for your laboratory.
To select an option:
1. At the Main Menu, press F5 Definitions.
2. At the Definitions menu screen, select what you want to
define or customize:
To define or customize . . .
Press . . .
Then . . .
test parameters for:
F1 Test
go to step 3 of this
procedure
profiles
F2 Profile
go to Defining
Profiles
controls
F3 Control
go to Defining
Controls
calibrators
F4 Calibrator
go to Defining
Calibrators
blanks
F5 Blank
go to Defining
Blanks
tests
reagents
assay order
calibrator concentrations
controls
QCSystems
3. Values for test parameters are factory-defined by

Bayer Diagnostics before the system is shipped to you. We
recommend that you:
a. Print a definition report for each test defined on your
Express Plus. At the Definitions/Tests screen, move the
cursor to each test, then press PRINT.
b. Review definition reports for each test to determine if the
factory-defined parameter values require customizing for
your laboratory.
c. Keep the reports of the factory-defined values for
reference.
4. Go to Defining, Modifying, or Erasing Test Definitions.
5-12

At the Definitions/Tests screen, shown in Figure 5-4, you can:
select the test that you want to modify (customize)
define a new test
restore a defined test to its factory-defined parameter values
To define, modify, or erase a test definition:

2. At the Definitions menu screen, press F1 Test.
The system shows the Definitions/Tests screen shown in
Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4. Definitions/Tests Screen
Definitions
Tests
Alb
TBili
Creat
Trig
ACP_T
TIBC
ALP
BUN
GGT
UA
ACP_P
ALT
Ca
Gluc_HK
HDL
Mg
Amy
Chlor
IPhos
HBD
Fe
AST
Chol
LDH_L
CO2
ExFe
DBili
CK
TP
ACP_NP
UIBC
Press <SELECT> to
select the test
indicated by the
cursor.
F1 Insert
F2 Erase
F3 Restore F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
5-13
Defining, Modifying, or Erasing Test Definitions (Continued)

3. At the Definitions/Tests screen, perform the task you require:
To . . .
Then . . .
define a new test
press F1 Insert, then type the

name of the test you want to
define
move the cursor to the test you

want to erase, then press
F2 Erase
when you erase a test definition,

all results in the worklist for that
test are erased, references to the
test in profile, calibrator, control,
and blank definitions are erased,
and all Q.C. statistics for that test
are erased
restore test parameters to their
factory-defined values
move the cursor to the test you

want to restore, then press
F3 Restore
modify a defined test
NOTE
move the cursor to the required

test, then press SELECT
If 48 tests are defined when you try to define a

new test, the system shows a message on the
screen that tells you the maximum number of
tests exists. If less than 48 test definitions exist
when you select a test or insert a test, the
Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen shows.
If you select to erase or restore a test definition,
the system prompts you for confirmation of the
requested action.
4. Did you press F1 Insert to define a new test, or select a

defined test to modify?
Yes:
The Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen shows. Go to

step 4 of the Defining Test Parameters procedure.
No:
Press EXIT to store any changes in system memory and

return to the Definitions menu screen.
5-14
Defining Test
Parameters
At the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen, shown in Figure 5-5,

you can define the parameter values for the test you selected or
inserted at the Definitions/Tests screen.
To define or modify test parameter values:
2. At the Definitions menu screen, press F1 Test.
3. At the Definitions/Tests screen, select a defined test or insert
a new test:
To select a defined test, move the cursor to the defined

test you need to modify, then press SELECT; go to step 4.
To insert a new test, press F1 Insert to define a new test,

then go to step 4.
4. At the Definitions/Tests/Parameters screen, shown in

Figure 5-5, move the cursor to the required fields, then press
SELECT to set the values or type the values to define or
modify the test definition.
NOTE
When you select ratio or off-system test types,

only certain test parameters show on the screen.
Refer to Figures 5-6 and 5-7 for examples of
screens for those test types.
Figure 5-5. Definitions/Tests/Parameters Screen (Defined Test)
Definitions
Test Name: Albumin

Test Bar Code: 001
Test: Alb
Test Type: Endpoint

Units: g/dL

Tests
Parameters
Review data, then

modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
store definition
or review another
test.
F1
Primary Wavelength: 600nm Secondary Wavelength: 540nm

Sample Blank? No
Factor:
Normalization/Reblanking Interval:
Hours
Low Blank A Limit: 0.010
Low A Limit: -0.250
Low Normal:
3.5
Linearity Limit:
8.0
F2 Reagents F3 Assay
Order
F4 Calib.
Concs.

High A Limit: 0.800
High Normal: 5.3
F8
Defining Test
Parameters
5-15
Figure 5-6. Definitions/Tests (Ratio)/Parameters Screen
(Continued)
Definitions
Test Name: Acid Phos Prost

Test Bar Code: 026
Test: ACP_P
Tests
Parameters
Test Type: Ratio

Units: U/L
Number of Decimal Places: 1
Ratio Definition:
ACP_T - ACP_NP
Review data then
modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
store the
definition or
review another
test.
Low Normal: 0.0
High Normal: 3.0
Figure 5-7. Definitions/Tests (Off-System)/Parameters Screen
Definitions
Test Name: Sodium

Test Bar Code:
Test: Na
Tests
Parameters
Test Type: Off-System

Units: mEq/L
Number of Decimal Places: 0
Low Normal: 135.
High Normal: 148.
Review data then

modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
store the
definition or
review another
test.
5-16
Defining Test
Parameters
(Continued)
5. Function keys show on the screen when you select endpoint,

kinetic, or two-point test types. Perform each step shown in
this chart to define a new test, or select only the functions
you need to modify the test definition:
To . . .
Press . . .
Then go to . . .
define the reagent

parameter values for the
test
F2 Reagents
step 6 and refer to

Figure 5-8
define the wash fluids

and wash counts to
reduce reagent carryover
for the test
F3 Assay
step 7 and refer to

Figure 5-9
define the calibrator

concentrations to use to
calibrate or normalize
the test
F4 Calib.
define the controls and

control rules to use for
the test
F5 Controls
step 9 and refer to

Figure 5-11
define the QCSystems

codes to use with Bayer
Diagnosticss QCSystems
program
F6 QCSystem
step 10 and refer to

Figure 5-12
NOTE
Order
Concs.
step 8 and refer to

Figure 5-10
Press EXIT to store the definition in system

memory and return to the Definitions/Tests
screen.
If you press CANCEL after defining or modifying
the tests, the values reset to their previous
settings. If you press MAIN MENU to return to
the Main Menu after defining or or modifying
the tests, the definitions or modifications do not
store in system memory.
Defining Test
Parameters
(Continued)
5-17
6. At the Definitions/Tests/Reagents screen, shown in

Figure 5-8, move the cursor to the required fields, then press
SELECT to set the required values or type the values to define
or modify the reagent parameters for the test.
Figure 5-8 . Definitions/Tests/Reagents Screen (Example)
Definitions
Test Name: Albumin

Test Bar Code: 001
Test: Alb
Tests
Reagents
Sample Volume: 3 L
Rerun Dilution Ratio: 1
Predilution Ratio: 1
Sample Diluent Bar Code:

Sample Diluent Bottle Type: Plastic
Review data then
modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
store the
definition or
review another
test.
F1 Param- F2
eters
7.
Reagent Diluent Bar Code:

Reagent Diluent Bottle Type: Plastic
Rgnt 1:
Rgnt 2:
Rgnt 3:
Rgnt 4:
Reagent Bar
Volume Code
300 uL AB1A
uL
uL
uL
F3 Assay
F4 Calib.
Order
Diluent
Volume
uL
uL
uL
uL
Lag
Time
60 secs
secs
secs
secs
Bottle
Type
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
F8
Concs.
At the Definitions/Tests/Assay Order screen, shown in

Figure 5-9, move the cursor to each test that interferes with
the results of the test you are defining or modifying, then:
a. Move the cursor to Wash Fluid, then press SELECT to
define the required wash fluid (NONE, Water, Fluid 1, or
Fluid 2).
b. Move the cursor to Wash Count, then press SELECT to
define the number of wash cycles required (1 or 2).
c. If you defined Fluid 1 or Fluid 2 as a wash fluid, move
the cursor the Fluid 1 Bar Code and/or Fluid 2 Bar Code,
then type the bar code(s) for the wash fluid(s) to use for
the test you are defining.
5-18
Defining Test
Parameters
NOTE
(Continued)
To define Wash Fluids or Wash Counts for tests

not shown on this screen, press F8 Moreto show
the remaining defined tests on the screen.
When you select a wash fluid for a test, then
move the cursor off the Wash Fluid field, the
system highlights the test abbreviation. And,
when you remove the selection of a wash fluid
for a test (you select NONE), then move the
cursor off the Wash Fluid field, the system
removes the highlighting from the test
abbreviation.
When you define a test that uses two wash
fluids, be sure to define the most stringent wash
fluid as Fluid 2. After an error occurs that stops
testing, the Express Plus always uses fluid 2 to
ensure that the test you selected at the Assay
Order screen does not interfere with the test
being assayed (defined).
Figure 5-9. Definitions/Tests/Assay Order Screen (Example)
Definitions
Tests
Test Name: Albumin

Test Bar Code: 001
Fluid 1 Bar Code: AB1A
Assay Order
Select a wash
fluid and the
number of washes
for the test(s)
that interfere
with the test
being defined.
Test
Alb
ALT
AST
TBili
Ca
Chol
Creat
Gluc_HK
LDH_L
Trig
HBD
CO2
Press <EXIT> to
store definition
or review another
test.
F1 Param- F2 Reagents F3
eters
Wash
Fluid
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
Fluid 1
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
F4 Calib.
Concs.
Wash
Count
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Test: Alb
Fluid 2 Bar Code:
Test
ALP
Amy
DBili
BUN
Chlor
CK
GGT
IPhos
TP
UA
HDL
ACP_NP
Wash
Fluid
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
Wash
Count
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F8 More
Defining Test
Parameters
(Continued)
5-19
8 . At the Definitions/Tests/Calibrator Concentrations screen,

shown in Figure 5-10, define the calibrator concentrations to
use for the test:
a. Move the cursor to each Conc. field, then type the
calibrator concentration to use for the test.
b. If the test type is nonlinear, move the cursor to each of
two defined concentrations (not consecutive and not the
zero calibrator), then press SELECT to define the
calibrators to use to normalize the calibration curve for
the test (refer to Figure 5-10).
NOTE
You can specify the calibrator concentrations at

the Definitions/Tests/Calibrator Concentrations
screen or the Definitions/Calibrator/
Concentrations screen to calibrate a defined test.
If the test is a blanked linear curve type, the
system automatically uses the defined zero
calibrator or blank to reblank the stored
calibration curve for the test.
Figure 5-10. Definitions/Tests/Calibrator Concentrations Screen

(Example)
Definitions
Tests
Calibrator
Concentrations
Test Name: NAceytlprocaina

Test Bar Code:
Conc. 1
0.0
Conc. 2
1.0
Conc. 3
2.0
Test: NAPA
Conc. 4
4.0
Conc. 5
8.0
Conc. 6
16.0
Review data then

modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
store definition
or review another
test.
F1 Param- F2 Reagents F3 Assay

eters
Order
F4
F8
5-20
Defining Test
Parameters
(Continued)
9. At the Definitions/Tests/Controls screen, shown in

Figure 5-11, define the controls, control rules, and control
rule evaluation to use for the test/control pair:
Figure 5-11. Definitions/Tests/Controls Screen (Example)
Definitions
Tests
Controls
Review data then

modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
or review another
test.
Test Name: Albumin

Test Bar Code: 001
Controls:
QCSNorm
Control Rules:
1-3s
2-2s
Order
NOTE
4-1s
Control Rule Evaluation:
F1 Param- F2Reagent F3 Assay

eters
QCSAbn
F4 Calib.
F5
Test: Alb
Uniqual
10x
Expected Mean
F6 QCSystem F7
F8
Concs.
If you modify control rules at the Definitions/

Tests/Controls screen, or modify the Expected
Mean and 1 S.D. at the Definitions/Control/
Limits screen, the modifications only affect
future control results for the test. The system
does not re-evaluate stored control results based
on the modified values.
If you do not select control materials for the test
at the Definitions/Controls screen, the system
does not store any control results for the test in
the Q.C. database.
a. Move the cursor to each control to use for the test, then
press SELECT. You can select up to six controls.
b. Move the cursor to each control rule to use for the
controls you selected, then press SELECT.
The system automatically uses the 1-2s control rule for all
tests; that rule does not show on this screen.
For information about using the Automatic Test
Shutdown option, refer to the Section 5 tab, Setting
Installation Options, and to Section 3, Understanding the
System Calculations.
Defining Test
Parameters
(Continued)
5-21
c. Move the cursor to Control Rule Evaluation, then press

SELECT to define the statistical set to use when evaluating
the control results against the defined control rules:
Use Expected Mean . . .
Use Lifetime Mean . . .
to evaluate the control

results using the defined
control rules against the
expected mean and one
standard deviation that you
defined as the target values
at the Definitions/Control/
Limits screen.
to evaluate the control results

using the defined control rules
against the lifetime mean and
one standard deviation, which
are calculated from the actual
results and stored in the Q.C.
database.
The rules are only evaluated

if you defined the expected
mean and 1 S.D. at the
Definitions/Control/Limits
screen for the test/control
pair.
The rules are only evaluated if

the total number of stored
lifetime data points is more
than 1.
For more information about control rules and control

rule evaluations, refer to Section 3, Understanding the
System Calculations, and to the Section 7 tab, Defining
Control Values/Managing Q.C. Data.
5-22
Defining Test
Parameters
(Continued)
10. The Express Plus QCSystems codes are factory-defined. If

you need to view the codes or change the values, use your
QCSystems reference package to define the QCSystems
codes for the test. At the Definitions/Tests/QCSystems
screen, shown in Figure 5-12, define the required codes:
Then . . .
Test Code
type the test code supplied by

BayerDiagnostics QCSystems
Method Code
type the method code supplied by

Units Code
type the units code supplied by

Reagent Code
type the reagent code supplied by

Figure 5-12. Definitions/Tests/QCSystems Screen
Definitions
Tests
QCSystems
Test Name: Albumin

Test Bar Code: 001
Test: Alb
Test Code: 6
Method Code: 2
Units: g/dL
Units Code: 10
Review data then

modify if
required.
Reagent Code: 99
Press <EXIT> to
store definition
or review another
test.
F1 Param- F2Reagent F3 Assay

eters
Order
F4 Calib.
Concs.
F5 Controls F6
F7
F8
Defining Test
Parameters
5-23
NOTE
(Continued)

memory and return to the Definitions/Tests
screen.
the tests, the values reset to their previous
the tests, the definitions or modifications do not
11. After you define or modify all the required parameters for
the test definition, press EXIT to store the definition in system
memory and return to the Definitions/Tests screen.
12. At the Definitions/Tests screen:
To . . .
Then . . .
define or modify another

test
select or insert another test and repeat

steps 4 through 11 of this procedure to
define or modify the test
erase a test definition
move the cursor to the test to erase,

then press F2 Erase
select another Definitions

option from the menu
press EXIT to go to the Definitions

menu screen
go to the Main Menu
press EXIT twice
NOTE
If you select to erase a test definition, the

system prompts you to confirm the action.
5-24
Defining Profiles
At the Definitions/Profiles screen, shown in Figure 5-13, you can:
select the profile that you want to modify
erase a defined profile
Figure 5-13. Definitions/Profiles Screen (Example)
Definitions
Chem
Liver
Cardiac
Renal
Lytes
Profiles
Press <SELECT>
to select the
profile indicated
by the cursor.
F1 Insert
F2 Erase
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
To define, modify, or erase a profile definition:

2. At the Definitions menu screen, press F2 Profile.
3. At the Definitions/Profiles screen:
To . . .
Then . . .
press F1 Insert, then type the name of

the profile you want to define
erase a currently defined

profile
move the cursor to the profile you

want to erase, then press F2 Erase
modify a defined profile

profile, then press SELECT
NOTE

5-25
Defining Profiles (Continued)

NOTE
If 10 profiles are defined when you try to define

a new profile, the system shows a message on
the screen that tells you the maximum number
of profiles exists. If less than 10 profiles exist
when you select a profile or insert a profile, the
Definitions/Profiles/Selection screen shows.
4. Did you press F1 Insert to define a new profile, or select a

defined profile to modify?
Yes: Go to step 5.
No:

return to the Definition menu screen.
5. At the Definitions/Profiles/Selection screen, shown in

Figure 5-14, type up to eight characters for the profile name.
Figure 5-14. Definitions/Profiles/Selection Screen (Example)
Definitions
Profiles
Selection
Press <SELECT>
to select the test
indicated by the
cursor.
Profile Name: Cardiac

Tests:
Alb
TBili
Creat
Trig
ACP_T
TIBC
ALP
BUN
GGT
UA
ACP_P
ALT
Ca
Gluc_HK
HBD
Mg
Profile Bar Code:
Amy
Chlor
IPhos
HDL
Fe
AST
Chol
LDH_L
CO2
ExFe
DBili
CK
TP
ACP_NP
UIBC
Press <EXIT> to
store definition
or review another
profile.
6. Move the cursor to each test to include in, or exclude from,

the profile, then press SELECT to select (highlight) or remove
the test.
5-26
Defining Profiles (Continued)

NOTE

memory and return to the Definitions/Profiles
screen.
the profiles, the values reset to their previous
the profiles, the definitions or modifications do
not store in system memory.
7. Press EXIT to store the profile definition in system memory

and return to the Definitions/Profiles screen.
8 . At the Definitions/Profiles screen:
To . . .
Then . . .

profile
select or insert another profile, then

repeat steps 4 through 7 of this
procedure
erase a profile
move the cursor to the profile to erase,

then press F2 Erase

option from the menu

menu screen
go to the Main Menu
press EXIT twice

Before you define each control using the next procedure,
Defining Controls, establish a mean and one S.D. value for each
control used on the Express Plus in your laboratory:
1. Over a minimum of 10 days, obtain at least 20 control results
for each control material.
2. Use the results that you obtain for each control to calculate a
mean and one S.D. for each control.
3. Use the Defining Controls procedure to define each control,
and to define the mean and one S.D. for each control.
The Express Plus will store results for these controls in the
Q.C. database and use the results to calculate Q.C. statistics
and produce reports and plots. These defined controls can
also use control rule evaluations in Q.C. Statistics.
5-27
Defining Controls
At the Definitions/Controls screen, shown in Figure 5-15, you
can:
select the control that you want to modify
erase a defined control
Figure 5-15. Definitions/Controls Screen (Example)
Definitions
Normal
QCSNorm
QCSAbn
Lipid
Bili
Controls
Press <SELECT> to
select the control
indicated by the
cursor.
F1 Insert
F2 Erase
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
To define, modify, or erase a control definition:

2. At the Definitions menu screen, press F3 Control.
3. At the Definitions/Controls screen:
To . . .
Then . . .

the control you want to define
erase a currently-defined
control
move the cursor to the control you

modify a defined control

control, then press SELECT
NOTE

5-28
Defining Controls (Continued)

NOTE
If 13 control definitions are defined when you

try to define a new control, the system shows a
message on the screen to tell you that the
maximum number of controls exists. If less than
13 control definitions exist when you select a
control or insert a control, the Definitions/
Control/Limits screen shows.
4. Did you press F1 Insert to define a new control, or select a

defined control to modify?
Yes: Go to step 5.
No:

return to the Definitions/Controls screen.
5. At the Definitions/Control/Limits screen, shown in

Figure 5-16, define or modify the control parameters for the
selected control:
a. Move the cursor to each field at the top of the screen and
type the required value for the control.
b. Move the cursor to each test that uses the control, then
type the values for the expected mean and expected
one S.D. calculated in your laboratory for the control.
c. To define control parameters for tests that do not show
on this screen, press F8 Moreto show the remaining tests
on the screen, then repeat steps 5a and 5b.
NOTE

memory and return to the Definitions/Controls
screen.
the controls, the values reset to their previous
the controls, the definitions or modifications do
not store in system memory.
6. Press EXIT to store the control definition in system memory

and return to the Definitions/Controls screen.
5-29
Defining Controls (Continued)

7. At the Definitions/Controls screen:
To . . .
Then . . .

control
select or insert another control and

procedure
erase a control
move the cursor to the control to

erase, then press F2 Erase

options from the menu

menu screen
go to the Main Menu
press EXIT twice
Figure 5-16. Definitions/Control/Limits Screen (Example)
Definitions
Control Name: QCSNorm

Control Bar Code: 01
Control
Limits
Review data then

modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
or review another
control.
F1
F2
Expected
Test
Mean
Alb
3.3
ALT
AST
TBili
0.7
Ca
Chol
141.
Creat
Gluc_HK 88.
LDH_L
Trig
74.
HDL
CO2
F3
F4
Lot Number: 020802

Pool Number: 01
Expiration Date: 14-FEB-1992
Expected
Expected Expected
1 SD
Test
Mean
1 SD
0.30
ALP
Amy
DBili
0.1
0.10
0.20
BUN
16.0
3.00
Chlor
98.
4.0
21.0
CK
GGT
9.0
IPhos
TP
5.5
0.30
11.0
UA
5.1
0.50
HBD
ACP_NP
F5
F6
F7
F8 More
5-30
At the Definitions/Calibrators screen, shown in Figure 5-17, you
can:
select the calibrator that you want to modify
erase a defined calibrator
Figure 5-17. Definitions/Calibrators Screen (Example)
Definitions
Multi1
Multi2
Calibrators
Press <SELECT> to
select the
calibrator
indicated by the
cursor.
F1 Insert
F2 Erase
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
To define, modify, or erase a calibrator definition:

2. At the Definitions menu screen, press F4 Calibrator.
3. At the Definitions/Calibrator screen:
To . . .
Then . . .

the calibrator you want to define
calibrator
move the cursor to the calibrator you

modify a defined
calibrator

calibrator, then press SELECT
NOTE

5-31
Defining Calibrators (Continued)

NOTE
If 10 calibrator definitions are defined when you

try to define a new calibrator, the system shows
a message on the screen to tell you that the
maximum number of calibrators exists. If less
than 10 calibrator definitions exist when you
select or insert a calibrator, the Definitions/
Calibrator/Concentrations screen shows.
4. Did you press F1 Insert to define a new calibrator, or select a

defined calibrator to modify?
Yes: Go to step 5.
No:

5. At the Definitions/Calibrator/Concentrations screen, shown in

Figure 5-18, define the concentrations for the selected
calibrator and tests:
a. Move the cursor to each calibrator field at the top of the
screen, then type the required value.
b. Move the cursor to each test that uses the calibrator, then
type the calibrator concentration for that test.
Figure 5-18 . Definitions/Calibrator/Concentrations Screen (Example)
Definitions
Calibrator
Concentrations
Review data and

modify if
required.
Press <EXIT> to
store the
definition or
review another
calibrator.
Calibrator Name: Multi1

Lot Number: L39M
Calibrator Bar Code: 09
Test
Conc.
Test
Conc.
Test
Conc.
Alb
4.7
ALP
ALT
Amy
AST
DBili
0.4
TBili
2.1
BUN
15.5
Ca
9.9
Chlor
93.
Chol
174.
CK
Creat
3.2
GGT
Gluc_HK 114.
TP
7.6
IPhos
2.8
LDH_L
Trig
96.
UA
3.0
HDL
HBD
CO2
22.5
ACP_NP
ACP_P RATIO
Mg
2.4
ACP_T
Fe
ExFe
UIBC RATIO
TIBC RATIO
5-32
Defining Calibrators (Continued)

NOTE

memory and return to the Definitions/
Calibrators screen.
the calibrators, the values reset to their previous
the calibrators, the definitions or modifications
do not store in system memory.
6. Press EXIT to store the calibrator definition in system

memory and return to the Definitions/Calibrators screen.
7. At the Definitions/Calibrators screen:
To . . .
Then . . .

calibrator
select or insert another calibrator and

procedure
erase a calibrator
move the cursor to the calibrator to

erase, then press F2 Erase


menu screen
go to the Main Menu
press EXIT twice
5-33
Defining Blanks
At the Definitions/Blanks screen, shown in Figure 5-19, you can:
select the blank that you want to modify
define a new blank
erase a defined blank
Figure 5-19. Definitions/Blanks Screen (Example)
Definitions
H2O1
H2O2
H2O3
Blanks
Press <SELECT>
to select the
blank indicated
by the cursor.
F1 Insert
F2Erase
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
To define, modify, or erase a definition for a blank:

1.
At the Main Menu, press F5 Definitions.
2.
At the Definitions menu screen, press F5 Blank.
3.
At the Definitions/Blanks screen:

To . . .
Then . . .
define a new blank

the blank you want to define
blank
move the cursor to the blank you want

to erase, then press F2 Erase
modify a defined blank
move the cursor to the required blank,

then press SELECT
NOTE

5-34
Defining Blanks (Continued)

NOTE
If 10 blanks are defined when you try to define a

new blank, the system shows a message on the
screen to tell you that the maximum number of
blanks exists. If less than 10 blanks are defined
when you select or insert a blank, the
Definitions/Blanks/Selection screen shows.
4. Did you press F1 Insert to define a new blank, or select a

defined blank to modify?
Yes:
Go to step 5.
No:

5. At the Definitions/Blanks/Selection screen, shown in

Figure 5-20, define the blank:
a. Move the cursor to Blank Bar Code, then type the bar
code for the selected blank.
b. Move the cursor to select each test that will use the
blank, then press SELECT.
Figure 5-20. Definitions/Blanks/Selection Screen (Example)
Definitions
Blanks
Selection
Press <SELECT> to
select the test
indicated by the
cursor.
Press <EXIT> to
or review another
blank.
Blank Name: H2O1

Tests:
Alb
TBili
Creat
Trig
ACP_T
TIBC
ALP
BUN
GGT
UA
ACP_P
Blank Bar Code:
ALT
Ca
Gluc_HK
HBD
Mg
Amy
Chlor
IPhos
HDL
Fe
AST
Chol
LDH_L
CO2
ExFe
DBili
CK
TP
ACP_NP
UIBC
5-35
Defining Blanks (Continued)

NOTE

memory and return to the Definitions/Blanks
screen.
the blanks, the values reset to their previous
the Main Menu after defining or modifying the
blanks, the definitions or modifications do not
6. Press EXIT to store the definition in system memory and

return to the Definitions/Blanks screen
7. At the Definitions/Blanks screen:
To . . .
Then . . .

blank
select or insert another blank and

procedure
erase a blank
move the cursor to the blank to erase,

then press F2 Erase


menu screen
go to the Main Menu
press EXIT twice
5-37

After you define or customize your system setup, back up those
data files onto floppy disk(s).
Bayer Diagnostics recommends that you back up your data files
as part of your routine, preventive maintenance for the Express
Plus. Use a backup interval that is appropriate for your
laboratorys database.
Then, if your software needs to be reloaded later, and you have
backup disks of your data files, you can use F2 Restore Data Files
to restore the data onto the system. You will not have to re-enter
all of your customized data.
To back up the Express Plus data files, you need: one formatted,
blank disk to back up data files, or four formatted, blank disks to
back up data files with Q.C. statistics.
Format all the required disks before you start the backup
procedure. Use F6 Format Floppy Disk at the Options/Disk
Options screen to format your disks (refer to step 4 of this
procedure).
CAUTION
NOTE
If you do not back up Q.C. files, the system

deletes stored Q.C. data when you restore the
data that you did back up.
To backup your Q.C. statistics at the same time
as your other data files, you will need four
formatted disks; otherwise, you will need one
formatted disk to backup the data files without
the Q.C. statistics. Format all the required
disks before you start the backup procedure.
Use only disks that are not write protected. Use
only 3.5-inch, high-density, double-sided disks
for making backup disks or restoring data files.
If you use another type of disk, the system
shows an error message.
Store your backup disks in a safe place.
5-38
Backing Up the Data Files (Continued)

To back up your data files:
1. At the Main Menu, press F6 Options.
2. At the Options screen, press F5 Disk Options.
3.
Are your disks already labeled and formatted?

Yes: Go to step 5.
No:
Use the following chart to label the required disks, then

go to step 4 to format the disk(s).
NOTE
4.
Use the currently-installed software version

number in place of the X.XXs on the disk
labels. Refer to the software version shown on
the Diagnostics Maintenance/System Version
screen for the currently-installed software
version number.
If you are
backing up . . .
Then you need . . .
data files without Q.C.

statistics
1 disk labeled Version X.XX Data

Files
data files with Q.C.

statistics
4 disks labeled Version X.XX Q.C.

Data Files - disk X, where X is disk
1, 2, 3, and 4.
Format the labeled disks:

a. Place the write-protect tab on the required disk in the
write-data position, then insert the floppy disk into the
disk drive.
You cannot back up the data files, program files, or
system calibration files onto a disk(s) if the write-protect
tab is in the read-only position.
b. At the Options/Disk Options screen, press F6 Format
Floppy Disk.
c. Follow the instructions shown in the prompt area to
format the disk.
d. Repeat steps 4a through 4c to format each required disk.
5-39

CAUTION
If you are using communications on your system

and you need to back up data files, perform
step 5 before you back up the files; otherwise,
the system can produce a fatal error. If you do
not have communications enabled, skip step 5.
5. Do you have the Communications Option enabled?

Yes: Press EXIT to go to the Options menu, then prepare the
communications channels for data file backup functions:

a. Press F4 Communications at the Options menu.
b. At the Options/Communications screen, move the
cursor to each Device field that you have configured
for the system, then press SELECT until NONE shows
for each Device field.
c. Press EXIT to go to the Options menu.
d. Press F5 Disk Options, then go to step 6.
No: Go to step 6.
6. At the Options/Disk Options screen, shown in Figure 5-21,

press F1 Backup Data Files.
Figure 5-21. Options/Disk Options Screen
Options
Disk Options
F1 Backup Data Files

F2 Restore Data Files
F3 Backup System Calibrations
Press the
required function
key.
F4 Restore System Calibrations

F5 Backup Program Files
F6 Format Floppy Disk
5-40

7.
Back up the required files:

a. Verify that the write-protect tab is in the write-data
position on the required disk.
NOTE
If you use a write-protected disk to back up

your files, an error message can occur. Place
the tab in the write-data position.
b. Install the disk in the disk drive, then follow the

instructions in the prompt area to back up the data files.
If you are backing up data files with Q.C., the system
prompts you to install each disk required for the backup.
Repeat steps 7a and 7b for each required disk.
c.
8.
Remove the installed disk when the system beeps five

times.
Place the write-protect tab on each backup disk in the readonly position.
9. Do you have the Communications Option enabled on your

system?
Yes: Complete the backup function for communications:
a. Press EXIT to go to the Options menu.

b. Press F4 Communications, then at the Options/
Communications screen, move the cursor to the
Device field that you had configured for the system
and press SELECT until the required setting shows at
the Device field.
NOTE
If you only have an LIS 2 device connected to

your system, skip step 9c.
c. Press F3 Reset Channel to reset the communications

channel for the selected device.
d. If you have other devices connected to the system,
repeat steps 9b and 9c for each connected device.
e. Go to step 10.
No: Go to step 10.
10. Press EXIT twice to go to the Main Menu.
5-41

If you have data files stored on backup disks, you can
automatically load the definitions and calibration curve data files
back onto the system. The Express Plus prompts you to decide if
you also want to restore the worklist data, patient results, and any
backed up Q.C. data from the backup disks.
CAUTION
Restoring your data files overwrites any existing

data currently stored on the system. Ensure
that you always have a copy of your current
data files stored on floppy disks.
Any data that you backed up, but do not
restore, is lost from system memory when you
restore other data.
If a disk error shows while restoring the data
files, do not select any function key other than
F2 Restore Data Files until all data files are
restored; otherwise, a fatal disk error occurs and
you must reload the system software.
If, during the restore function, the system finds
that Q.C. data files are missing from the backup
disks and you are restoring Q.C. data, or if you
exit the restore function before it completes, the
system erases the Q.C. data.
If you attempt to restore Q.C. data using dates
later than the date and time set on the system
clock, the Q.C. databases can be corrupted in
their date/time sequences.
NOTE
The Express Plus prompts you to decide if you

want to restore the worklist data, patient results,
and any backed up Q.C. data. Those files do
not automatically restore during this procedure
unless you respond Y (yes) to the prompt.
5-42
Restoring the Data Files (Continued)

To restore your data files:
1.
At the Main Menu, press F6 Options.

CAUTION
2.
If you are using communications on your

system, perform step 2 before you restore files;
otherwise, the system can produce a fatal error
that can cause the system software to require
re-installing.
Press F4 Communications at the Options menu, then prepare

communications as follows:
a. At the Options/Communications screen, move the cursor
to the each Device field that you have configured for the
system, then press SELECT to set the field to NONE.
b. Press EXIT to go to the Options menu again.
3.
At the Options screen, press F5 Disk Options.
4.
At the Options/Disk Options screen (refer to Figure 5-21),

press F2 Restore Data Files, then follow the instructions
shown in the prompt area to copy the data files from your
backup disk(s) to the system hard disk.
The Express Plus:
verifies that the data on the backup disk is from a software

version that is compatible with the version currently
installed on the system. If it is not, the system does not
restore the data.
verifies that the backup disks you insert are from a set of
backup disks that were made at the same time.
verifies that you insert each backup disk from the set of
disks in the correct sequence.
5.
Press EXIT to go to the Options menu again.
6.
Remove the backup disk from the disk drive and store the
backup disk(s) in a safe place.
NOTE
If you are using communications on your

system, perform step 7 to establish
communications again. If you are not using
communications, the restore function is
completed; go to step 8.
5-43
Restoring the Data Files (Continued)

7.
At the Options menu, press F4 Communications, then:

a. At the Options/Communications screen, move the cursor
to the first Device field that you had configured for the
system and press SELECT to set the field to the required
setting.
NOTE
If you only have an LIS 2 device connected to

your system, skip step 7b.
b. Press F3 Reset Channel to reset the communications

channel for the selected device.
c. If you have other devices connected to the system, repeat
steps 7a and 7b for each connected device.
8 . Press EXIT twice to go to the Main Menu.
6-1
Page
About This Section
6-5
Operating Summary
6-5
6-7
Preparing the Express Plus

Starting Up
6-11
Priming the System
6-13
6-14
Erasing a Stored Worklist
6-14
6-15
Scheduling Samples in the Worklist
6-16
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
Loading the Sample Tray
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-2
Page
Assaying the Scheduled Samples

Starting the Run
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-33
6-34
Manually Rerunning and Diluting Samples
6-36
6-37
6-39
Managing the Patient Results

6-43
6-43
6-45
6-47
Performing the End-of-Day Tasks

Shutting Down
6-51
6-3

This section of the manual provides step-by-step procedures for
operating the Express Plus on a daily basis. Use this chart to find
the information that you need in this section.
Refer to . . .
review the Express Plus key functions
start up the system and prepare it for

daily operation
Tab:
Starting Up
schedule your daily workload of

samples and tests in the Express Plus
worklist
Tab:
load your samples and reagents on

the system in preparation for a
scheduled run
Tab:

Loading the Reagent Trays
assay your scheduled worklist of

samples and tests
Tab:
Assaying the Scheduled
Samples
Starting the Run
Loading the Next Sample
Tray(s)
assay a single sample or Stat sample

after starting a scheduled run
Tab:
Samples
Loading Stats or Single
Samples During a Run
manually dilute and rerun a sample
Tab:
Samples
Manually Rerunning and
Diluting Samples
review the results of assayed samples
Tab:
Samples
6-4

Refer to . . .
review or modify the patient results
Tab:
Tab:
shut down the Express Plus at the

end of the day or shift
Tab:
Performing the End-of-Day
Tasks
Shutting Down
6-5
About This Section

This section explains how to operate your Express Plus on a daily
basis and presents the procedures in the order typically used,
beginning with the Starting Up procedure and ending with the
Shutting Down procedure.
Operating Summary
The following steps briefly describe the daily operating
procedures for your Express Plus. The procedures in this section
provide the details.
To . . .
Then . . .
1. Power up the system
place the power switch, located on the

right, side cover, to ON (I)
2. Prepare the system

for operation
at the Startup screen:

a. safely discard the waste water
b. fill the distilled water bottle
c. discard any used cuvettes from the
cuvette waste drawer, then install a
new cuvette waste bag
d. install clean cuvettes
e. moisten the humidifier ring
f. press ENTER
3. Prime the system
a. At the Main Menu, press

F7 Diagnostics/Maintenance.
b. Press F2 Manual Operations.

c. Press F1 Start-of-Day.
4. Erase the previous
worklist

F1 Worklist.
b. At the Worklist/Tests screen, press
F5 Erase Request, then press
F1 Erase Worklist.
5. Create a new worklist

F1 Worklist.
b. Schedule the tests for the required
sample cups.
6-6
Operating Summary (Continued)

To . . .
Then . . .
6. Print the worklist

(sample loadlist)
at the Main Menu, press F1 Worklist,

then press PRINT.
7. Assay your samples
load your samples and reagents, then

press START to begin the assays.
8. Type the patient

demographics while the
system assays the tests

F1 Worklist.
b. Press F8 Demographics.
c. Type the demographics for each
patient scheduled in the worklist.
9. Manually enter offsystem test results

F2 Patient Results.
b. Press F4 Edit Request to enter any
off-system test results.
10. Print patient reports
at the Main Menu, press F2 Patient

Results, then press PRINT.
11. Print Q.C. reports
a. At the Main Menu, press F4 Q.C.

Statistics.
b. Select a test, then press F1 Data,

F2 Levey-Jennings, or
F8 QCSystem.
c. At the Data or Levey-Jennings
screen, press PRINT, then press the
Print function key that describes
the report you want to print,
or
at the QCSystem screen, select a
pool number, then press PRINT.
12. Clean and shut down
the system

F7 Diagnostics/Maintenance.
b. Press F2 Manual Operations.

c. Press F2 End-of-Day.
6-7

The Express Plus has several fixed-function keys, shown in
Figure 6-1, that you use to operate the system (refer also to
Table 6-1). For more information about the Express Plus keys,
refer to Section 2, Understanding the Express Plus.
Table 6-1. Fixed-Function and Special Keys
Press . . .
To . . .
HELP
obtain the general screen help and a list of specific

help items that pertain to the current screen.
STATUS
obtain system status information for:

F1 System Status
F2 System Details
F3 Reagent Status
MAIN MENU
F4 Sample Status
F5 Pending Status
F6 Communications Status
go to the Main Menu to select a program:

F1
F2
F3
F4
Worklist
Patient Results
Calibration Data
Q.C. Statistics
F5
F6
F7
F8
Definitions
Options
PRINT SCRN
obtain a printout of the screen you are viewing.

When using the system printer to print a screen, the
print function can take up to five minutes to complete.
When using the external printer to
CAUTION
print a screen, verify that the external
printer is online before you press
PRINT SCRN; otherwise, you can lose
your data.
PRINT
obtain a printout of the data.
EXIT
instruct the system that your actions are completed

and to store the data.
CANCEL
instruct the system to cancel and not complete a

function.
SELECT
select a value, test, profile, or other field on a screen

(this is a toggle key; press once to select, press again to
remove the selection).
ENTER
instruct the system that the entry is completed and to

continue to another screen.
DELETE
delete one character at a time; use this key to delete

information on the screen or to correct typing
mistakes. This is the key with the backspace arrow.
CURSOR Keys
move the cursor to the required screen position (left,

right, up, or down), so you can select or type an entry.
6-9
Operating the Express Plus (Continued)

Table 6-2. System Key Functions
Press . . .
st rt
To . . .
start the testing sequence from the beginning, or
resume testing that you stopped or paused. When
you press START, the Express Plus:
primes the lines if you filled the distilled water
bottle
verifies the system operating temperatures
goes to the Warming Up or Running state
identifies the reagents on the reagent tray
waits for you to verify Reagent Loading
information, then starts the tests in the worklist

stop
stop the testing sequence. When you press STOP, the

Express Plus:
stops dispensing the samples and reagents
stops measuring reaction mixtures in the cuvettes
erases any test results that are not completed
stops system operations
waits for you to restart the tests in the worklist
p use
interrupt operations at the next available stopping

point. When you press PAUSE, the Express Plus:
stops dispensing new tests after completing the test
in progress, dispenses the reagents for multireagent tests, then stops all dispensing operations
continues measuring reaction mixtures that contain
samples
waits for you to press START to resume assaying
tests at the point of interruption
advance the paper through the system printer. Do
not press this key when the system is performing a
printing function; otherwise, spacing and/or format
errors can occur.
6-11
Starting Up
To start up your Express Plus at the beginning of the day or shift:
1. Power up the system:
If the Express Plus is . . .
Then . . .
powered OFF (O)
place the power switch ON (I).
powered ON (I)
go to step 2.
The system automatically performs the startup diagnostics.

The startup diagnostics verify correct operation of the system
hardware and software. If the system detects an error, it
stops operating at the end of the diagnostics and prints the
error on the system printer.
When the startup diagnostics are completed, the Express Plus
shows the Startup screen, shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3. Startup Screen
Startup
Express Plus Clinical Chemistry Analyzer

Copyright (c) 2000 by:
Bayer Corporation
Terrytown, NY 10591-5097 USA
If you removed
the waste water
bottle, install the
bottle, then press
<ENTER>.
Software Revision: x.xx

To prepare the system for operation:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Fill distilled water bottle

Discard waste water
Load clean cuvettes
Discard used cuvettes
System Clock: 31-MAR-1992
NOTE
12:31
You can only set the date and time at the

Startup screen if the cursor shows at the System
Clock: field. If the cursor does not show on the
Startup screen, go to the Options/System
Options screen to set the system clock.
6-13
Starting Up (Continued)
2. c. Verify that the waste bottle is empty, then install the
empty waste bottle in the system (refer to Figure 6-4).
d. Verify that there are no used cuvettes are in the cuvette
waste drawer. If there are used cuvettes in the waste
drawer, remove the biohazard liner and safely discard it,
then install a clean biohazard liner in the cuvette waste
drawer and install the drawer in the system (refer to
Figure 6-4).
e. Close the front panel.
f.
Verify that the teeth on the cuvette strips in the magazine

are aligned in the same direction, then install the cuvettes
strips in the cuvette feeder.
3. Press ENTER to go to the Main Menu.
Priming the System

After you prepare the system for operation, prime the system
tubing:
1. At the Main Menu screen, press F7 Diagnostics/Maintenance.
2. At the Diagnostics/Maintenance menu screen, press
F2 Manual Operations.
3. At the Diagnostics Maintenance/Manual Operations screen,
press ENTER.
4. Press F1 Start-of-Day.
The system primes and initializes the system components.
5. To go to the Main Menu, press EXIT twice.
6-14

The following procedures explain how to schedule your daily
worklist of blanks, calibrators, controls, and patient samples for
the required tests, enter demographics information for each
patient request in the worklist, and print the worklist. To use the
optional bar code wand and Test Scheduler to schedule the
worklist, refer to the Express Plus Positive Sample Identification
(PSID) System Addendum for complete instructions.
If the Express Plus is configured for communications and you
want to send a worklist to a Laboratory Information System (LIS)
or request a worklist from an LIS, refer to the Express
Communications Manual, for detailed instructions.
Erasing a Stored
Worklist
To erase a stored worklist and its associated results, before you

enter a new worklist for the day:
1. At the Main Menu, press F1 Worklist.
Do not erase requests or a worklist that contains
requests for which you have started printing
reports. Wait until printing completes before
you erase a request or a worklist; otherwise, you
can lose the data associated with those requests.
CAUTION
2. At the Worklist/Tests screen, press F5 Erase Request (refer to

Figure 6-5).
Figure 6-5. Worklist/Tests Screen (Example)
Worklist
Tray/Cup Number: A2
Tests
Sample Type: Blank
Press <SELECT>
to select the blank
indicated by
the cursor.
F1 Next
Request
Request Number: 2
Blanks:
Blank 1
Blank 6
Tests:
Alb
TBili
Creat
TRIG
ACP_T
TIBC
F2 Previous F3 Find
Request
Request
Blank 2
Blank 7
ALP
BUN
GGT
UA
ACP_P
Blank 3
Blank 8
ALT
Ca
Gluc_HK
HBD
Mg
F4 Insert
Request
Blank 4
Blank 9
Amy
Chlor
IPhos
HDL
Fe
F5 Erase
Request
Blank 5
Blank A
AST
Chol
LDH_L
CO2
ExFe
F6 Load
Sample
F7
DBili
CK
TP
ACP_NP
UIBC
F8
Erasing a Stored
Worklist
(Continued)
6-15
3. When the Erase function keys show on the screen, press

F1 Erase Worklist, then press Y (yes) in response to the
prompt that asks you to confirm the deletion.
The Express Plus erases the stored worklist.
4. Press MAIN MENU to return to the Main Menu screen.
Reviewing Calibration
Status
Before you schedule tests and samples in the worklist, you might
want to review the calibration status of the tests you require:
1. At the Main Menu, press F3 Calibration Data.
2. Review the calibration status of the tests you need to
schedule in the worklist:
If the status is . . .
Then . . .
CURRENT,
NORMALIZED, or
REBLANKED
press EXIT, then go to the next procedure.
any other status
select the required actions to take for the

curve, then go to the next procedure.
Refer to the Reviewing Calibration Status
procedure in the Section 7 tab, Defining
Calibrator Values/Calibrating Tests, for
instructions and calibration status
explanations.
6-16
Scheduling Samples
in the Worklist
This procedure explains how to schedule samples to run in

random access (each sample requires different tests or profiles)
or in batch (each sample requires the same test). To schedule
batch samples, you need the required number of unused requests
available, in sequence, in the worklist.
Schedule batch samples by typing a cup range. For example, if
you type:
A1/10 the system schedules the same tests for cups 1 through 10
on tray A
A1/90 the system schedules the same tests for cups 1 through 40
on trays A and B, and cups 1 through 10 on tray C

If you are using the Positive Sample Identification software
option on your system, refer to the addendum that accompanied
that software option for detailed instructions on using the handheld bar code wand and Test Scheduler to schedule samples in
the worklist.
If you are using communications on your system and you need to
upload or download a worklist, refer to the Express
Communications Manual, which accompanied your
Communications software option, for detailed instructions.
To schedule your samples to run in random access or batch:
2. To modify the current tray/cup number and request number,
or enter a cup range for batch samples:
Move the
cursor to . . . Then . . .
Tray/
Cup Number
press DELETE
to delete the
current number
And . . .
Random access testing:
type the sample tray identifier
(A through I), then type the cup
number (1 through 40).
Batch testing:
type the sample tray identifier
(A through I), the starting cup
number, a slash (/), then the total
number of samples for the batch.
Request
Number
press DELETE
to delete the
request number
type the request number to use

for the request, or type the
starting request number of the
batch.
Scheduling Samples
in the Worklist
(Continued)
6-17
3. Move the cursor to the Sample Type field, then press SELECT
to select the sample type for the current request.
If you select Blank, Control, or Patient, go to step 5.
If you select Calibrator, take the required actions:
And . . .
Then . . .
schedule testspecific calibrators
calibrate the test
go to step 4.
schedule a multicalibrator
calibrate the
curve
go to step 5 and
schedule the multicalibrator.
reblank a
go to step 5 to schedule
the blank (zero
calibrator) .
stored, blanked
linear curve
NOTE
You can move the cursor to the tests that you

want to reblank and press SELECT, if required.
4. To schedule a test-specific calibrator request:

a. Move the cursor to the required test, then press SELECT.
b. Press F7 Schedule Calibs., then:
If . . .
And . . .
Then . . .
the test does not

use a nonlinear
curve type or a
blanked linear
curve type
the calibrator
concentrations are
defined for the test
the Express Plus

automatically schedules
the calibrators for a full
calibration.
the test uses a

nonlinear curve
type
the calibrator
concentrations are
defined for the
test, and you
selected the
normalizers to use
to normalize the
test
Go to step 6.
the Express Plus waits
for you to select the
calibration you need:
1. Press F1 Calibrate to
schedule a full
calibration or,
press F2 Normalize
to normalize the
stored curve.
2. Go to step 6.
the test uses a

nonlinear curve
type
the calibrator
concentrations are
defined for the
test, but you did
not select
normalizers to use
for the test
the Express Plus

automatically schedules
the calibrators for a full
calibration.
Go to step 6.
6-18
Scheduling Samples
in the Worklist
4.
(Continued)
If . . .
And . . .
Then . . .
the test uses a

blanked linear
curve type
the calibrator
concentrations are
defined for the test
1. Press F1 Calibrate to
schedule a full
calibration, or press
F2 Reblank to reblank
the stored curve.
(Continued)
2. Go to step 6.
calibrator
concentrations
are not defined
for the test
the system shows a

message stating
that you cannot
schedule the
calibrator because
concentrations are
not defined
1. Press
F8 Concentrations.
2. Type the calibrator

concentration for the
test at the ?.
3. Press F8 Tests.
4. Go to step 6.
5. Move the cursor off the Sample Type field to show the
blanks, calibrators, controls, or profiles and tests, then take
the required actions to schedule the worklist request for the
selected sample type:
If the Sample
Type is . . .
Move the
cursor to . . .
Blank
the defined blank

to schedule for the
request
press SELECT; the

system highlights the
defined tests that use the
blank.
Calibrator
the defined
calibrator to
schedule for the
request
press SELECT; the

calibrator.
Control
the defined control

to schedule for the
request
press SELECT; the

control.
Patient
1. the Patient
Name field
type the patients name.
2. the defined
profiles and/or
tests to schedule
for the patient
request
press SELECT or type

the required profile or
test name; the system
highlights the selected
profiles and/or tests.
(multi-calibrator)
And . . .
Scheduling Samples
in the Worklist
(Continued)
6-19
6. Press F4 Insert Request, then repeat steps 2 through 5 to

schedule the required samples and tests for the worklist.
The system stores each request in the worklist as you
complete it.
7. Press EXIT to store the last request in the worklist and go to
the Main Menu.
8. Complete the required task:
To . . .
Refer to this procedure . . .
enter patient demographics
make changes to the worklist
print a copy of the worklist
load the sample tray with the

scheduled samples
6-20
Entering Patient
Demographics
You can enter patient demographics while the system assays the
samples. To type the demographics for each patient request in
the worklist:
1. At the Worklist/Tests screen, press F8 Demographics.
2. At the Worklist/Demographics screen, type the patient
demographic information:
Move the
cursor to . . .
Then type . . .
Patient Name
the patients name (up to 12 characters)
Patient ID
the patients identification number, such as

Social Security number or hospital
identification number (up to 12 characters)
Age
the patients age or date of birth (up to 8

characters)
Sex
the patients sex (up to 8 characters)
Comments
any required comments (up to five lines of 40

characters)
3. Press F1 Next Request, then repeat step 2 for each patient

request.
4. When all the required demographics are entered, press
F8 Tests to go to the Worklist/Test screen again.
To . . .
make changes to the worklist

scheduled samples
6-21
If you need to change the information in a worklist, you can use

this procedure to help you select the required task:
1. At the Worklist/Tests screen, press F1 Worklist, then complete
the required task:
To . . .
Press . . .
go to the next request in the worklist to view the

scheduled information, or to schedule a sample
for that request
F1 Next
go to the previous request in the worklist to view

the scheduled information, or to schedule a
sample for that request
F2 Previous
find the request you want to modify;

these Find functions keys show on the screen:
F1 Request Number to find a request by number
F2 Cup Number
F3 Patient Name
F4 Patient ID
F5 First Request
F6 Last Request
F7 Repeat
F3 Find
add a sample to the worklist using the next

available cup number and request number
F4 Insert
erase a request;
these Erase function keys show on the screen:
F1 Erase Worklist
to erase the stored worklist
F2 Erase Request
to erase selected request(s)
F3 Patient Name
to erase by name
F4 Patient ID
to erase by ID
F5 Erase
load a Stat or single sample while the system is

assaying samples or idle
F6 Load
Request
Request
Request
Request
Request
Sample
2. Press EXIT to store the modified worklist and go to the Main

Menu.
To . . .

scheduled samples
6-22
The scheduled worklist prints on the system printer or the

external printer, depending on the settings that you selected at
the Options/Printing Options screen.
The printed worklist, or sample loadlist, contains the sample cup
number, request number, sample type, patient name, and patient
ID number for all pending samples.
The sample loadlist prints only the samples that are not
completely assayed; completed samples do not print. You can
print the sample loadlist at any time to view the samples that still
have pending tests.
NOTE
If you modify the worklist or insert a request

after you begin printing the worklist, the
printout may not include all of the
modifications.
The following procedure explains how to print the worklist

(sample loadlist):
1. At the Worklist/Tests screen, press PRINT.
The system stores the current request on the hard disk drive,
then prints the worklist (sample loadlist). Refer to Figure 6-6
for an example of a printed sample loadlist.
2. Press EXIT to go to the Main Menu.
3. Go to the Loading the Reagent Tray procedure.
Figure 6-6. Sample Loadlist (Example)
Sample Loadlist
05-MAR-1992
13:28
Cup
Request
Sample Type
Patient Name
Patient ID
B14
B15
B18
B38
C1
C2
C5
C6
C7
112233
112256
968245
747220
222994
223344
234567
234568
234569
Patient
Patient
Control
Calibrator
Patient
Blank
Patient
Patient
Patient
Donna J. Burrer
Sally Brown
Control 3
Calib 1
Jeri Scheer
Blank 1
Nancy Swiz
Rose Freeman
Scott Mathis
123-45-6789
736-45-9876
250-91-6449
248-50-4199
249-51-2121
234-13-3939
6-24
Loading the Sample Tray

You can use the 40-position sample integrity tray or the 20position primary sample tube tray to load samples on the Express
Plus. Refer to the product insert that accompanies each reagent,
calibrator, or control for pertinent sample information.
If you are using the Positive Sample Identification software
option on your system, refer to the addendum that accompanied
the software option for sample loading instructions for the
primary sample tube tray.
BIOHAZARD
NOTE
For recommended precautions about working

with biohazardous materials, refer to
Appendix B, Safety Summary.
Each sample that you load on the sample tray
must have a request in the worklist. If a sample
does not have a scheduled request, the Express
Plus will not assay that sample.
Leave some empty cup positions on the sample
tray if you anticipate loading samples after you
start the run.
Load the sample cups into the scheduled sample tray positions:
1. Remove the 40-position sample tray cover.
2. Dispense the required volume of samples into sample cups.
NOTE
Do not fill the sample cups above the fill line

marked on the cups.
3. Use the sample loadlist to load each sample into the correct
cup position on the required sample tray.
4. Install the tray of samples on the transport.
5. Remove the humidifier ring from the tray cover, as shown in
Figure 6-8.
6. Moisten the blue felt with a laboratory wash bottle containing
deionized water.
7.
Install the humidifier ring onto the tray cover.

If the felt ring leaves visible water droplets on the tray cover,
it is too wet. Lightly blot excess moisture from the felt.
8.
Install the tray cover on the tray.
9.
Go to the Verifying System Conditions procedure.
6-26

After you verify that the supplies are replenished and the system
is ready for the run, verify that the reagent loading is correct:
1. Press START.
The system:
primes the tubing, if you removed and filled the distilled

water bottle.
rotates the reagent tray and reads the bar codes on the
reagent bottle labels to identify the reagents that are
loaded and the positions on the reagent tray.
shows the Reagent Loading screen (refer to Figure 6-9).

NOTE
If you define a reagent as a wash fluid at the

Definitions/Tests/Assay Order screen, and it is
only defined for one test, the system shows that
test name and test calibration on the Reagent
Loading screen.
2. Review the Reagent Loading information, as shown in

Figure 6-9.
Figure 6-9. Reagent Loading Screen (Example)
Calibration status of the test. You
can press F3 Waive to waive an
EXPIRED calibration
Sample tray installed on the system
Reagent Loading
Bar codes of the reagents loaded

on the reagent tray
Review data and

modify if required.
* indicates multipleReagent is used as a reagent and a

wash fluid for this test
Sequence number in the reagent

dispense cycle (first, second, etc.)
Wash fluid loaded in this tray

position
Type of bottle used by the reagent
Reagent Reagent
Position Bar Code Test
Position of the reagent on the tray
Reagents that are used for more

than one test
Sample Tray In Use:
reagent use.
Press <ENTER> to
continue.
F1
F2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
F3 Waive
AB1A
ABC1
AP1B
CH1B
CR1A
TG1B
CA1A
GL1A
CB1A
AC2B
BU1A
NA1B
WS1A
F4
Reagent
Number Calibration
Bottle
Type
Plastic
Plastic
Diluent
CURRENT
Glass
ALP
Chol
1
CURRENT
Plastic
IN PROCESS Plastic
Creat
1
Trig
1
EXPIRED
Plastic
Plastic
*
*
Gluc_HK 1
REBLANKED Glass
INVALID
Special
Carb
2
Plastic
*
*
SCHEDULED Plastic
BUN
1
NAPA
2
NORMALIZED Glass
Wash Fluid
Plastic
*
Alb
F5
F6
EXPIRED
F7
F8 More
6-27
Verifying Reagent Loading (Continued)

3. Modify any required reagent loading information at the
Reagent Loading screen:
To . . .
Then . . .
use an EXPIRED curve to

calibrate a test
1. Move the cursor to the

Calibration field for the test
that has the EXPIRED
calibration.
2. Press F3 Waive. The
calibration status changes to
WAIVED until the test is
assayed, then the status
changes to EXPIRED again.
modify the bottle type
go to Definitions/Tests/Reagents
screen to modify the bottle type.
modify the reagent number

(Reagent Number shows only
an asterisk (*) if the reagent
is used for multiple tests, or
is used as both a reagent
and a wash fluid)
go to Definitions/Tests/Reagents
screen to modify dispensing
sequence, or to Definitions/Tests/
Assay Order screen to modify
reagents used as wash fluids.
correct the reagent tray

position for a reagent
1. Remove the reagent tray cover,

then move the reagent bottle
to the required tray position.
2. Install the reagent tray cover.
3. Press START.
4. The system reads the bar code
labels; verify the reagent
loading information again.
modify the reagent bar

code
Move the cursor to the Reagent

Bar Code field for the reagent,
then type the correct bar code as
printed on the reagent bottle label.
modify the sample tray
Move the cursor to the Sample

Tray In Use field, then type the
correct sample tray identifier (A
through I).
modify the test that uses

the reagent (Test shows only
an asterisk (*) if the reagent
is used for multiple tests)
go to the Definitions/Tests/
Reagents screen to modify
test/reagent combinations.
view the reagent loading

for the remaining reagents
press F8 More.
continue the run
go to the Starting the Run

procedure.
6-29
Starting the Run

After the Express Plus scans the reagents, it verifies that the
system components are at the required operating temperatures,
then the system processes the stored worklist in this order:
1. blanks and calibrators, and automatic reruns of those blanks
and calibrators
2. Stat samples and automatic reruns of Stat samples
3. routine controls and patient samples, and automatic reruns of
those controls and patient samples
NOTE
If you set the printing options for the run-time

reports to ON, the results for blanks, calibrators,
controls, and patients print on the system or
external printer during the run.
You cannot schedule blanks or calibrators while
the system is running samples. You can,
however, schedule a rerun of a calibrator that
was previously scheduled in the worklist.
After you load your sample trays and reagent trays, use this
procedure to start the run of samples scheduled in the worklist:
1. At the Reagent Loading screen, press ENTER to start the run
for the first sample tray.
2. These tasks can take place while the system assays samples:
To . . .
modify the worklist
load and assay a Stat or a

single sample
Loading Stats or Single Samples

During a Run
review the status of the

scheduled samples
schedule a manual rerun

for a sample
Manually Rerunning and Diluting

Samples
correct an operating or
Status error
review run-time results
review or print Q.C. results
Section 7, Defining Control

Values/Managing Q.C. Data
review, edit, or print patient

results
6-30

After the system completes your first sample tray of scheduled
samples, use this procedure to install the next required sample
tray on the system:
1. When the installed sample tray completes, the Express Plus
beeps five times. Install the next sample tray of scheduled
samples and install the sample tray cover.
2. If required, load any additional or different reagents, then
install the reagent tray and reagent tray cover.
NOTE
If you do not remove the reagent tray cover to

load new reagents, the reagent bar code scanner
will not read the reagent bottle bar code labels
again when you start the system. If you do
remove the reagent tray cover, the system reads
the bar code labels and shows the new Reagent
Loading screen.
3. Press START.
If you removed the reagent tray cover in step 2, the system
scans the reagent bar code labels, then shows the next
Reagent Loading screen.
Verify the reagent loading information, if required, then press
ENTER (refer to the Verifying Reagent Loading procedure).
4. Type the tray identifier for the sample tray that you loaded
on the system in step 1.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each sample tray of scheduled
samples that you need to run to complete the worklist.
6-31

To load a Stat or a single sample after starting a run with the 40position Sample Integrity tray installed on the system:
2. Locate the next available position by pressing F4 Insert
Request.
3.
If the sample is a Stat, move the cursor to the Stat? field,

then press SELECT to select Yes. If the sample is a routine
sample, leave the Stat? field set to No.
4.
Move the cursor to the required profile or test for the

sample, then press SELECT.
5.
At the Worklist/Tests screen, press F6 Load Sample. Refer to

Figure 6-10.
6.
The system rotates the sample tray to the required position

then beeps once.
Figure 6-10. Worklist/Tests Screen (Example)
Worklist
Tests
Tray/Cup Number: A25
Request Number: 30
Sample Type: Patient
Stat? Yes
Patient Name: Judith Recknagel

Profiles:
Cardiac
Press <SELECT>
to select the blank
indicated by
the cursor.
F1 Next
F2 Previous F3 Find
Request
7.
Tests:
Alb
TBili
Creat
TRIG
ACP_T
TIBC
Request
Request
Liver
ALP
BUN
GGT
UA
ACP_P
Lytes
ALT
Ca
Gluc_HK
HBD
Mg
F4 Insert
Request
Routine
Amy
Chlor
IPhos
HDL
Fe
F5 Erase
Request
AST
Chol
LDH_L
CO2
ExFe
F6 Load
DBili
CK
TP
ACP_NP
UIBC
F7
Sample
Open the Stat cover to load the sample; do not remove the
sample tray or tray cover from the system to load the sample.
NOTE
If you removed the sample tray or tray cover

from the system to load the sample, verify the
reagent loading information.
F8
6-32
Loading Stats or Single Samples During a Run (Continued)

8. Load the Stat or single sample into the scheduled cup
position on the installed Sample Integrity tray.
9. Close the Stat cover.
6-33

At the System Status/Pending Status screen, you can view the
status of the sample trays that contain your scheduled samples.
You can also review the status of the scheduled tests.
To view the System Status/Pending Status screen:
1. From any screen, press STATUS.
The system shows the System Status screen.
2. At the System Status screen, press F5 Pending Status.
The System Status/Pending Status screen highlights any
pending tests and highlights the sample trays that contain
samples that are scheduled but not yet assayed (refer to
Figure 6-11).
Figure 6-11. System Status/Pending Status Screen (Example)
System Status
Pending Status
Press required
function key for
further status
information, or
press <EXIT> to
exit Status.
Currently Dispensing:
Operation: Initial dispense
Pending Tests:
Creat
Alb
DBili
TBili
CK
GGT
Trig
UA
ACP_T
ACP_P
TIBC
Pending Sample Trays:

A
B
C
G
H
I
F1 System F2 System F3 Reagent F4 Sample

Status
Details
ALP
BUN
Gluc_HK
HDL
Mg
Status
Status
F5
Test Name: Glucose
ALT
Ca
IPhos
HBD
Fe
Amy
Chlor
LDH_L
CO2
ExFe
F6 Communi-
AST
Chol
TP
ACP_NP
UIBC
F7
cations
3. Press EXIT to return to the screen where you started (step 1).
F8
6-34

The Express Plus automatically reruns samples if the test results
show an error flag. The system does not verify a result against
the high and low normal limits except when it prints the result;
therefore, the system will not rerun a sample if it exceeds the
high or low normal limits.
Depending on the sample error flag, some samples are
automatically diluted before the system reruns them. The system
reruns tests with sample volumes that are 5 L or less, but it will
not dilute those samples. Also, if the sample volume is greater
than 5 L with a dilution ratio of 1, the system does not dilute
the sample.
When the Express Plus determines that a sample requires an
automatic rerun (or dilution and rerun), it schedules that sample
immediately for the required test. The system completes the
sample being dispensed before it reruns any scheduled samples.
Table 6-3 is a summary of when the system automatically reruns
a sample:
Table 6-3. Automatic Reruns
This sample . . .
Is rerun if . . .
And is rerun . . .
patients and
controls
the rate, response, or

result was flagged for
any reason (only if it
was not rerun before)
once
diluted reruns for

patients and
controls
the Over flag was set
once if the following

conditions exist:
it has not been
rerun before
it is not a
qualitative test
the dilution ratio
is >1
the High conc.
linearity flag was set

the High abs flag was
set and the factor is

positive
the Low abs was set
and the factor is
negative
blanks and
calibrators
a blank or calibrator was

flagged for any reason
until twice the

number of scheduled
replicates are run
6-35
Automatically Rerunning and Diluting Samples (Continued)

Table 6-4 is a summary of automatic dilution and rerun
information:
Table 6-4. Automatic Dilution and Rerun
If a sample has this error flag . . .
Dilution?
Control out
No
High absorbance limit exceeded. (negative factor)
No
High absorbance limit exceeded. (positive factor)
Yes
High blank limit exceeded.
No
High Concentration.
Yes
Low absorbance limit exceeded. (negative factor)
Yes
Low absorbance limit exceeded. (positive factor)
No
Low blank limit exceeded.
No
Noise limit exceeded.
No
Nonlinearity limit exceeded.
No
Outlier
No
Over
Yes
Primary wavelength abs is high.
No
Primary wavelength abs is low.
No
Secondary wavelength abs is high.
No
Secondary wavelength abs is low.
No
Under
No
6-36
Manually Diluting and Rerunning Samples

If a rerun sample is flagged invalid after the automatic rerun, you
can assay the test and sample again while the system is running.
If you manually rerun a sample that has a flagged result from an
automatic diluted rerun, the system automatically dilutes the
sample again when you rerun it. You can also manually dilute a
sample, then rerun it, if required.
Use this procedure to load and run a sample that requires
manual dilution and manual rerun:
1.
2.
At the Main Menu, press F1 Worklist.

Locate the next available position by pressing F4 Insert
Request.
3.
If the sample is a Stat, move the cursor to the Stat? field,

then press SELECT to select Yes. If the sample is a routine
sample, leave the Stat? field set to No.
4.
Move the cursor to the required profile or tests for the

sample, then press SELECT.
5.
At the Worklist/Tests screen, press F6 Load Sample.
6.
The system rotates the sample tray to the required position

then beeps once.
7.
Open the Stat cover on the tray cover to load the sample; do
not remove the cover or tray from the system.
NOTE
If you removed the sample tray or tray cover

from the system to load the sample, verify the
reagent loading information.
8.
Load the stat or single sample into the scheduled cup

position on the installed sample tray.
9.
Close the Stat cover.
6-37

If the system encounters an error, it shows a message in the
Status zone (Error detected Press Status). Refer to Section 8,
Using the HELP and STATUS Programs, and to Section 10,
Troubleshooting the Express Plus, for detailed information about
correcting status or error messages. If an error occurs at any time
during testing, use this procedure to correct the error:
1.
If Error detected Press Status shows in the Status zone

during a run, press STATUS.
2. At the System Status screen, the most-recently detected error

shows at either the System Status, Reagent Status, Sample
Status, or Communications Status field (refer to
Figure 6-12).
The error that shows on the Sample Status
screen is the most-recently detected error for a
sample, while the flag that can show for the
same sample on the Patient Results screen is the
highest priority flag that occurred for that
sample.
NOTE
3. If you require a further explanation of the error at the System

Status screen, press the required function key:
F2 System Details, F3 Reagent Status, F4 Sample Status, or
F6 Communications.
For example, if you get an error that shows next to System
Status on the System Status screen, press F2 System Details to
obtain more information about that status error (refer to
Figure 6-13).
Figure 6-12. System Status Screen (Example)
15-MAR-1992
11:45
System Status
Status:
Cuvettes Used: 20
Standby
Maximum: 195
Currently Dispensing:
Operation: Initial dispense
Error detected
Press Status
Test Name: Glucose
System Temperature: 37C Stable

Errors Detected:
System Status:
Press required
function key for
further status
information, or
press <EXIT> to
exit Status.
Errors shown are
the most recently
detected errors.
F1
Distilled water empty

Reagent Status:
Control out
Sample Status:
Noise
Pending Status:
Tests/Trays pending
F2 System F3 Reagent F4 Sample F5 Pending F6 CommuniDetails
Status
Status
Status
cations
F7
F8
6-38
Correcting Errors During a Run (Continued)

Figure 6-13. System Status/System Details Screen (Example)
15-MAR-1992
11:45
System Status
System Details
Press required
function key for
further status
information, or
press <EXIT> to
exit Status.
Errors shown are
the most recently
detected errors.
F1 System F2
Status
Status:
Cuvettes Used: 20
Error detected
Standby
Maximum: 195
Press Status
System Status: Distilled water empty
Cuvette Waste Drawer: Closed
Water Bath: OK
Cuvettes in Feeder: 170
Waste Water: OK
Reagent Cover: Installed
Wash Water: LOW
Sample Cover: Sample cup cover installed
C
Subsystems
Track: OK
Probe: OK
Valve: OK
Diluter: OK
Wash Pump: OK
Waste Pump: OK
Sample Transport: OK
Reagent Transport: OK
Photometer: OK
Lamp: Standby
Track: Ready
Water Bath: Ready
Cuvette Shuttle: Standby
F3 Reagent F4 Sample
Status
Status
Inner Track: Equil.

Outer Tack: Equil.
Preheater: Equil.
Bath: Equil.
Probe: Equil.
F5 Pending F6 CommuniStatus
F7
cations
4. Correct the error (use Section 10, Troubleshooting the

Express Plus, to locate the meaning of the error or message
and the corrective actions for the error).
5. Press EXIT to return to the screen where you started (step 1).
6. If required, press START to resume testing.
If the error occurs again after testing resumes, repeat this
procedure to correct the error.
F8
6-39

You have several ways to view test results on the Express Plus.
You can:
read the printed run-time reports during testing for blanks,
calibrators, controls, and patient samples

use the Patient Results program to view, modify, and enter
patient and control results, then print collated patient reports

The run-time reports automatically print during the run if you set
the run-time reports options at the Options/Printing Options
screen to ON.
If you set Send Run-Time Reports to default printer to OFF, the runtime reports will print on the system printer.
If you set Send Run-Time Reports to default printer to ON, the runtime reports will print on the default printer, which can be either
the system, approved DEC or approved IBM Proprintercompatible printer.
Responses are reported on the run-time report as:
absorbance (A) for endpoints
absorbance (dA) for two-point tests
absorbance over time (dA/T) for rates
Table 6-5 explains the flags that can show on the run-time reports
for patient results (some of the same flags can also print for
calibrators, controls, and blanks).
6-40
Reviewing Run-time Results (Continued)

Figure 6-14 is an example of a run-time report for patient results.
Figure 6-14. Run-Time Report for Routine Samples (Example)
Result
Cup Number:
Patient Name:
Gluc_HK
Result:
25-Mar-1992
10:30
A3
Request Number 23
Maggie Brown
A, dA, dA/T:
0.8326
87.1
Cup Number:
Patient Name:
Gluc_HK
Result:
25-Mar-1992
10:31
A4
Request Number 24
Norma Schmidt
A, dA, dA/T:
0.3393
120.4 HIGH
Flag
Response
Refer to Section 5, Setting Up the Express Plus, for more

information on setting run-time report printing options.
Refer to Section 7, Using the Calibration Data and Q.C. Statistics
Programs, for calibration-specific and control-specific flags, and
examples of run-time reports for calibrators and controls.
6-41

Table 6-5. Run-Time Report Flags for Routine Samples
This Flag . . .
Means . . .
Diluted Rerun
the sample was diluted and rerun (this is not an

error flag).
HIGH
the concentration of the sample is above the

High Normal limit. This is not an error.
High absorbance
limit exceeded.
the sample absorbance is above the defined

absorbance limit. Invalid also prints next to the
result.
High blank limit

exceeded.
the average of the high blank absorbances

exceeded the High Blank A Limit. Invalid also
prints next to the result.
High
Concentration.
the result is above the linearity limit defined for

the test. Invalid also prints next to the result.
Invalid
the sample result was flagged.
LOW
the concentration of the sample is below the Low

Normal limit (this is not an error flag).
Low absorbance
limit exceeded.
the sample absorbance is below the defined

absorbance limit. Invalid also prints next to the
result.
Low blank limit

exceeded.
the average of the low blank absorbances is lower

than the Low Blank A Limit. Invalid also prints
next to the result.
Noise limit
exceeded.
that the sample noise value is above the noise

limit. Invalid also prints next to the result.
Nonlinearity limit
exceeded.
that the result is above the nonlinearity limit

defined for the system. Invalid also prints next
to the result.
Outlier
two or more points were deleted because they

are outside of the line (curve for kinetic test
type) for the selected test type. Invalid also
prints next to the result.
Over
the sample concentration is higher than the

concentration of the highest calibrator (for
nonlinear curve types only).
Primary
wavelength
abs. is high.

wavelength is higher than the system internal
high absorbance limit. Invalid also prints next to
the result.
6-42

Table 6-5. Run-Time Report Flags for Routine Samples (Continued)
This Flag . . .
Means . . .
Primary
wavelength
abs. is low.
one or more data points at the primary wavelength is

lower than the system internal low absorbance limit.
Invalid also prints next to the result.
Rerun
that the sample was rerun, either automatically by

the system, or as requested by you.
Secondary
wavelength
abs. is high.
one or more data points at the secondary wavelength

is higher than the system internal high absorbance
Secondary
wavelength
abs. is low.
one or more data points at the secondary wavelength

is lower than the system internal low absorbance
Under
the sample concentration is lower than the lowest

nonzero calibrator used for the curve (for nonlinear
curve types only).
6-43

At the Patient Results program, you can:
view the results for completed patient and control requests
go to the Worklist/Tests screen for a patient or control request
modify the results for a test, or manually enter a result for an
off-system test
print the collated patient reports
The following procedures explain how to use the Patient Results

program to manage your patient and control results.
Reviewing Sample
Results
To use the Patients Results program to view your sample results

(refer to Figure 6-15):
1. Go to the Patient Results screen:
If you are at the . . .
Press . . .
Then . . .
Main Menu
F2 Patient
the system shows the results

screen for the first request in
the worklist.
Results
Worklist/Tests screen
F7 Results

screen for the current
request.
Figure 6-15. Patient Results Screen (Example)
Patient Results
Request Number: 27
Sample Type: Patient

Patient Name: Daniel Claire
Review data and

modify if required.
F1 Next
Request
Result
Test
Alb
ALT
35.9
AST
TBili
1.2
Ca
Chol
115.2
Creat
3.5
Gluc_HK 85.25
LDH_L
Trig
HBD
CO2
F2 Previous F3 Find
Request
Request
Flag
Test
Result
ALP
Amy
DBili
BUN
8.7
Chlor
CK
55.9
GGT
IPhos
TP
UA
HDL
ACP_NP
High
Low
Dil. rerun
F4 Edit
Request
F5
F6
Flag
Nonlinear
F7 Worklist F8 More
6-44
Reviewing Sample
Results
2. At the Patient Results screen, select the function required to

find the request for a patient or control sample:
(Continued)
To . . .
Press . . .
find the request with the next scheduled cup

number
F1 Next
find the request with the next lower cup

number
F2 Previous
find the request you want by searching for

certain search criterion
F3 Find
Request
Request
Request
When these Find functions keys show on the

screen, press the key that corresponds to what you
want to find:
F1 Request Number type the request number
F2 Cup Number
type the cup number
F3 Patient Name
type the patients name
F4 Patient ID
type the ID number
F5 First Request
find the first request
F6 Last Request
find the last request
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
review the Worklist/Tests screen for a request
F7 Worklist
show the remaining results on the screen
F8 More
3. Review the sample results that show on the screen, then

repeat step 2 to find another request, if required.
To . . .
Then . . .
edit sample results for a

selected request
go to the next procedure, Editing

Sample Results
print collated patient

reports
go to the Printing Sample Results

procedure
end your review of the

sample results
press EXIT to go to the Main

Menu
If you are using the Communications software option on your

system to send results to a Laboratory Information System
(LIS), refer to your Express Communications Manual for
instructions. Refer also to Appendix F, LIS
Communications, for general LIS communications
information.
6-45
To use the Patients Results program to edit sample results or to

manually enter results for off-system tests (refer to Figure 6-15):
1. Go to the Patient Results screen:
Press . . .
Then . . .
Main Menu
F2 Patient

the worklist.
Results
F7 Results

request.

find the request for a patient or control sample:
To . . .
Press . . .

number
F1 Next

number
F2 Previous

F3 Find
Request
Request
Request

screen, press the key that corresponds to what
you want to find:
F2 Cup Number
type the cup number
F3 Patient Name
F4 Patient ID
type the ID number
F5 First Request
F6 Last Request
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
F7 Worklist
show the remaining results on the screen
F8 More
6-46

(Continued)
3. Edit the required result:

a. Press F4 Edit Request to obtain a cursor on the screen.
b. Move the cursor to the result or to the empty Result field
for an off-system test result.
If all the results do not show on the screen, press F8 More
to show the remaining results.
c. Press DELETE to erase the result, if any, then type the new
result.
NOTE
If the test is qualitative, press SELECT to select

POS, NEG, or blank as the new result.
If you edit a control result, that result does not
go into the Q.C. database.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit results for another request or

enter off-system test results for another request, if required.
To . . .
Then . . .
go to the next procedure, Printing

Sample Results
review results for patients or

controls
go to the Reviewing Sample

Results procedure
go to the Main Menu
press EXIT
6-47
To use the Patients Results program to print collated patient

reports of sample results or manually enter results for off-system
tests.
Figure 6-16 is an example of a collated patient report. Any
sample that has an error flag associated with it, prints as
PENDING on the collated report.
1. Go to the Patient Results screen (refer to Figure 6-15):
Press . . .
Then . . .
Main Menu
F2 Patient

the worklist.
Results
CAUTION
F7 Results

request.
Do not press F5 Erase Request/F1 Erase Worklist

functions at the Worklist/Tests screen before the
system completes printing collated reports for
requests in that worklist; otherwise you can lose
the data. Wait until printing completes before
erasing the worklist or requests for which you
are printing results.
If you use an external printer to print reports or
screens, verify that the printer is online before
you request the report or screen copy;
otherwise, you can lose some of your data.
NOTE
If you use the PRINT SCRN key to print the

Patient Results screens on the system printer,
the printing function can take up to five minutes
to complete.
6-48
2. Press PRINT, then select the collated report to print:
(Continued)
To . . .
Press . . .
Then . . .
print a report for the

request shown on the
screen
F1 Current
the system prints the

report.
print a report for all

the requests with a
specified patients
name
F2 Patient
print a report for all

the requests with a
specified patients ID
number
F3 Patient
print reports for the

cup numbers you
specify
F4 Cup
print reports for all

the requests in the
worklist
F8 All
Request
Name
ID
Range
Requests
type the name, then press

ENTER; the system prints
the report.
type the ID, then press

ENTER; the system prints
the report.
type the cup range

(tray/cuptray/cup), then
press ENTER; the system
prints the report.
the system prints the
reports.

find the next request to print:
To . . .
Press . . .

number
F1 Next

number
F2 Previous

F3 Find
Request
Request
Request

screen, press the key that corresponds to what you
want to find:
F2 Cup Number
type the cup number
F3 Patient Name
F4 Patient ID
type the ID number
F5 First Request
F6 Last Request
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
F7 Worklist

(Continued)
6-49
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to print the your collated patient

reports.
5. Press EXIT to return to the Main Menu.
Figure 6-16. Collated Patient Report (Example)
Patient Report
15-MAR-1992 07:55
University Hospital Medical Laboratory
1234 Main Street
Oberlin, Ohio 44074
Patient: Maggie Brown
Cup Number: B03
Comments:
ID: 123-27-4567
Request Number: 123456
Age: 10/26/68
Sex: F
Fasting sample
Time of draw: 7:15AM
Room 221A
Pre-op patient for 16-JAN
Physician: Dr. Seth Daniels
Insurance: Health Insurance Inc.
Test
Result
Flags
Low
High
BELOW NORM
3.5
7.0
0.7
65.
6.0
5.3
18.0
1.5
110.
8.3
ABOVE NORM
37.
11.8
13.2
147.
29.4
33.0
8.4
140.
2.7
89.
10.2
220.
4.5
221.
Profile: profile1
Albumin
BUN
Creatinine
Glucose
Total Protein
0.1
Pending
Pending
Pending
6.5
mg/dL
Profile: profile2
Alk. Phos
ALT
AST
160.2
25.5
33.0
U/L
U/L
U/L
Tests:
Calcium
Cholesterol
Phosphorus
LDH
Pending
Pending
3.7
200
g/dL
mg/dL
U/L
ABOVE NORM
6-50
6-51
Shutting Down
At the end of the day or the end of each work shift, perform the
following procedure to clean the Express Plus:
1. At the Main Menu, press F7 Diagnostics/Maintenance.
The Diagnostics/Maintenance screen shows.
The Manual Operations screen shows.
3. To begin the manual operations, press ENTER.
The system homes the probe and transports.
4. Load a bottle of deproteinizing solution in position 1 on the
reagent tray, then install and secure the reagent tray cover.
5. At the Manual Operations screen, press F2 End-of-Day, then
follow the instructions shown in the prompt area of the
screen.
The system begins the end-of-day tasks by cleaning the probe
as follows:
a. The system moves the probe to the wash station, then
pumps approximately 5.0 mL of distilled water into the
wash station.
b. The system rotates the deproteinizing solution to the
aspiration position, aspirates 500.0 L of solution, then
dispenses the deproteinizing solution into the wash
station.
c. The system repeats steps 5a and 5b five times.
d. The system pumps approximately 5.0 mL of distilled
water into the wash station. The probe remains at the
wash station after this cleaning procedure is completed.
e. The system then sets the sample tray to A and purges all
the cuvette strips (except one) from the cuvette track into
the cuvette waste drawer.
6-53
Shutting Down (Continued)

7. a. Remove the cuvette waste drawer, then remove the
biohazard liner from the cuvette waste drawer, and safely
discard the biohazard liner.
b. Install a clean biohazard liner into the cuvette waste
drawer, then install the waste drawer in the system.
c. Remove the waste bottle, safely discard the contents of
the bottle, then install the waste bottle in the system.
d. Remove the distilled water bottle, empty the bottle, then
install the empty distilled water bottle in the system.
NOTE
At the beginning of the next day or shift, ensure

that you fill the distilled water bottle with clean,
distilled water at the Startup screen before
attempting to operate the system.
8. Close the front panel.

9. Will each work shift use the Express Plus?
Yes: Leave the power switch in the ON (I) position.
No:
If you are not using the system for a long period of

time, place the power switch in the OFF (O) position.
10. Moisten a soft cloth with a 5.0% (1:20) dilution of a 5.25%

sodium hypochlorite (bleach) solution, then wipe the system
cabinet surfaces, sample trays and sample covers, and reagent
tray and reagent covers to disinfect them.
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Rev. B 1/2000
Glossary
A-1
Glossary
Absorbance (A)
negative common logarithm of

transmittance: A = -log10 T
Accessory
optional device that you connect to the

Express Plus, such as a hand-held bar
code wand
Alphanumeric Keys
keys on the Express Plus keyboard that

contain letters or numbers
Automatic Test
Shutdown
optional system setting that, if enabled,

stops the system from running a test for
which control rules were violated
Bar Code
encoded information that is read by an

optical scanner
Bar Code Scanner
optical device that reads the bar code

information from the label on the
reagent bottle
Bar Code Wand
hand-held scanner used to enter barcoded information into the system

(optional accessory)
Bichromatic
Absorbance
the absorbance obtained when the

system measures the absorbance of a
reaction mixture at a secondary
wavelength then subtracts it from its
absorbance at the primary wavelength
before calculating the results
BIOHAZARD
statement used in the text of this

manual to alert you to a potentially
biohazardous condition
Calibration Data
Program
Express Plus program that enables you

to select calibration functions and
manage calibration data
Carryover
contamination of a sample or reagent by

the preceding sample or reagent
CAUTION

manual to alert you to a possibility of
system damage or loss of data
Collated Report
final printed report that contains all of

the test results and demographics
information for a patient or control
A-2
Glossary
Glossary (Continued)
Communication Ports
four ports used to connect accessories

to the Express Plus
Communications
Subsystem
components that collect, verify, process,

and manage the data collected by the
Express Plus
Concave Holographic
Grating
optical device that produces colored

bands of light (diffraction spectra) from
the light beam that passes through the
cuvette well
Control Rule Evaluation
part of the Express Plus Q.C. Statistics

program which allows you to select
criteria against which your control
results are evaluated by the system
CPU (Central
Processing Unit)
part of the Express Plus microprocessor

that contains the circuits, which
interpret instructions to direct the
system operations
Cursor
blinking horizontal bar that shows on

the system screen and that you move
among the screen fields to make
selections
Cursor Keys
four arrow keys on the system keyboard

that you press to move the cursor in the
required direction on the screen
Cuvette Magazine
holder used to load 13 cuvette strips

into the cuvette feeder
Cuvette Strip
five connected cuvette wells, each of

which can hold a reaction mixture for a
sample
Cuvette Subsystem
components that position and preheat

the cuvettes in the system, then use the
cuvettes to hold reaction mixtures in the
light path during measurement
Cuvette Track
mechanical track that moves the cuvette

strips through the system
Cuvette Waste Drawer
removable bin that holds the used

cuvette strips in a biohazard liner as the
cuvette track pushes the strips out of
the system
Glossary
A-3
Default
factory-programmed value or setting
Definitions Program
the Express Plus program that enables

you to define new tests for the system,
or to modify factory-defined parameters
for tests, profiles, controls, calibrators,
or blanks
Demographics
information about a patient that you

want shown on the collated report
Diagnostics/
Maintenance Program
the Express Plus program that enables

you to perform startup and end of day
functions, precision checks, lamp
alignment, and other automated
maintenance and troubleshooting tasks
Digital Diluter
mechanical device used to control the

volume of fluid that the system aspirates
or dispenses
Distilled Water Bottle
container that holds distilled water for

rinsing the inner and outer surfaces of
the probe
External Printer
optional printer that you connect to the

system via the parallel printer port
Factory-Programmed
values and settings that are programmed

for the Express Plus at Bayer
Diagnostics before the system is shipped
to you
Floppy Disk Drive
device that uses 3 -inch, high-density,

floppy disks to store test results,
definitions, system settings, calculations,
and Q.C. data
Fluid Subsystem
components that aspirate and dispense

required volumes of reagents and
samples for testing, and move distilled
water through the system for washing
other components
Function
software option shown in a menu or at a

program screen, that allows you to
perform a specific action within a
program
Function Keys
keyboard keys used to select functions

shown on a menu or at a program
screen (F1 through F8 are defined for
the Express Plus)
A-4
Glossary
Hard Disk Drive
device that contains all of the system

software, and the system configuration
and test data
Help Program

to obtain online assistance on the
operation of the Express Plus programs,
functions, and keys
Highlighted
term used to describe a screen field that

is selected and that shows on the screen
enclosed in an amber box (refer also to
Remove; Reverse Video; Select)
Humidifier Ring
the ring that snaps under the sample

cover to help reduce evaporation and
degradation
Keyboard
device on which you respond to system

prompts by typing entries or supplying
other operating information
Lag Time
time from the beginning of one reagent

dispense to the beginning of the defined
read time or the next reagent dispense
LIS 2 Plus Protocol
an interface protocol that needs

acknowledgement that a transmission
was received by the host device
LIS 2 Protocol
an interface protocol that does not use

error checking
LIS 3
an interface protocol that requires

acknowledgement and status
(<Success> or <Bad Data>)
information that a transmission was
received by a host device
LIS Device
Laboratory Information System (LIS),

possibly a computer
Express Plus program that you use if

you need to reload system software or
load system software upgrades
Main Menu
list of the eight Express Plus programs

from which you can select the program
you need to use
Menu Screen
screen that shows a list of program

options from which you can select the
option you need to use
Glossary
A-5
Normalize
method used to adjust values to some

defined reference or calibrator
NOTE

manual to alert you to information that
requires your attention
Numeric Keypad
set of numeric keys located on the

Express Plus keyboard
Options Program
Express Plus program that includes

functions for setting installation options
(system options), test order,
communications ports, backing up and
restoring data on disks, and resetting
the system to its factory-programmed
settings
Outlier Rejection
method used to detect data points that

lie outside of a set of specified limits
Paper Advance Key
key on the front panel of the system

that advances the system printer paper
Patient Results
Program

to review, modify, or enter patient and
control results, and to print collated
patient reports
Photodiode
detector that responds to radiant energy

and converts light input into digital
output
optical components contained in the

photometer that obtain photometric
data, which is used to determine the
absorbance of the reaction mixtures
Placekeeping Zone
area of the screen which shows your

place in the software (the software
levels that you moved past and the level
where you are working now)
Polychromator
part of the photometer that isolates a

particular band of wavelengths
Positive Sample
Identification
bar coding system used to correlate a

primary sample tube with a request in
the worklist. This optional accessory
also includes a primary sample tube
tray, bar code wand, and Test
Scheduler.
A-6
Glossary
Power Switch
rocker switch used to apply electrical

power to, or remove power from, the
Express Plus
Primary Sample Tube
blood collection tubes used to collect

whole blood samples from patients,
which are then centrifuged and loaded
on the Express Plus sample tube tray
Primary Sample Tube

Tray
removable tray that holds up to 20

primary sample tubes
Printing Options
options in the Options program that

you set to select the printer (System,
DEC, or Proprinter), and the types of
reports to print (run-time and collated)
Probe
device used to aspirate and dispense

samples, reagents, and wash fluids
Profile
group or panel of tests that you can

select at one time and assay for a
sample
Program
a top-level software component that

presents a menu of options
Program Zone
area of the screen where the action and

main information about a program
shows
Prompt
message or request that the system

shows in the Prompt zone (lower, left
section of the screen)
Prompt Zone
area of the screen (lower, left section of

the screen) where the system shows
messages and requests for user actions
Purge
act of moving all the cuvette strips

from the cuvette track into the cuvette
waste drawer
Q.C. Statistics

to manage your Q.C. data and statistics,
and print Q.C. data reports
Glossary
A-7
QCSystems
Bayer Diagnostics program that helps

you manage your Q.C. results for a
specific Bayer Diagnostics clinical
chemistry system (also a function of the
Q.C. Statistics program on the Express
Plus in which you enter QCSystems
data to prepare a report for submission
to Bayer Diagnostics)
Ratio Test
test result that is calculated from the

results of two or more tests
Reaction Mixture
mixture of sample and reagent that the

system pipettes and dispenses into a
cuvette, then incubates and measures to
obtain a test result
Reagent Carryover
Reduction
function of the Assay Order screen that

allows you to define wash cycles and
wash fluids to use between tests that
chemically interfere with one another
Reagent Transport
electromechanical device that rotates

the reagent tray
Reagent Tray
removable tray that holds up to 26

reagent bottles
Reblanking
method used to adjust a stored

calibration curve for continued use (for
a blanked, linear curve type)
Remove
terms used to describe the act of

moving the cursor to a field on the
screen that is selected (highlighted),
then pressing SELECT to remove the
highlighting for that field so that field is
no longer selected (refer also to
Highlighted; Select)
Replicate
defined number of times that a sample

is assayed
Reverse Video
dark characters that show on an amber

background on the system screen (refer
also to Highlighted)
Rule Evaluation
refer to Control Rule Evaluation
Run-time Report
report printed at the time the system

collects data
A-8
Glossary
Sample Cup
disposable, plastic cup that holds a

sample on the sample tray, so the probe
can aspirate the sample for the reaction
mixture
the removable 40-position sample tray

cover, and humidifier ring used to
control sample evaporation and
degradation
Sample Loadlist
term used for the printed worklist that

you obtain by pressing PRINT at the
Worklist/Tests screen. This list can help
you load samples into their scheduled
sample tray positions.
Sample Transport
electromechanical device that rotates

the sample tray
Sample Type
kind of sample that you schedule and

load on the sample trays: Patient,
Control, Calibrator, or Blank
Scan
term used to describe the action of

passing the hand-held bar code wand
across the Test Scheduler to read the
bar codes and enter the required
information into the system
Screen
system screen (CRT) that shows data,

prompts, messages, and other operating
information
Screen Field
specified area on the screen
Screen Zones
five areas of the system screen that

contain specific kinds of information
Select
term used to describe the act of moving

the cursor to a screen field, then
pressing SELECT to highlight the field
(see also Highlighted; Remove)
Startup
time, after powerup, when the system

loads the software and first shows
information on the screen
Status (of system)
current operating status of the system; a

Status message shows what the system is
doing and if it is ready to operate
Glossary
A-9
Status Program
Express Plus program that you select

using the fixed-function STATUS key.
The program enables you to view the
current operating or error status of the
Express Plus.
Status Zone
top area of the screen, which contains

the system status information
System Clock
24-hour clock that the system uses to

monitor the calibration intervals, show
on the screen, and print on reports
System Keys
keys on the front panel of the system

that stop, start, or pause the system
operation
System Printer
thermal printer built into the system

and used to print tests, parameters,
data, and run-time reports
Test Scheduler
laminated card with preprinted bar

codes that you can scan with the
optional bar code wand to schedule a
worklist and enter other operating
commands into the system; eliminates
the need to use the keyboard
WARNING

manual that alerts you to an electrical
hazard that could cause injury
Waste Bottle
container that holds the waste water

that the system uses for rinsing the
probe and wash station
Water Bath
temperature-controlled device that

heats the water that the system uses to
heat the reaction mixtures in the probe
Worklist
schedule of samples and tests, including

controls, calibrators and blanks,
required to complete your daily
workload
Worklist Program

to schedule your daily workload of
samples and tests
Glossary
Safety Summary
B-1
Safety Summary
The Express Plus is designed to operate safely. When you
operate the system in a safe environment, there are no known
operating hazards.
Warnings are used in this manual to alert you to electrical
hazards and other conditions that can lead to personal injury.
Ensure that you read and follow the instructions contained in
these warnings.
Warnings are shown on the following pages of this manual:
WARNING
2-15
9-31
9-5
9-32
9-6
E-3
9-8
G-4
9-26
G-5
The following Warnings apply to all sections of this manual:

WARNING
Do not operate the Express Plus in an

atmosphere containing explosive concentrations
of oxygen, hydrogen, or other flammable gases.
Certain system components can generate sparks
and ignite gases.
Connect the system to an electrical outlet that
has a ground connection. If you doubt the
safety or reliability of your electrical supply,
consult a qualified electrician.
Do not attempt to perform any maintenance or
troubleshooting procedures that are not
described in this manual. Performing
unauthorized maintenance or troubleshooting
procedures can result in personal injury or
damage your system. Contact your Bayer
Diagnostics Field Service Engineer, Bayer
Diagnostics subsidiary office, or authorized
agent for assistance.
Observe safety precautions when handling
bleach and reagents. Some reagents contain
low concentrations of chemical substances that,
upon contact, can injure or irritate your eyes or
skin. Wear eye protection and gloves when
handling a potential eye or skin irritant.
9-27
G-9
B-2
Safety Summary
Safety Summary (Continued)

Use safe laboratory practices and techniques when you handle
serum samples, waste, and when you operate and clean your
system.
The National Institutes of Health (NIH), Centers for Disease
Control (CDC), and the National Committee for Clinical
Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) established the following
guidelines for handling laboratory biohazards. Use this summary
as general information. The summary is not intended to replace
or supplement your laboratory or hospital biohazard control
procedures.
A biohazard condition is a situation involving potentially
infectious, biological agents, such as hepatitis B virus, human
immunodeficiency virus (HIV), or tuberculosis bacterium. The
following are the major modes of transmission:
hand-to-mouth contact
hand-to-eye contact
superficial cuts and open wounds on exposed skin
skin penetration
The following is a general biohazard warning:

BIOHAZARD
To prevent contaminating yourself and other

laboratory personnel, treat all human sera
samples, all waste materials, and all used cuvette
strips as potentially pathogenic. Follow your
laboratorys safety protocol for cleaning and
decontaminating your Express Plus and
surrounding work surfaces.
Biohazard warnings, indicated by the international symbol, are

shown on the following pages of this manual:
BIOHAZARD
2-15
9-8
9-27
10-68
2-18
9-12
9-32
C-8
6-12
9-16
9-33
G-7
6-24
9-19
9-37
G-12
6-52
9-21
9-43
9-5
9-26
10-18
Safety Summary
B-3

To prevent accidentally contaminating yourself, your co-workers,
and other personnel in your laboratory, adhere to the following
biohazard guidelines:
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves when you service or maintain the

system components that come in contact with
human body fluids, such as serum, plasma,
urine, or whole blood, and when the possibility
exists for your hands to come into direct contact
with human body fluids, mucous membranes, or
potentially contaminated surfaces, such as when
you remove the cuvette waste drawer and
discard the biohazard liner.
Wear facial protection, such as goggles, when
splatter is possible, and wear protective clothing,
such as a lab coat or apron, when you handle
biological materials.
Wash your hands before leaving a contaminated
area, after you remove your gloves, and after
your hands come into contact with human body
fluids.
Do not shear, bend, break, or recap used
needles or lancets. Do not remove the needles
from disposable syringes.
Minimize aerosol formation during laboratory
procedures.
Do not touch your hands to your face, eat,
drink, smoke, or apply cosmetics in the
laboratory.
Do not pipet any liquid, including water, by
mouth, and do not put any tools or other
laboratory items in your mouth.
Cover all superficial cuts and wounds before
you start working in the laboratory.
Follow your laboratory or hospital biohazard
protocol for disposing of contaminated
materials.
Disinfect your work areas and tools that come
in contact with the Express Plus sample path or
waste area. Disinfect with a 5% (1:20) dilution
of a 5.25% sodium hypochlorite (bleach)
solution.
B-4
Safety Summary

Cautions are used in this manual to alert you to actions or
conditions that can lead to equipment damage or loss of data.
Ensure that you read and follow the instructions contained in
these cautions. Also, consult other Express Plus documents for
task-specific cautions.
Cautions are shown on the following pages of this manual:
CAUTION
3-20
5-39
6-47
9-7
9-27
9-45
10-18
C-8
3-25
5-41
7-10
9-9
9-31
9-46
10-29
G-3
4-50
5-42
7-44
9-18
9-34
9-48
10-37
G-4
4-64
6-7
9-3
9-22
9-38
9-50
10-64
G-5
5-5
6-12
9-5
9-23
9-40
9-51
10-65
G-6
5-37
6-14
9-6
9-26
9-43
10-3
10-68
G-9
Safety Summary
B-5

Other symbols and the associated meanings used in the Express
Plus documents and on the Express Plus and its accessories are:
When you see . . .
It means . . .
alternating current (AC)
protective conductor terminal
Warning: risk of electrical shock
Warning: risk of personal injury or equipment

damage (refer to your Express Plus Operators
Manual)
Biohazard Warning: risk of potentially

biohazardous infection
ON (Mains supply)
OFF (Mains supply)
Fuse
Keyboard
Bar Code Wand (Hand-held)

Printer
Water
EMC Directive of the European Union.
specifications of the Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.
Safety Summary
C-1
Appendix C Service and Supplies
Page
About This Section
C-3
Addresses and Communication Numbers
C-3
Ordering Replacement Parts
C-5
Ordering Operator Service Kit Parts
C-6
Ordering Supplies
C-7
C-8
C-3
About This Section

This section provides addresses and telephone numbers so that
you can contact Bayer Diagnostics to order parts for the Express
Plus or for technical assistance and system service.
Addresses and Communication Numbers

To contact Bayer Diagnostics within the Continental United
States, call:
1-800-255-2121 (toll-free) for technical assistance or service
1-800-255-3232 (toll-free) for parts and supplies
Manufactured by:
Bayer Corporation
333 Coney Street
East Walpole, MA 02032-1597 USA
508 668-5000
Bayer Argentina S.A.
Divisin Diagnsticos
Ricardo Guitirrez 3652
B1605EHD Munro-Buenos Aires
Argentina
54 11 4 762 7000
Bayer Australia Limited
Diagnostics Business Group
2 Keith Campbell Court
Scoresby
Victoria 3179 Australia
1 800 034 477
.
Bayer Austria GesmbH
Geschftsbereich Diagnostika
Lerchenfelder Grtel 9-11
A-1164 Wien, Austria
43-1-71146-2411
Bayer s.a.-n.v.
Division Diagnostics
Avenue Louise 143 Louizalaan
1050 Bruxelles-Brussel,
Belgium
32 2 535 66 81
Bayer S.A.
Produtos Diagnsticos
Rua Domingos Jorge 1100
04779-900 - So Paulo - SP
Brazil
55 11 5694 5574
Bayer Inc.
Bayer Diagnostics
Healthcare Division
77 Belfield Road
Toronto, Ontario
Canada M9W 1G6
416 248-0771
Bayer S.A.
Divisin Diagnstica
A.A. 80387
Av. De las Amricas No57-52
Santaf de Bogot, D.C. - Colombia
(571) 4234199-4234352
Bayer A/S
Norgaardsvej 32
DK-2800 Lyngby, Denmark
+ 45 45 23 50 00
Bayer OY
Suomalaistentie 7
FIN 02270 Espoo, Finland
+ 35 89 88 78 87
Bayer Diagnostics
Tour Horizion
52, quai de Dion Bouton
92807 Puteaux Cedex, France
01 49 06 56 00
Bayer Vital GmbH & Co. KG
Geschftsbereich Diagnostics
Siemensstrae 3
D-35463 Fernwald, Germany
0049-(0)641-4003-0
Bayer Diagnostics Limited

20/F Gee Chang Hong Centre
65 Wong Chuk Hang Road
Hong Kong
852-28147337
Bayer Diagnostics India Limited
589, Sayajipura
Ajwa Road
Baroda - 390019
Gujarat, India
91 265 46 2720
Bayer S.p.A.
Divisione Diagnostici
Via Grosio 10/4
20151 Milano, Italia
+39/023978.1
Bayer Medical Ltd.
Unosawa Tokyu Building 3F
1-19-15, Ebisu
Shibuya-Ku
Tokyo 150-0013, Japan
81.3.3440.4881
Bayer Diagnostics Korea Limited
4/F Kyemyung Building
48-7 Myungil-Dong
Kangdong-Ku
Seoul, Korea 134-070
82-2-428-5980
Bayer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V.
Division Diagnsticos
Ave. Colonia del Valle No. 615
Col. Del Valle
Delegacin Benito Jurez
Mxico, D.F. C.P. 03100
525 728 3301
C-4
Addresses and Communication Numbers (Continued)

Bayer B.V.
Division Diagnostics
Energieweg 1
3641 Rt Mijdrecht, The Netherlands
+31 (0)297 280 666
Bayer Hellas S.A.

Akakion 54A
Marousi
Athens 151 25, Greece
01-68 83 648
Bayer AS
Brennaveien 18
N-1483 Skytta, Norway
+ 47 67 06 86 00
Bayer (Pty) Ltd.

Healthcare Division
27 Wrench Road
Isando 1600, South Africa
27 11 921-5048
Bayer Sp. Z o.o.

Al. Jerozolimskie 158
02-326 Warszawa, Polska
+48(0)225723500
Bayer Portugal S.A.
Divisao PH / DS
Rua da Quinta do Pinheiro, 5
2795-653 Carnaxide, Portugal
351.21.416.50.22
Bayer Puerto Rico Inc
Diagnostics Division
Victoria Industrial Park
Building #1
Carolina, Puerto Rico
787 752-8989
Qumica Farmacutica Bayer, S.A.

Divisin Diagnsticos
Calabria, 268
08029 Barcelona, Espaa
+ 34 93 495.65.00
Bayer AB
Drakegatan 1
S-402 24 Gteborg, Sweeden
+ 46 31 83 98 00
Bayer (Schweiz) AG
Geschftsbereich Diagnostika
Grubenstrasse
8045 Zuerich, Switzerland
0041/1/465 81 11
Bayer Taiwan Company Limited

8/F No. 109 Sec. 2
Keelung Road
Taipei, Taiwan R.O.C.
886-2-23777520
Bayer plc
Bayer House
Strawberry Hill
Newbury, RG14 1JA
United Kingdom
+44 (0) 1635 563000
Bayer Corporation
511 Benedict Avenue
Tarrytown, NY 10591-5097 USA
914 631-8000
C-5
Ordering Replacement Parts

This list contains the replacement parts that you can order for the
Express Plus:
Table C-1. Replacement Parts
Description
Part
Number
Quantity
Cable, Express to External Printer
23517
Cuvette Waste Drawer
23174
Distilled Water Bottle
23378
Express Plus Applications Guide
107099
Express Plus TDM/DAU Applications Guide
107100
Express Plus Operators Manual
107098
Express Plus Quick Reference Guide
107101
Express Plus Software Installation Instructions
107125
107122
107123
External Printer, DEC LA70
24067
Humidifier Rings (Set of 6)
24167
Line Cord (North American)
23481
Line Cord (International)
23482
Paper Pin
23490
Primary Sample Tube Cover
23542
Primary Sample Tube Tray, 20-position
23513
Probe Tip
1453x185
Probe Transport Cover (clear, gray plastic)
23334
Reagent Cover
24078
Reagent Tray, 26-position
24076
Sample Cover
1453x261
Sample Integrity Tray Kit
1453x249
Sample Tray, 40-position
24162
System Software, Kit
1453x225
Wash Pump Filter
23361
Waste Bottle
23379
C-6
Ordering Operator Service Kit Parts

This list shows the parts that are contained in the Express Plus
Operator Service Kit:
Table C-2. Operator Service Kit Parts
Description
Part
Number
Quantity
Service Kit, Operators*
1453x7
Air Filter Kit (3 pieces)
1453x125
Digital Diluter Syringe, 500 L
23626
Fuse - 120 VAC 10% (6.25 A) T (SB)
60048x57
Fuse - 240 VAC 10% (3.15 A) T (SB)
60044x12
Lamp Assembly
1453x135
Peristaltic Pump Tubing and Filter
1453x156
Probe Tip
1453x185
Tygon Tubing, 14.5 feet
19819
1 piece
Water Bath Fluid
E34031
* You can order the Operators Service Kit as a kit, or order individual
parts contained in the Operators Service Kit.
C-7
Ordering Supplies
This list shows the Express Plus supplies that you can order:
Table C-3. Supplies
Description
Part
Number
Quantity
Bar Code Labels (5 x 3600)
23531
Cuvette Magazine Kit

(100 magazines and 36 biohazard liners)
751060
External Printer Paper, 8 x11 inches (one part)
20764
1 box
External Printer Ribbon Cartridge, DEC LA70
24068
Fuse - 100 VAC 10% (7.00 A) T (SB)
60048x60
Fuse - 120 VAC 10% (6.25 A) T (SB)
60048x57
Fuse - 200 VAC 10% (4.00 A) T (SB)
60044x13
Fuse - 240 VAC 10% (3.15 A) T (SB)
60044x12
Lamp Assembly (6-volt)
1453x135
Pediatric Cups (1000 per box)
751063
1 box
Primary Sample Tube Inserts (13.0 mm)
23520x13
Primary Sample Tube Inserts (16.0 mm)
23520x16
Sample Cups (1000 per box)
751058
1 box
Consumables Kit
1453x506
Cuvette Magazine Kit

(20 magazines and 20 biohazard liners)
751059
Flaring Tool Kit
1453x108
Lamp Assembly
1453x135
Paper Pin, System Printer
23490
Peristaltic Pump Tubing Assembly

with Filter
1453x156
Probe Tip
1453x185
Sample Cups (1000 per box)
751058
1 box
System Printer Paper (5 rolls)
23372
1 package
BIOHAZARD
To avoid a potentially biohazardous condition,

wear gloves when you remove the cuvette waste
drawer or a biohazard liner.
CAUTION
Discard all used cuvette strips. Unreliable

results and/or damage to the system can result if
you reuse cuvette strips.
C-8

This list contains the accessories that you can order for your
Express Plus:
Table C-4. Accessories and Options
Description
Part
Number
Quantity
Dust Cover, System
23678
Express Plus Communications Kit
1453x510
107112
24067
Express Plus External Printer Addendum
107113
External Printer Ribbon Cartridge,

DEC LA70
24068
1453x507
Bar Code Labels for Sample Tubes
23531
1 set
Bar Code Wand
23409
Bar Code Wand Holder
23363
Positive Sample Identification (PSID) System

Addendum
107087
Positive Sample Identification Disk Kit
1453x226
Sample Tube Inserts (13.0 mm)
23520x13
20
Sample Tube Inserts (16.0 mm)
23520x16
20
Sample Tube Tray, 20-position
23513
Sample Tube Tray Cover
23542
Test Scheduler
23541B
23511
Express Plus Communications Enabling Disk

Instructions
External Printer, DEC LA70
Positive Sample Identification Kit
Power Line Conditioner (110 V)
D-1
Appendix D Accessories and Options
Page
About This Section
D-3
Accessory or Option Addenda
D-4
D-5
D-3
About This Section

This section gives you an easy reference tab for finding
information pertaining to your Express Plus hardware accessories
or software options. When you order an accessory or option, an
addendum or instruction set is shipped to you. Place the
addendum or instruction pages into this section of your manual
for easy reference.
Ensure that you install and operate each accessory according to
the specific installing and operating instructions that are shipped
with the accessory.
The following hardware accessories and software options are
available for the Express Plus:
External Printer Hardware Option
D-4
Accessory or Option Addenda

Record any addenda or instructions that you insert into this
section of the manual on the chart below:
Document
Part Number
D-5

This section explains the hardware accessories and software
options that are available for the Express Plus:
External Printer
The Express Plus external printer is an optional hardware
accessory. The external printer is a stand-alone, dot-matrix
printer. For specific setup and operating details, refer to the
operating manual for your external printer.
The external printer is used to print worklists, run-time reports,
patient reports, quality control reports, and test results on a
collated patient report. The external printer connects to the
parallel printer port at the right side of the system. The printer
configuration is set by Bayer Diagnostics Field Service
Engineers at the time of installation. For more information, refer
to the Express Plus External Printer Addendum, shipped with
your external printer.
NOTE
Bayer Diagnostics recommends the use of fully

shielded cables when connecting to an external
device.

The Positive Sample Identification software option is required for
using the optional bar code wand, primary sample tube tray, and
Test Scheduler for positive sample identification. With these
components you can scan a bar code label on a primary sample
tube to enter the request into the worklist without using the
keyboard. The system associates the results for a sample with the
bar code label on the primary sample tube. You can also scan
the test requests from bar codes printed on the Test Scheduler.
The optional bar code wand and the Test Scheduler can:
schedule calibrators
schedule bar-coded patient samples and controls
scan bar codes assigned to all the tests, profiles, calibrators,
and controls defined for the Express Plus, which allows for
faster, more efficient worklist scheduling
enter data and select options without using the keyboard,
which helps eliminate typing errors

For more information, refer to the Express Plus Positive Sample
Identification (PSID) System Addendum, shipped with the
software option.
D-6
Accessories and Options (Continued)

This software option is required for communicating between a
host Express Plus and any of the following peripheral devices:
a remote Express Plus
a 664 Fast 4 System
an external computer, such as a Laboratory Information
System (LIS)
For complete information about cabling, configuring the ports,
enabling the software option, and programming for
communications, refer to the following documents that are
shipped with the communications software option:
Express Plus Communications Enabling Disk Instructions
Appendix F, LIS Communications, provides a brief overview of
the Express Plus communications options.
To order accessories or software options, call Bayer Diagnostics.
Refer to Appendix C, Service and Supplies, for Bayer
Diagnostics addresses and telephone numbers, and part numbers
for placing your orders.
Specifications
E-1
Appendix E Specifications
Page
About This Section
E-3
System Specifications
E-3
Electrical Ratings and Requirements
E-7
Environmental Conditions
E-7
Microprocessor (CPU)
E-8
Outputs
E-8
Polychromator
E-8
Size and Weight
E-9
System Screen
E-9
Specifications
Specifications
E-3
About This Section

This section lists the specifications for your Express Plus, starting
with agency approvals and general system specifications, then
listing specifications for various components and conditions.
Express Plus systems manufactured after the issue of this manual
meet the requirements of the agencies listed below. Refurbished
systems may not meet all of the specification as listed below.
WARNING
Unauthorized modifications to Express Plus

systems can result in the system not meeting the
specifications listed, may place the operator at
risk of injury, and may cause the reporting of
inaccurate results.
Agency Approvals
European Union: CE Marking
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC

EN 55011:1991 Limits and Methods of Measurement of
Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific,
and Medical (ISM) Radio-Frenquency Equipment (Group 1,
Class B, Conducted and Radiated Emissions).
EN 50082-1:1992 Electromagnetic Compatibility - Generic
Immunity Standard Part 1: Residential, Commercial and
Light Industry
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
EN 61010-1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment
for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use
Federal Communication Commission (FCC)
Electromagnetic Interference for Computing

Equipment Class A
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1261 Standard for Safety, Laboratory Equipment

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
C212.2 No. 151, Laboratory Equipment
E-4
Specifications
Agency Approvals
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
1010-1 International Standard, Safety Requirements for

Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and
Laboratory Use
Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS)
T1001, Japanese Industrial Standard, General Requirements

for Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment
System Specifications
These specifications apply to the Express Plus, in general, and are
shown in alphabetical order:
Application
determination of biochemical components

in serum, plasma, and urine
Bar Code Wand
hand-held, movable, bar code scanner that

emits an infrared light beam to read bar
code labels
Controls
up to six defined controls for each of 48

tests; the system automatically calculates
the statistics for controls
Cuvette Feeder
holds and automatically feeds a maximum

of 39 cuvette strips (3 rows of 13 cuvette
strips)
Cuvette Magazines
13 cuvette strips in each cuvette magazine

(up to three cuvette magazines can be
loaded at one time for 195 test wells)
Cuvette Preheater
regulated at a temperature of 30.0 or

37.0 C (0.2 C) to heat the cuvette
strips
Cuvette Strip
disposable, cuvette strip with five cuvette

wells (maximum fill volume of 450 L,
minimum read volume of 250 L, and a
cuvette pathlength of 1 cm1%)
Cuvette Track
aluminum process track, thermostatically

controlled by four thermal electric
devices (TEDs) to maintain the defined
temperature of 30.0 or 37.0 C (0.2 C)
(the system can have up to 30 reactions in
process at any time)
Specifications
E-5
System Specifications (Continued)

Cuvette Waste
Drawer
fitted with a disposable, biohazard liner

that collects up to 39 cuvette strips and
their waste material
Data Storage
40-Mbyte hard disk drive and 3.5-inch,

double-sided, high-density floppy disk
drive for backing up files and loading
programs
Digital Diluter
500 L syringe, positive displacement

syringe drive
Dispense Volume
maximum dispense volume is 400 L

(reagent, sample, and diluent volume)
Distilled Water
removable container that holds up to one

liter of distilled water (water must be at
temperatures from 15 to 37 C)
Bottle
External Printer
(optional) connects to parallel interface
Imaging Optics
plano convex lens, biconvex lens, and

concave holographic grating
Keyboard
keyboard with numeric keypad and

special function keys
Language
user-selectable
Light Source
6-volt, 20-watt, quartz-halogen lamp
Machine Controller
four printed circuit boards containing

multiple, 8-bit, microcontroller processors
Pediatric Cup
disposable sample cup with dead volume

of 50 L (nominal), maximum fill
volume is 650 L
Polychromator
polychromator with concave holographic

grating and diode array that measures and
detects monochromatic light at seven
wavelengths
Primary Sample
13x75, 13x100, 16x75, and 16x100 mm
Tubes
Primary Sample
Tube Tray
20-position tray for holding sample tubes
E-6
Specifications

Probe Assembly
temperature-controlled, water-jacketed
probe for heating reaction mixtures
before dispensing into cuvette wells;
probe tip uses a replaceable stainless steel
aspiration tip and fluid detector
Productivity
180 tests per hour, maximum (singlereagent systems)
Reaction Temp.
reaction mixture is temperature

controlled at 30.0 or 37.0 C (0.2 C)
Reaction Time
10 seconds to 600 seconds
Reagent Bar
fixed, noncontact, bar code scanner that

emits an infrared light beam at reagent
bar code labels to determine reagent
name and position on the reagent tray
Code Scanner
Reagent Bottles
glass, plastic, or special bottles with or

without bar code labels
Reagent Capacity
up to 26 bottles can be loaded into any

position or in any order on the reagent
tray (single- or multi-test reagents)
Reagent Transport
electromechanical device that supports

and rotates reagent tray. The transport
optical detectors determine the position
of the transport.
Reagent Tray
26-position reagent tray
Reagent Volume
3.0 to 400.0 L per selected test, 3.0 to

150.0 L second or third addition (at
least 50.0 L of total fluid volume is
required for each dispense)
Sample Cup
disposable sample cup; maximum fill

volume is 900 L
Sample Transport
electromechanical assembly with a drive

hub, drive hub support, printed circuit
board with optical detectors, and motor
Sample Integrity
40-position sample tray for disposable

sample cups (standard tray), tray cover,
and humidifier ring used to copntrol
sample evaporation and degradation
Tray
Sample Volume
3.0 to 30.0 L per test, with automatic

sample predilution of up to 100:1
Specifications
E-7

Sampling Capacity
40-position sample cup tray or optional,

20-position primary sample tube tray
Startup
immediate operation from Standby; 2 to

12 minutes until the first result
Stat Assays
available at any time
System Control
16-bit microprocessors, with 40-Mbyte

hard disk drive, 3.5-inch, double-sided,
high-density floppy diskette drive for
storage, 9-inch screen (CRT), and thermal
printer
System Printer
built-in thermal printer (40 or 80

characters per line)
System Type
random-access chemistry system that can

analyze 180 tests per hour, on singlereagent assays
Test Calibration
up to 10 defined calibrators for each of 48

tests; user-programmable calibration
interval of 0 to 999 hours
Test Selection
arbitrary selection; programmable assay

order for washing between interfering
tests
Thermal Electric
maintain the temperature for the cuvette

track and the cuvette preheater water
bath at 30.0 or 37.0 C (0.2 C)
Devices (TEDs)
Water Bath
contains 450 mL of specially conditioned

circulating fluid; fluid temperature is
regulated at 30.0 or 37.0 C (0.2 C)
Wash Station
small container connected to a peristaltic

pump for washing the probe and
removing waste water
Waste Bottle
removable container that holds up to one

liter of waste water
Wavelengths
340, 380, 405, 510, 540, 570, and 600 nm
E-8
Specifications
Electrical Ratings and Requirements

System Input
Nominal Voltages
100 - 120 V 10% or

220 - 240 V 10%
Fuse Ratings
100 V
120 V
200 V
240 V
7 amp, T (SB)
6.25 amp, T (SB)
4 amp, T (SB)
3.15 amp, T (SB)
Power Consumption
780 VA, maximum
Electrical Requirements
dedicated line recommended
Environmental Conditions
NOTE
Ambient operating temperature shifts greater

than 3 C from the test calibration
temperature can affect test performance and
require you to recalibrate the tests.
Intended Environment
Indoor use only; altitude up to

2000 m
Ambient Operating
18.0 to 30.0 C (tests run at

37.0 C)
Temperatures
18.0 to 28.0 C (tests run at

30.0 C)
Relative Humidity
40 to 80% (maximum),
noncondensing
Storage Temperature
0.0 to 50.0 C
Installation Category
II (refer to IEC 1010-1)
Specifications
E-9
Microprocessor (CPU)
Main CPU
multiple, high-integration, 16-bit

microprocessors and numeric data coprocessor
Mass Storage
3.5-inch, hard disk drive and 3.5-inch,

double-sided, high-density, floppy disk
drive
Parallel
one parallel port for an external printer
RS-232C
three serial ports
Screen
9-inch (22.9 cm), amber on gray
System Printer
thermal printer (11.0 cm), 40 or 80

characters per line
Accuracy
2.0 nm
Bandwidth
9 nm
Detector
multichannel, silicon photodiodes
Light Source
6-volt, 20-watt, quartz-halogen lamp
Linearity
1%
Measurement
bichromatic measurement
Noise
S.D. of 8 x 10-5
Range
0.00 to 2.50 optical density (absorbance)
Reference Band
0.6 A maximum, -0.3 A minimum all

wavelengths (no cuvette)
Stray Light
less than 0.3% from all sources at all

wavelengths
Warmup Time
20 minutes from powerup
Wavelengths
340, 380, 405, 510, 540, 570, and 600 nm
Outputs
Polychromator
E-10
Specifications
Size and Weight

Depth
59.0 cm (23.2 inches)
Height
56.0 cm (22.0 inches)
Weight
72.6 kg (160.0 pounds)
Width
103.0 cm (40.6 inches)
Screen
9-inch (diagonal measure)
Characters
80 characters per line, ASCII upper and

lower case character set and some special
characters
Display Lines
24 Lines
Equipment
System Screen
Classification
LIS Communications
F-1
Appendix F LIS Communications
Page
About This Section
F-3
Interfacing with a Laboratory Information System (LIS)
F-4
Connecting the Express Plus to an LIS
F-5
Physical Interface
F-5
Software Interface
F-6
Transmitting and Receiving Data
F-7
Uploading Patient and Control Results to an LIS
F-7
Downloading a Worklist to the Express Plus
F-8
Transferring Results Incrementally
F-9
Transferring Worklists Incrementally
F-9
LIS Communications
LIS Communications
F-3
About This Section

This section provides information about interfacing a Express
Plus to a Laboratory Information System (LIS).
Proceed in this order when interfacing the Express Plus to an
LIS:
1. Complete the physical connections.
2. Power up the system.
3. Complete the system software setup.
Also refer to these manuals for information about interfacing
your Express Plus to a computer:
Express Communications Manual, written for operators and
programmers who have a Express Plus interfaced to a

Laboratory Information System (LIS) or other external devices.
Express Interface Specifications Manual, written for
programmers who will configure a Laboratory Information

System (LIS) or other external devices to interface with a
Express Plus.
Express Plus Communications Enabling Disk Instructions,
written for operators who will install the software option on

the Express Plus and configure the ports at the Options/
Communications Options screen.
F-4
LIS Communications

The Express Plus supports three communication protocols to
transfer data between the Express Plus and an LIS. The features,
advantages, and disadvantages of each protocol are discussed in
Table F-1.
The services of a software engineer are required to implement the
selected protocol. Design specifications for the communication
protocols are included in the Express Interface Specifications
Manual.
The type of data received at the Express Plus from an LIS is
worklist information for a patient sample assay or a quality
control assay. The type of data sent from the Express Plus to an
LIS is results of a patient sample assay or a quality control assay.
Table F-1. Communication Protocols
Data Handling
LIS 2
LIS 2 Plus
LIS 3
Application
appropriate for
applications
that do not
require LIS
device
interaction with
the Express
Plus
appropriate for
applications
that do not
require LIS
device
interaction with
the Express
Plus
appropriate for
applications
that requires
LIS device
interaction with
the Express
Plus
use in an
environment
with low
transmission
errors
use in an
environment
with low
transmission
errors
Application Layer
unidirectional
unidirectional
bidirectional
Data Format
outputs data
with parameter
delimiters and
field separators
outputs data
with parameter
delimiters and
field separators
outputs data
with parameter
delimiters and
field separators
Data Link Layer
unidirectional
bidirectional
bidirectional
Error Detection
and Error
Recovery
no error
detection or
recovery
error detection
and no error
recovery
error detection
and error
recovery
Message
Acknowledgment
no
yes
yes
error detection
and recovery
allows you to
use this
protocol in an
environment
with a high
noise level
LIS Communications
F-5

(Continued)
When implementing the protocol, consider what to do with the

data at the LIS:
Do you want to use the data for billing purposes?
Do you want to use the data to keep track of patients, systems,
quality control results, or other?

Do you want to transfer the data to another area of the
hospital, to the operating room, or to intensive care?
Connecting the Express Plus to an LIS

The interface consists of two parts:
the physical interface, which defines the hardware needed to
connect the system to the LIS

the software interface, which describes the software setup that
enables the data transfer
Physical Interface
The LIS device connects to the Express Plus through one of the
three serial RS-232 ports on the Express Plus.
NOTE
Bayer Diagnostics recommends the use of fully

shielded cables when connecting to an external
device.
The RS-232 ports on the Express Plus are standard 25-pin,

D-type, male connectors (DB-25P). The connection of the
Express Plus to an LIS device uses a standard 25-pin, D-type,
female connector (DB-25S). Pins 1, 2, 3, and 7 are enabled for
the Express Plus connection. Refer to Table F-2 for the Express
Plus pin layout.
Table F-2. Pin Layout for Enabled Pins*
Pin Number
RS-232 Signal
Protective Ground
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Signal Ground
The remaining pins are not enabled for the cable sold by
Bayer Diagnostics.
F-6
Software Interface
LIS Communications
The characteristics (parameters) of the RS-232 ports are defined

by the communications configuration. You configure the
parameters for each port at the Options/Communications
Options screen shown in Figure F-1. Refer to Table F-3 for a
list of the software interface options that show at the
Options/Communications Options screen.
Table F-3. Software Setup Options
Option
Description
Selections
Port No.
select the port number interfaced

to the LIS
1, 2, or 3
Device
select the communication protocol
LIS 2
LIS 2 Plus
LIS 3
Baud Rate
indicate the baud rate of the LIS
9600
4800
2400
1200
600
300
110
Stop Bits
select the number of stop bits the

LIS expects at the end of a
transmission
1
1
2
Parity
select the parity the LIS uses to

determine if the data transmission
is in the proper form
ODD
EVEN
MARK
NONE
SPACE
Data Bits
select the number of bits that

define a character of information
7 or 8
Xon/Xoff
does not apply
No
Enable Polling?
select to verify that the Express

Plus is still communicating with a
connected LIS 3 device
Yes or No
Transmit Results
Incrementally?
select Yes if the Express Plus will

automatically send results as they
are calculated, manually-entered, or
when received from remote devices
to a connected LIS 2 device, LIS2
Plus device, or LIS 3 device
Yes or No
LIS Communications
F-7
Transmitting and Receiving Data

The function keys available on the Options/Communications
Options screen enable you to begin transmitting or receiving
worklists and data. This section explains the function keys that
are available when you use a host computer.
The Express Plus communications package supports batch and
incremental transfers of results data for LIS 2, LIS 2 Plus, and
LIS 3 devices. The communications package also supports batch
worklist transfers that an LIS 3 device can perform. This section
briefly explains each type of data and worklist transfer.
For more information, refer to your Express Communications
Manual.
Uploading Patient and

Control Results to an
LIS
The F2 Upload Results function key on the Options/

Communications Options screen enables you to transmit patient
and Q.C. results from an Express Plus to a host computer, such
as an LIS 2, LIS 2 Plus, or LIS 3.
An upload of results consists of a series of individual sets of
results for patient and control samples, with each set including
the following:
sample identification information
demographics
all results that are available for the sample
any flags associated with each result
All results that exist in the worklist transmit to the host

computer. The Express Plus does not distinguish requests that
were locally-entered from those that were downloaded. Results
for any partially-completed requests are also transmitted. The
only requests that will not be transmitted are those without
results available.
An Express Plus can transfer batch results to any LIS device.
Results are ready for batch transfer when you press F2 Upload
Results at the Options/Communications Options screen at the
Express Plus. The system transfers all available results to the LIS
device. When an LIS 3 device requests results, the Express Plus
transfers only currently available results from downloaded and
locally-entered requests.
F-8
Downloading a Worklist
to the Express Plus
LIS Communications
LIS 3 provides two-way communication and has the ability to

transmit worklist information from the LIS to the Express Plus,
including test requests for patient and control samples.
The F1 Download Worklist function key on the Options/
Communications Options screen enables you to transmit a
worklist from the host computer to the Express Plus. This
function is available if:
a host computer is connected to the Express Plus
the host computer is a LIS 3 device
the worklist for the Express Plus is not full
the Express Plus is not assaying tests
The transmitted worklist consists of a series of requests for

patient and control samples. Each request includes sample
identification information, required tests for the sample, and any
demographics information.
Batch worklist transfers begin when you press F1 Download
Worklist at the Options/Communications Options screen at the
Express Plus. The set of samples and tests that the Express Plus
retains in memory is used to determine the worklist sent from the
LIS 3 device. You can continue to download batch worklists
until the Express Plus worklist is full.
If the Express Plus worklist is full, do not perform a batch
download. The worklist from a batch transfer is not
automatically deleted from the memory of the Express Plus;
however, you can edit the requests at the Express Plus.
LIS Communications
Transferring Results
Incrementally
F-9
Transferring incremental results allows an Express Plus to

transmit results to an LIS device if:
a result is manually-entered at the Express Plus
an Express Plus calculates a final result for an assay (all

necessary reruns are complete)
a host Express Plus receives a result from a remote Express

Plus
You can enable or disable the incremental transfer of results to

an LIS device at the Transmit Results Incrementally? screen field
at the Options/Communications Options screen. The value for
this screen field depends on the configuration of your LIS device.
Refer to the instruction manual for your LIS device for more
detailed information.
If you select Yes, the Express Plus automatically sends results as
they are calculated, manually-entered, or received from a remote
Express Plus to the LIS device. If you select No, the Express Plus
does not automatically send results as they are calculated,
manually-entered, or received from a remote Express Plus to the
LIS device.
Transferring Worklists
Incrementally
When you press START at a remote Express Plus, the system

performs a routine reagent and sample verification. After you
accept the reagent and sample loading, the remote Express Plus
requests an incremental download of the worklist if there is an
LIS 3 device connected to the remote Express Plus. If you have
a local worklist on the remote Express Plus, the set of samples
indicated to the LIS 3 device does not include any samples for
which the remote Express Plus has a request.
When the remote Express Plus requests the worklist from the
connected LIS 3 device the following occurs:
the remote Express Plus indicates to the LIS 3 device that it is

ready to receive a worklist
the remote Express Plus describes the set of samples that are
loaded, and the set of tests that it can run (determined from
the reagents that are loaded on the system)
The remote Express Plus receives a worklist of the indicated tests

and samples. Only patient and control samples can be
downloaded from the LIS 3 device (calibrators and blanks are
not included in the downloaded worklist).
After receiving worklist information from an LIS 3 device, the
remote Express Plus begins the worklist. The downloaded
requests are are automatically deleted at the end of a run on the
remote Express Plus.
LIS Communications
G-1
Appendix G Relocation Instructions
Page
About This Section
G-3
Space and Power Requirements
G-4
Selecting the Right Location
G-4
Understanding Power Requirements
G-5
Relocating Your System
G-6
Preparing to Relocate the Express Plus
G-6
G-9
Checking for Correct Relocation
G-10
Preparing for Operation
G-11
Checking for Correct Operation After Relocating
G-14
G-2
G-3
About This Section

This section explains how to relocate your Express Plus and
includes:
space and power requirements
instructions for relocating your system
relocation checklist
instructions for verifying post-relocation system operation
post-relocation operating checklist
CAUTION
Your Bayer Diagnostics Field Service Engineer

initially installs your Express Plus.
Unauthorized installation can damage your
system and void any applicable warranty or
service contract.
G-4
Space and Power Requirements

The following paragraphs contain information about the space
and power requirements for the Express Plus. Follow these
requirements when relocating your system to a new location.
Selecting the Right

Location
WARNING
Do not operate your system in a flammable

atmosphere. Components within the system can
generate sparks that can cause an explosion.
CAUTION
Improper installation and maintenance of your

system can cause radio frequency interference
(RFI). Ensure that your Bayer Diagnostics
Field Service Engineer initially installs your
Express Plus.
Use the following guidelines to select a location for your system.

Select a location:
free of dust, drafts, vibrations, strong magnetic fields, and
temperature shifts greater than 3 C from the test calibration

temperature
where the system has its own electrical line
with adequate ventilation, and a sufficient flow of air to the
back of the system

with an ample work area. Ensure that there is at least a
2.0-inch (5.1-cm) clearance on all sides of your system. The

dimensions of the Express Plus are:
Width:
103 cm (40.6 inches)
Depth:
59.0 cm (23.2 inches)
Height:
56.0 cm (22.0 inches)
Understanding Power
Requirements
G-5
Connect your system to a grounded, AC electrical outlet. Refer

to Table G-1 for information about power requirements and fuse
ratings.
WARNING
To avoid a shock hazard, ground the system using

a three-prong, grounded, electrical outlet. If you
use an adapter, the adapter also requires proper
grounding.
Voltages present in the Express Plus are capable
of producing severe, electrical shock. Place the
system power switch in the OFF (O) position,
and disconnect all line cords, before you replace
a fuse.
CAUTION
Connecting the system to an improperly rated

power source can permanently damage the system
and void your warranty. Ensure that your
installation location conforms to the system
voltage requirements.
Ensure that you install a correctly-rated fuse in
your Express Plus. Installing an incorrectly-rated
fuse can damage the system and void your
warranty.
Table G-1. Fuse Ratings

Voltage
Fuse Rating
100 VAC, 10% (50/60 Hz)
7.00 A, T (SB)
120 VAC, 10% (50/60 Hz)
6.25 A, T (SB)
200 VAC, 10% (50/60 Hz)
4.00 A, T (SB)
240 VAC, 10% (50/60 Hz)
3.15 A, T (SB)
NOTE
If you need to operate your system on another

voltage, call your Field Service Engineer to set
the system voltage.
G-6
Relocating Your System

The following paragraphs explain how to relocate the system. To
relocate the system, do the following:
prepare the system for relocation
move the system, then connect the cables to the system
startup the system in the new location
CAUTION
Your Bayer Diagnostics Field Service Engineer

initially installs the system in a location that
ensures optimum operation. If you relocate the
system to another room, do not install it in a
location where there are rapid temperature
changes (in direct sunlight or near an air
conditioner). Photometer components are
affected by temperature changes, causing
unreliable and inaccurate test results.
Ambient temperature shifts 3 C from the test
calibration temperature can affect test
performance and require you to recalibrate the
tests.
Preparing to Relocate
the Express Plus
To relocate your system:

1. At the Main Menu, press F7 Diagnostics/Maintenance.
2. At the Diagnostics/Maintenance menu screen, press F2 Manual
Operations.
3. To begin the manual operations, press ENTER.

4. At the Manual Operations screen, press F2 End-of-Day, then
follow the instructions shown in the prompt area.
5. When the system completes the End-of-Day function, place
the power switch in the OFF (O) position.
the Express Plus
(Continued)
G-7
6. Disconnect and remove from the system (refer to

Figure G-1):
all cables
keyboard
bar code wand (optional accessory)
Figure G-1. Preparing the System for Relocation
7. Remove the sample tray and reagent tray (refer to

Figure G-1).
BIOHAZARD
Always wear gloves when you remove the

cuvette waste drawer or discard the biohazard
liner from the cuvette waste drawer.
8. Open the front panel, then remove the distilled water bottle,
the waste bottle, and the cuvette waste drawer (refer to
Figure G-2).
Figure G-2. Removing the Bottles and Cuvette Waste Drawer
G-8
the Express Plus
(Continued)
9. Insert the caps into both vent holes for the water bath.
(Vent holes are located to the right of the digital diluter,
and one vent hole is open (uncapped) during normal
operation.) Refer to Figure G-3.
Figure G-3. Installing Caps in the Water Bath Vent Holes
10. Move the system to the new location.
G-9
After you relocate the system, connect the system cables:

WARNING
To avoid a shock hazard, ground the system

using a three-prong, grounded, electrical outlet.
If you use an adapter, the adapter also requires
proper grounding.
CAUTION
Connecting the system to an improperly rated

power source can permanently damage the
system and void your warranty. Ensure that
your installation location conforms to the system
voltage requirements.
1. Place all power switches in the OFF (O) position.

2. Connect the system cables (refer to Figure G-4).
3. Connect the keyboard cable and the optional bar code wand
to the system (refer to Figure G-1).
Figure G-4. Connecting the Cables
G-10
Checking for Correct Relocation

Use this checklist to ensure that you correctly relocated your
system:
(
The system is relocated in an area free of dust, drafts,

vibrations, strong magnetic fields, and sudden
temperature changes.
The system is connected to a dedicated power line using

a three-prong, grounded, electrical outlet.
The system is connected to a properly-rated power

source.
Sufficient space exists for proper ventilation and the

minimum space requirements are met.
Correctly-rated fuses are installed in the fuseholder.
The keyboard cable is connected.
The bar code wand is connected.
All other system cables are properly connected.
G-11
Preparing for Operation

After you connected the cables, as described in the Connecting
the Cables procedure, power up the system and verify correct
operation:
1. Remove the cap from one of the water bath vent holes
located to the right of the digital diluter (ensure that the
second hole remains capped).
2. Place the power switch in the ON (I) position (refer to
Figure G-4).
The system automatically performs the startup diagnostics. If
the system detects an error (shown on the system printer), the
system stops operating at the end of the startup diagnostics.
When the startup diagnostics successfully complete, the
system shows the Startup screen.
3. Install the reagent tray on the reagent transport, then install
the reagent cover (refer to Figure G-5).
Figure G-5. Installing the Reagent Tray
G-12
Preparing for Operation (Continued)

4. Load at least five sample cups on the sample tray.
5. Moisten the blue felt ring from the sample tray cover using a
laboratory wash bottle and distilled water.
If the felt ring leaves visible water droplets on the tray, it is
too wet. Lightly blot excess moisture from the felt.
6. Install the sample tray on the system, then install the sample
tray cover.
BIOHAZARD
To prevent contaminating yourself and other

laboratory personnel, treat all waste material as
potentially pathogenic.
To avoid a potentially biohazardous condition,
wear gloves when you remove the cuvette waste
drawer or the biohazard liner.
7. Open the front panel, then remove the distilled water bottle,
waste bottle, and cuvette waste drawer (refer to Figure G-6).
8. Fill the distilled water bottle with fresh, distilled water.
9. Safely discard any waste water from the waste bottle.
Figure G-6. Replenishing the Supplies
G-13
Preparing for Operation (Continued)

10. Install the distilled water bottle and the waste bottle in the
system.
11. If used cuvettes are in the cuvette waste drawer, remove the
biohazard liner from the drawer, then discard the liner (refer
to Figure G-6).
12. Install a clean biohazard liner in the cuvette waste drawer,
then install the cuvette waste drawer and close the front
panel (refer to Figure G-6).
13. Install clean cuvettes in the cuvette feeder (refer to
Figure G-6).
14. Ensure that there are at least five cuvettes in the cuvette
preheater row, then press ENTER.
15. At the Main Menu screen, press F7 Diagnostics/Maintenance.
17. At the Manual Operations screen, press ENTER.
The system homes the probe and transports.
18. Press F1 Start-of-Day.
The system primes the digital diluter and initializes other
system components.
19. When the Start-of-Day functions complete, press EXIT twice
to return to the Main Menu.
NOTE
You can select any of the Express Plus programs

at this point, but you cannot run tests until the
status is Ready (about 20 minutes from when you
power up the system).
G-14
Checking for Correct Operation After Relocating

Use this checklist to ensure that your system is operating
correctly following the relocation:
(
The water bath vent holes are capped correctly (one vent
open, one vent capped).
The system power switch is in the ON (I) position.
The system successfully performed the startup

diagnostics.
The reagent tray and reagent cover are installed.
There are at least five sample cups on the sample tray,

and the sample tray and the sample cover are installed in
the system.
There is fresh, distilled water in the distilled water bottle

and the bottle is installed in the system.
The waste bottle is empty and installed in the system.
There is a clean biohazard liner installed in the cuvette

waste drawer and the drawer is installed in the system.
The system successfully performed the Start-of-Day

functions.
Index-1
Index
A
Absorbance (see also Response),
A-1
bichromatic, 3-9, A-1
blank, 7-13
calculating, 2-20, 3-63-8,
3-133-16
checks, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11
corrected, 3-8, 3-9
differences, 3-9
flags (errors), 3-10, 3-15, 3-29,
3-30, 6-396-41, 7-19, 7-20,
7-417-43, 8-15, 10-45, 10-47,
10-49, 10-50, 10-51,
10-6110-63
high (see also Absorbance
Limits), 6-35
blank, 3-8
primary, 3-10
secondary, 3-10
limits, 3-10, 3-11, 3-15, 4-42, 4-44,
5-14, 10-45, 10-49, 10-50,
10-51, 10-61, 10-62
low (see also Absorbance
Limits), 6-35
blank, 3-8
primary, 3-10
secondary, 3-10
monochromatic, 3-9, 3-10
range, E-8
reported, 7-41
readings, 3-8, 3-9
sample blank, 3-9
zero, 3-6, 3-7
Accessories (see also Software
Options), A-1, D-3D-6
bar code, 2-4, 2-30, 6-14, 6-16, C-8,
D-5
documents for, 1-9, 5-6, C-8
external printer, 2-30, 6-47, C-8,
D-5
ordering, C-8
Test Scheduler (bar code chart),
2-4, 6-14, 6-16, C-8, D-5
Actual,
C.V., 4-28, 7-33, 7-35, 7-37, 7-38,
9-9
Mean, 4-28, 4-30, 7-33, 7-35, 7-37,
7-38
S.D., 4-28, 4-30, 7-33, 7-35, 7-37,
7-38
Age, Patient, 4-9, 6-20
Aligning,
lamp, 9-28
probe tip, 9-31
Alphanumeric Keys, 2-25, A-1
Alternating Current, 1-7
Alphanumeric Keys, 2-25, A-1
Alternating Current, 1-7

ALT Key, 2-27
Analyzer (see System)
Array, Diode, 2-20, 2-40
Aspiration,
position, 2-37, 2-38
tip, 2-15, 2-16, 2-372-39
Assay (see Test)
Automatic,
printing of results, 5-8
reruns, 2-5, 3-19, 3-31, 3-32,
3-36, 4-46, 6-34, 6-35, 6-40
sample dilution, 2-5, 3-31, 3-32,
6-34, 6-35, 6-40
test shutdown, 3-36, 4-52, 5-6,
A-1
B
Backing Up, 9-4
calibration files, 4-494-51,
9-459-48
data files, 4-494-51, 5-375-40,
9-459-48
definitions, 9-45
patient results, 9-45
program files, 4-51, 9-459-48
Q.C. databases, 4-51, 5-38, 5-39,
9-459-48
system calibrations, 4-51,
9-459-48
worklist data, 9-45
BACKSPACE (DELETE) Key,
2-27, 6-7, 6-46
Bar Code, 2-3, A-1
accessories, 2-4
blank, 4-39, 4-40, 5-34
calibrator, 4-38, 4-40, 5-19, 5-31
control, 4-37, 4-40, 5-20, 5-29
features, 2-4
fluid (1 or 2), 4-42, 5-17, 5-18
labels, 6-23, 6-26, C-7, C-8, D-5
profile, 4-36, 4-45, 5-25
reader failure, 10-19
reagent, 4-40, 5-17, 6-23, 6-26, 6-27
diluent, 4-45
scanner, 2-4, 2-10, 2-22, 2-23,
2-37, 6-30, A-1, E-5
test, 4-47, 5-14, 5-15, 5-18, 5-19
wand (hand-held), 1-7, 2-4, 2-22,
2-24, 2-30, 6-14, 6-16, A-1,
C-8, D-5, E-3, G-7, G-9
cables, G-7, G-9
Batch Testing, 6-16
Bayer Diagnostics, Contacting, C-3
C-4
Bichromatic Absorbance, 3-9, 3-13,
A-1
Biconvex Lens, 2-20, 2-21, 2-40
Bin, Cuvette (see Cuvette
Waste Drawer )
Index-2
Index (Continued)
Biohazard,
liner, 2-18, 2-19, 6-53
warning, 1-5, 1-7, A-1, B-2, B-3,
B-5
Blanked Linear Curve Type, 3-17,
3-20, 3-28
reblanking, 3-20, 3-30, 4-9, 4-15,
4-17, 4-18, 4-20, 6-15, 6-17,
6-18, 7-7, 7-8, 7-107-13
Blanks (see also Zero Calibrator), 3-8,
3-17, 3-28, 4-9, 6-29
absorbance, 7-13
bar codes, 4-39, 4-40, 5-34
defining, 4-34, 4-39, 4-40, 5-11,
5-335-35
erasing, 4-34, 5-33, 5-35
limits (see Absorbance, Limit)
modifying, 4-34, 5-11, 5-335-35
reruns, 3-31, 3-32, 6-34
sample, 3-9, 6-18
scheduling in worklist, 2-30, 6-18
storing, 5-34, 5-35
Bottle,
distilled water, 2-12, 2-13, 2-37,
2-38, 6-5, 6-12, 6-53, 10-29,
A-3, C-5, E-4
reagent, 2-10, 2-38, 4-45, 6-23,
6-27, 6-51, E-5
special, 4-40, 4-45, 4-47
types, 2-37, 4-40, 4-47, 5-17, 6-27
waste, 2-13, 2-37, 2-38, 6-5, 6-13,
6-38, 6-53, 10-43, A-9, C-5,
E-6
C
Cables, 10-68, B-1, G-7, G-9
bar code wand, G-7, G-9
communication, 2-31,
10-1910-21, 10-27, 10-41,
10-5410-57, 10-59, 10-68, F-5
external printer, 10-30, C-5
keyboard, 10-31, 10-67, G-9
power (line), 9-5, 9-25, 9-30,
10-66, C-5, G-5, G-7, G-9
Calculations,
absorbance, 2-20, 3-63-8,
3-133-16
calibration curve, 3-173-27, 7-10,
7-12, 7-13, 7-15, 7-18
factors, 3-28, 7-17
nonlinearity, 3-13, 3-14
noise, 3-133-15
normalizing slope, 3-26
polychromatic, 3-8
precision (system), 4-58,

4-59, 9-9, 9-10
Q.C. statistical, 3-40, 4-28,
4-29, 7-33
rates, 3-22
reblanking (see also
Reblanking), 3-20, 7-10
response values (delta
absorbance), 3-13, 3-15,
3-16, 7-17, 7-41
results, 2-40, 3-11, 4-48
sample blank, 3-9
Calibration,
curve (see Calibration Curve)
data (see Calibration Curve;
Calibration Data Program)
failures, 3-30
files,
backing up, 9-459-48
restoring, 9-499-51
flags (errors), 3-29, 7-177-20
intervals, 4-35, 4-40, 4-44, 7-7
last, 4-17
methods, 3-173-27
parameters (see Calibration
Curve)
probe tip, 4-57, 4-62, 9-319-35,
10-42, 10-43
run-time report, 7-177-20
scheduling, 6-17, 6-18, 7-12, 7-13
status (see Calibration Status)
system,
backing up, 4-51, 9-459-48
restoring, 4-51, 9-499-51
Calibration Curve (see also
Calibration Data Program;
Calibrators), 4-15, 7-13
accepting, 4-15, 7-14, 7-15
calculations (see Calculations)
data (see also Calibration Data
Program), 3-173-27, 4-17,
7-17
editing, 4-15, 7-14, 7-15
erasing, 4-15, 7-14, 7-15
expired (see also Calibration
Status), 6-18, 7-16
failure, 3-30, 10-45, 10-47
flags (error), 3-27, 3-29, 3-30,
3-32, 7-177-19, 10-46,
10-6110-63
invalid, 3-19, 4-15, 4-20, 7-13,
7-14, 7-15, 10-46
linear, 3-173-21, 3-28, 6-17, 6-18
messages, 3-23, 3-25, 3-26, 4-18,
10-61, 10-63
nonlinear, 3-223-25, 6-17
Index-3
Index (Continued)
normalizing, 3-26, 4-15, 4-17, 4-20,
6-15, 7-11, 7-12, 7-13
parameters (see also Calibration
Data Program), 4-16, 4-17,
4-18, 7-7, 7-11
qualitative, 3-27, 3-28
quantitative, 3-223-25
reblanking, 3-20, 3-30, 4-9, 4-15,
4-17, 4-18, 4-20, 6-15, 7-1, 7-2,
7-5, 7-7, 7-8, 7-10, 7-11, 7-12,
7-13
recalculating, 4-15, 7-14, 7-15
rejection, 4-18
reviewing, 7-10, 7-11
rerunning, 4-15, 7-14, 7-15
S.D., 3-19, 3-23, 4-16, 7-17, 10-61
stored, 7-13
type, 3-28, 4-16
linear, 3-173-21, 3-28, 6-17,
6-18
nonlinear, 3-223-25, 6-17
qualitative, 3-27, 3-28
quantitative, 3-223-25, 3-28
waiving an expired, 7-16, 10-47
Calibration Data Program, 2-35,
4-144-20, 7-1, A-1
data, 4-17, 7-14
Data screen, 4-15
concentrations, 4-16
data, 4-17
error, 4-17
functions, 4-15, 7-15
replicate S.D., 4-19
responses, 4-17
map, 4-14
features, 7-5
fields, 4-164-19
functions, 4-15
Parameters screen, 4-154-19
curve parameters, 4-164-18
curve S.D., 4-16
functions, 4-15
status, 4-164-18, 4-20
status (see also Calibration Status),
reviewing, 6-15, 7-107-12
Calibration Status, 4-16, 4-20, 6-15,
6-27, 7-107-12, 7-17, 10-44
current, 4-20, 6-15, 7-15, 10-45
expired, 4-15, 4-20, 6-28, 7-15,
7-16, 10-45
incomplete, 4-15, 4-20, 7-12, 7-14,
7-15, 10-45
in process, 4-20, 10-46
invalid, 3-19, 4-15, 4-20, 6-40,
7-13, 7-14, 7-15, 10-46
locked, 10-46
none, 4-20, 7-12, 10-46
normalized, 3-26, 4-15, 4-17, 4-20,

6-15, 7-11, 7-12, 7-13, 10-46
reblanked, 4-18, 4-20, 6-15, 7-12,
7-13, 10-47
reviewing, 6-15, 7-107-12
scheduled, 4-20, 7-12, 10-47
waived, 7-16, 10-47
Calibrators, 7-7, 7-8
bar code, 4-38, 4-40, 5-19, 5-31
concentrations, 4-16, 4-38, 4-40,
6-18, 7-8, 7-17
defining, 4-34, 4-35, 4-38, 4-44,
5-305-32, 6-18, 7-8
erasing, 4-34, 5-30
modifying, 4-34, 5-11, 5-30, 5-32
name, 4-40, 7-17
normalizers, 7-8, 7-13
replicates, 4-44, 7-7, 10-63
rerunning, 6-34, 7-12, 7-19, 7-20
response, 7-17
run-time/error log, 5-8, 7-17
scheduling, 2-30, 6-17, 6-18, 7-13,
7-15, 7-18, 10-47
test-specific, 6-17, 6-18
multi-test, 6-17, 6-18
selecting, 5-305-32
zero, 3-8, 3-28, 7-13, 7-20
CANCEL Key, 2-27, 2-33, 5-7, 5-16,
6-7
CAPS LOCK Key, 2-27
Carryover, Reagent, 2-5, A-1
Caution, 1-5, A-1, B-4
Central Processing Unit (CPU),
2-23, 2-40, A-2, E-8
Changing (see Editing or Modifying)
Checks, Absorbance, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11
Cleaning,
digital diluter syringe, 9-4,
9-209-24, 10-28
end-of-day, 6-6, 6-516-53
fan filters, 9-4, 9-13, 9-14
probe tip, 9-4, 9-7, 9-9, 10-43
system, 6-53, 9-6
cabinet, 9-4, 9-6
screen, 9-4, 9-6
tubing, 9-4, 9-9, 9-11, 9-12
Clock, System, 5-5, 5-6, 6-11, A-9
Coefficient of Variation (C.V.), 7-33,
7-35, 7-37, 7-38, 9-9, 9-10
Collated Patient Reports (see
Reports)
Communications (see also
Laboratory Information
System),
cables, 2-31, 10-1910-21, 10-27,
10-41, 10-5410-57, 10-59,
10-68, F-5
Index-4
Index (Continued)
documents, 1-9, 2-31
errors, 8-218-23, 10-5310-59
fields, 4-524-56
options, 4-49, 4-50
ports, 2-23, 4-54, 10-53, 10-56,
10-58, 10-68, A-2, F-5
protocols, F-4
software option, 2-31, 4-49, 4-56,
5-6, C-8, D-6, F-1
Status screen (see also Status
Program), 8-5, 8-20
fields, 8-218-23
messages and errors, 8-21, 8-23,
10-5310-59
subsystem, 2-22, 2-23, A-2
components, 2-23
Components,
communication subsystem,
central processing unit (CPU),
2-23, 2-40, A-2, E-8
hard disk drive, 2-23, A-4
ports, 2-23, A-2
reagent bar code scanner, 2-4,
2-10, 2-22, 2-23, 2-37, 6-30,
A-1, E-5
cuvette subsystem,
biohazard liner, 2-18, 6-13, 6-53
edge detector, 2-17, 2-39
feeder, 2-17, 2-39, 6-13, E-3
magazine, 2-17, 6-13, A-2, E-3
preheater, 2-17, E-3
strips, 2-17, 2-39, 2-40, A-2
track, 2-17, 2-39, 2-40, A-2, E-4
waste drawer, 2-18, 2-40, 6-13,
6-53, A-2, E-4
fluid subsystem,
digital diluter, 2-13, 2-14, 2-37,
2-38, 2-39, A-3, E-4
distilled water bottle, 2-13, 2-37,
2-38, 6-5, 6-12, 6-53, 10-29,
A-3, C-5, E-4
in-line filter, 2-12, 2-37, 2-38,
9-18, 9-19
peristaltic pumps, 2-12, 2-37,
2-38, 9-15
probe, 2-15, 2-16, 2-37, 2-38,
2-39, A-6
solenoid valve, 2-13, 2-14, 2-37,
2-38
syringe, 2-13, 2-14
wash station, 2-12, 2-37, 2-38,
E-6
waste bottle, 2-13, 2-37, 2-38,
6-15, 6-13, 6-38, 6-53, 10-43,
A-9, C-5, E-6
water bath, 2-13, 2-38, A-9, E-6
operation, 2-8, 2-372-40
photometer subsystem,
photometer board, 2-20, 2-21,
2-40
photometer optics, 2-20, 2-21,

2-40
reagent subsystem,
reagent bottle, 2-10, 2-38, 4-45,
6-23, 6-27, 6-51, E-5
reagent transport, 2-10, 2-37,
A-7, E-5
reagent tray, 2-10, 2-37, 2-38,
6-23, 6-256-27, A-7, E-5
reagent tray cover, 2-10, 6-23,
6-256-27
sample subsystem,
sample transport, 2-9, 2-37, A-8,
E-5
sample tray, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11,
6-16, 6-24, 6-256-27, A-8,
E-6
sample tray cover, 2-9, 2-10,
2-11, 6-16, 6-24
user interface subsystem,
floppy disk drive, 2-25, 2-26,
A-3
keyboard, 1-7, 2-252-29, A-4,
E-4
paper advance key, 2-25, 2-28,
6-8, 6-9, A-5
screen, 2-25, 2-32, A-8
system keys, 2-25, 2-28, 2-29,
6-8, 6-9, A-9
system printer, 2-25, 2-28, 5-8,
A-9, E-6
COMPOSE Key, 2-27
Concentrations, Calibrator, 4-16,
4-38, 4-40, 6-18, 7-8, 7-17
Control Rules,
combination, 3-35
evaluation, 7-21, A-2
flowchart, 3-36
Q.C. statistics, 3-40
sample interpretation, 3-373-39
summary of, 3-33
1-2s, 3-34
1-3s, 3-34
2-2s, 3-34
4-1s, 3-34
10x, 3-35
Control(s),
bar code, 4-37, 4-40, 5-29
defining, 5-16, 5-20, 5-21,
5-275-29
erasing, 4-34, 5-16, 5-20, 5-21,
5-275-29
flags, 6-35
modifying, 4-34, 5-11, 5-275-29
scheduling, 2-30
selecting, 5-20, 5-21, 5-27, 5-29,
7-217-23
specifications, E-3
Convex Lens, Plano, 2-20, 2-21, 2-40
Copying Data (see Backing Up)
Index-5
Index (Continued)
Cord, Power (see Cables)
Correcting Absorbances, 3-8, 3-9
CPU (Central Processing Unit),
2-23, 2-40, A-2, E-6
CTRL Key, 2-27
Cumulative Statistics (see
Q.C. Statistics)
Cup, Sample, 2-38, 6-16, A-8, E-4,
E-5
Current,
alternating, 1-7
dark, 3-7, 3-8
sample, 3-7, 3-8
zero, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8
Current (Curve Status), 4-20, 6-15,
7-12, 7-15, 10-45
Cursor, 2-32, 2-33, A-2
Cursor Keys, 2-26, 2-33, 6-7, A-2
Curve (see Calibration Curve),
data (see Calibration Curve;
Calibration Data Program)
Cuvette,
biohazard liner, 2-18, 6-13, 6-53
edge detector, 2-17, 2-39
feeder, 2-17, 2-39, 6-13, E-3
handling system, 2-18
magazine, 2-17, 6-13, A-2, E-3
preheater, 2-17, E-3
strips, 2-17, 2-39, 6-13, A-2, E-3
subsystem components, 2-17, 2-39
track, 2-17, 2-39, 2-40, A-2, E-4
waste drawer, 2-18, 2-40, 6-13,
6-53, A-2, E-4
C.V. (Coefficient of Variation), 7-33
7-35, 7-37, 7-38, 9-9, 9-10
D
Dark Current, 3-7, 3-8
Data (see also Patient Results
Program; Results),
calibration (see also Calibration
Data Program), 3-173-27,
4-17, 7-14, 7-15, 7-17
DAU Applications Guide,
1-8
files, 4-494-51, 5-375-40
backing up, 4-51, 5-375-40,
9-459-48
restoring, 4-51, 9-499-51
management, 2-6, 2-7
quality control (Q.C.) (see also
Q.C. Statistics Program),
2-7
selection, 3-11
outlier rejection, 3-11, 3-12
substrate depletion, 3-9, 3-11
storage specification, E-4
Default Printer, 5-8

Definitions,
backing up, 9-459-48
restoring, 9-499-51
storing, 5-23
Definitions Program, A-3
blanks,
defining, 4-34, 4-39, 4-40, 5-11,
5-335-35
erasing, 4-34, 5-33, 5-35
features, 5-33
functions, 4-39
modifying, 4-34, 5-335-35
screen, 4-39, 5-33
selecting, 5-335-35
Selection screen, 4-39, 5-34
storing, 5-34, 5-35
calibrators,
concentrations, 4-35, 4-38, 5-31,
7-7
defining, 4-34, 4-35, 4-38, 4-43,
5-11, 5-305-32, 6-18, 7-8
erasing, 4-34, 5-30, 5-32
features, 5-30
functions, 4-38
modifying, 4-34, 5-305-32
screen, 4-38, 5-30
selecting, 5-305-32
storing, 5-32
controls,
control limits, 4-37, 5-28, 5-29
defining, 4-34, 5-11, 5-16, 5-20,
5-21, 5-275-29
erasing, 4-34, 5-27, 5-29
features, 5-27
functions, 4-37
modifying, 4-34, 5-275-29
screen, 4-47, 5-27
selecting, 5-20, 5-21, 5-27, 5-29,
7-217-23
storing, 5-28
features, 4-32
fields, 4-404-48
map, 4-33
profiles,
defining, 4-34, 5-11, 5-245-26
erasing, 4-34, 5-245-26
features, 5-24
functions, 4-36
modifying, 4-34, 5-245-26
screen, 4-36, 5-24
selecting, 5-24, 5-26
selection, 4-36, 5-25
storing, 5-26
tests,
assay order, 4-34, 4-35, 4-48,
5-11, 5-16, 5-18
calibrator concentrations, 5-11,
5-16, 5-19, 7-8, 7-9
controls, 5-11, 5-16, 5-20, 5-21,
7-217-23
Index-6
Index (Continued)
defining, 4-34, 5-115-13,
7-7
erasing, 4-34, 5-115-13,
5-23
features, 5-12
functions, 4-34
modifying, 4-34, 5-115-13
parameters, 4-34, 4-35,
5-11, 5-145-23, 7-7, 7-8, 7-22
QCSystems, 4-35, 5-11, 5-16,
5-22, 5-23, 7-24
reagents, 5-11, 5-16, 5-17
storing, 5-23
type, 5-16
DELETE Key (BACKSPACE), 2-27,
6-7, 6-46
Deleting (see Erasing)
Demographics (see Patient,
Demographics)
Depletion, Substrate, 3-9, 3-11
Diagnostics, 2-34
Diagnostics/Maintenance Program,
4-4, 4-574-63, A-3
features, 4-57
start-of-day, 4-58, 6-116-13
map, 4-57
screens,
Lamp Alignment, 4-60
Precision Check, 4-59, 9-89-10
Probe Tip Calibration, 4-62
System Version, 4-61
Digital Diluter, 2-13, 2-37, 2-38, 2-39,
A-3, E-4
adjusting, 9-22, 9-40
cleaning, 9-4, 9-209-24, 10-28
priming, 9-19, 9-41
replacing,
syringe, 9-369-41
tubing, 9-379-41
removing air from tubing, 9-41
Diluent,
reagent, 4-40, 4-42, 4-45, 4-46, 5-17
sample, 4-47, 5-17
bar code, 5-17
bottle type, 4-40, 4-45, 4-47, 5-17
volume, 4-42, 4-47, 5-17, E-4
Diluter (see Digital Diluter)
Dilution, Sample,
automatic, 2-5, 3-31, 3-32, 3-36,
6-34, 6-35, 6-40
manual, 2-6, 6-36
parameters, 2-5
ratios, 2-5, 5-17, 6-34
Diode Array, 2-20, 2-40
Disk Drive, 2-22, 2-23, 2-25, A-4
Disk, Floppy, 2-25, 2-26, A-3
format, 4-51, 5-38
Disk Options Screen, 4-31

backup,
data files, 4-51, 5-38
program files, 4-51, 5-38
system calibrations, 4-51, 5-38
format floppy disk, 4-51
restore,
data files, 4-51, 5-42
system calibrations, 4-51, 5-42
Dispense Volume, E-4
Distilled Water Bottle, 2-12, 2-13,
2-37, 6-5, 6-12, 6-53, A-3, C-5,
E-4
Documents, Reference, 1-8
E
Edge Detector, Cuvette, 2-17, 2-39
Editing,
blanks, 4-34, 5-11, 5-33, 5-35
calibration curve, 4-15, 7-14, 7-15
calibrators, 4-34, 4-35, 5-11,
5-305-32
controls, 4-34, 5-27, 5-29
profiles, 4-34, 5-11, 5-245-26
requests, 6-46
sample results, 6-46
tests, 4-34, 5-115-13, 5-23
Electrical,
ratings, E-7
requirements, E-7
End-of-day,
cleaning, 6-6, 6-52, 6-53
procedures, 6-516-53
Endpoint Test, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 5-16
response, 3-21
ENTER Key, 2-33, 6-7
Environmental Conditions, E-7
Erasing,
definitions,
blanks, 4-34, 5-33, 5-35
calibrators, 4-34, 5-30, 5-32
controls, 4-34, 5-27, 5-29
profiles, 4-34, 5-245-26
tests, 4-34, 5-115-13, 5-23
normalized curve, 3-24
stored worklist, 6-14, 6-15
Error Conditions, 10-6410-67
Errors (see also Messages; Flags),
communications, 8-21, 8-23,
10-5310-59
correcting during a run, 6-37,
6-38, 10-65
fatal disk, 10-70
flags (see Flags)
reagent status, 10-4410-47
Index-7
Index (Continued)
run-time, 10-510-10, 10-6010-63
sample status, 10-4810-51
status, 10-510-10
system details status, 10-1910-43
EXIT Key, 2-33, 6-7
Expected,
C.V., 7-33, 7-35, 7-37, 7-38, 9-9
Mean, 4-29, 4-30, 5-20, 5-21, 7-22,
7-23, 7-33, 7-35, 7-37, 7-38
S.D., 4-29, 4-30, 7-33, 7-35, 7-37,
7-38
Expired (Curve Status) (see also
Calibration Status), 6-27,
7-16
External Printer, 2-30, A-3, C-5,
D-5, E-4
cables, 10-30, C-5
documents for, 1-9, 2-30
F
Factors, Calculation, 3-28, 7-17
Failure,
bar code reader, 10-19
calibration curve, 3-30, 10-45,
10-47
normalization/reblanking, 3-30
power, 10-68, 10-69
waste pump, 6-12
Fan Filters,
cleaning, 9-4, 9-13, 9-14
Fatal Disk Error, 10-70
Files, Calibration (see Calibration,
Files)
Filters,
fan, 9-4, 9-13, 9-14
in-line, 2-12, 2-37, 2-38, 9-18, 9-19
Fixed Function Keys, 2-33, 6-7
Flags (errors),
absorbance, 3-10, 3-15, 3-29, 3-30,
6-396-41, 7-19, 7-20,
7-417-43, 8-15, 10-45, 10-47,
10-49, 10-50, 10-6110-63
automatic rerun and dilution,
6-34, 6-35
calibration, 3-29, 7-177-20
calibration curve, 3-27, 3-29, 3-30,
3-32, 7-177-19, 10-46,
10-6110-63
data selection, 3-11, 3-12
run-time report, 6-40, 6-41,
7-417-43, 10-6010-63
Floppy Disk Drive, 2-25, 2-26, A-3
Fluid,
bar code, 4-42, 5-18
subsystem components, 2-122-15,
2-372-39
wash, 5-17
Fluid-level Detector Wire, 2-15,
2-37, 2-38
Function Keys, 2-26, 2-27, A-4

Function Key Zone, 2-34
Fuse, 1-7
hazards, 9-30
ratings, 9-30
replacing, 9-30, 9-31
H
Hard-disk Drive, 2-23, A-4
Heading, Report, 5-8
HELP Key, 6-7, 8-3
Help Program, 2-36, 4-3, 8-3, 8-4,
A-4
features, 8-3
operating, 8-3
screen example, 8-4
selecting, 8-3
High Absorbance (see Absorbance,
High; Absorbance, Limits)
I
Incomplete (Curve Status), 4-15,
4-20, 7-12, 7-14, 7-15, 10-46
In-line Filter, 2-12, 2-37, 2-38, 9-18,
9-19
In Process (Curve Status), 4-20,
7-12, 10-46
Interface Protocols,
documents for, 1-9
Interval,
calibration, 4-35, 4-40, 4-44, 7-7
normalization, 7-7
reblanking, 7-7
Invalid (Curve Status), 3-19, 4-15,
4-20, 6-40, 7-13, 7-14, 7-15,
10-46
K
Keyboard, 1-7, 2-252-29, A-4, E-4
cables, 10-31, 10-67, G-9
Keys,
alphanumeric, 2-25, A-1
ALT, 2-27
BACKSPACE (DELETE), 2-27,
6-7, 6-46
CAPS LOCK, 2-27
COMPOSE, 2-27
CTRL, 2-27
cursor, 2-26, 2-33, 6-7, A-2
DELETE (BACKSPACE), 2-27,
6-7, 6-46
fixed-function, 2-33, 6-7
SELECT, 1-6, 2-33, 6-7
ENTER, 2-33, 6-7
EXIT, 2-33, 6-7
Index-8
Index (Continued)
CANCEL, 2-27, 2-33, 5-7, 5-16,
6-7
MAIN MENU, 2-33, 4-3, 6-7
TAB, 2-27, 2-33
function (F1F8), 2-26, 2-27, A-4
HELP, 6-7
paper advance, 2-25, 2-28, 6-8, 6-9,
A-5
PAUSE (see System Keys)
PRINT, 6-7, 6-22, 7-36
PRINT SCRN, 6-7
SHIFT, 2-27
START (see System Keys)
STATUS, 6-7, 6-37
STOP (see System Keys)
system, 2-25, 2-28, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9,
A-9
PAUSE, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9
START, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9, 6-30,
6-38
STOP, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9
Kinetic Tests, 3-11, 3-13, 3-14, 5-16
L
Labels, Bar Code, 6-23, 6-26, C-7,
C-8, D-5,
Laboratory Information System (LIS),
F1F9
communications protocols, F-4
connecting, F-5, F-6
physical interface, F-5
software interface, F-6
data,
receiving, F-7
transferring,
incremental results, F-9
worklists, F-9
transmitting, F-7, F-8
documents for, F-3, F-4
Lag Time, 5-17, A-4
Lamp,
adjusting, 9-28, 9-29
aligning, 4-60, 9-28, 9-29
assembly, 9-27
quartz-halogen, 2-20, 2-40
replacing, 9-269-29
Lens,
biconvex, 2-20, 2-21, 2-40
plano convex, 2-20, 2-21, 2-40
Levey-Jennings (see Q.C. Statistics
Program)
Lifetime,
C.V., 4-29, 7-33, 7-37, 7-38
Mean, 4-29, 5-21, 7-23, 7-33, 7-37,
7-38
S.D., 4-29, 4-30, 7-33, 7-37, 7-38
Light Source (see Lamp)
Limits, Absorbance (see
Absorbance, Limits)
Linear Curve Type, 3-173-21,

3-28, 6-17, 6-18
blanked, 3-17, 3-20, 3-28
enzyme, 3-21, 3-28
limited, 3-21, 3-28
Line Cord, 9-5, 9-25, 9-30, 10-66,
C-5, G-5, G-7, G-9
Liner, Biohazard (see Biohazard
Liner)
LIS (see Laboratory Information
System)
Load Alternate Program, 4-4,
4-64, A-4
features, 4-64
map, 4-64
Loading,
reagent tray, 6-23, 6-25, 6-26, 6-27
sample tray, 6-24, 6-25
single samples, 6-31, 6-32
stats, 6-31, 6-32
Locked (Curve Status), 10-46
Log,
calibrator control, 5-8, 7-41, 10-60
error, 5-8, 7-41, 10-60
maintenance, 9-4
result, 5-8, 7-41, 10-60
trouble, 10-3
Low Absorbance (see Absorbance,
Low; Absorbance, Limits)
M
Main Menu, A-4
key, 2-33, 4-3, 6-7
map, 4-5, 4-6
Maintenance Tasks, Corrective,
9-259-51
backing up files, 9-459-48
calibrating the probe tip,
9-319-35
filling the water bath, 9-42, 9-43
hazards, 9-25
replacing,
digital diluter syringe, 9-369-41
fuses, 9-30, 9-31
lamp, 9-269-29
printer paper, 9-44, 9-45
probe tip, 9-319-35
resetting the system, 9-51
restoring files, 9-499-51
Maintenance Tasks, Preventive,
9-49-23
cleaning,
digital diluter syringe, 9-4,
9-209-24, 10-28
fan filters, 9-4, 9-13, 9-14
probe tip, 9-4, 9-7, 9-9, 10-43
screen, 9-4, 9-6
system cabinet, 9-4, 9-6
Index-9
Index (Continued)
system tubing, 9-4, 9-9, 9-11,
9-12
hazards, 9-5
precision check, 4-58, 4-59,
9-89-10
replacing,
in-line filter, 9-18
wash pump tubing, 9-159-17
waste pump tubing, 9-159-17
Manual,
dilutions, 2-6, 6-36
reruns, 2-6, 6-36
Map (see Software Map)
Mean,
actual, 4-28, 4-30, 7-33, 7-35, 7-37,
7-38
establishing, 5-26
expected, 4-29, 4-30, 5-20, 5-21,
7-22, 7-23, 7-33, 7-35, 7-37,
7-38
lifetime, 4-29, 5-21, 7-23, 7-33,
7-37, 7-38
Menu, 2-32
Messages,
4-18, 10-61, 10-63
communications, 8-218-23
error, 10-510-10
run-time report flags, 6-40, 6-41,
7-417-43, 10-6010-63
status, 10-510-10
system detail, 10-1310-16
Methods, Calibration,
3-173-27
Microprocessor, E-8
Modifying,
blanks, 4-34, 5-11, 5-335-35
calibrators, 4-34, 5-11, 5-305-32
controls, 4-34, 5-11, 5-275-29
profiles, 4-34, 5-11, 5-245-26
reagent loading, 6-27
requests, 6-46
sample,
loading, 6-27
results, 6-46
tests, 4-34, 5-115-23
Monochromatic Absorbance, 3-9,
3-10
Multi-test Calibrators, 6-17, 6-18
N
Noise,
calculations, 3-133-15
flags, 6-35, 6-40, 7-19
None (Curve Status), 4-20, 7-12,
10-46
Nonlinear,
calculations, 3-13, 3-14
calibration curve, 3-223-25, 6-17
parameters, 3-22, 3-28
curve types,
1-Logit 4, 3-24, 3-28
2-Logit 5, 3-24, 3-28
3-Exponential 5, 3-25, 3-28
4-Polynomial 5, 3-25, 3-28
flags, 6-35, 6-40
Normalized (Curve Status), 3-26,
4-15, 4-17, 4-20, 6-15, 7-11,
7-12, 7-13, 10-46
Normalizers, 7-8, 7-13
Normalizing, A-5
4-20, 6-15, 7-11, 7-12, 7-13,
10-46
failures, 3-30
intervals, 7-7
slope, 3-26
two-point, 3-26
O
Off-system Test, 5-14
Operating Temperature, 5-6
Operational Sequence, 2-372-40
Optics, Imaging, 2-20, 2-21, 2-40
Options Program, 4-4,
4-494-56, A-5
communications, 4-49, 4-50
data fields, 4-524-56
disk options, 4-51
features, 4-49
map, 4-49
printing options, A-6
data fields, 5-8
defining, 5-7, 5-8
modifying, 5-7, 5-8
screen, 5-7
selecting, 5-8
reset system, 4-51, 9-51
system options,
data fields, 5-6
defining, 5-55-7
modifying, 5-55-7, 7-25
screen, 5-5
selecting, 5-6
test order, 4-50
Ordering,
accessories, C-8
replacement parts, C-5
service kit parts, C-6
supplies, C-7
Outlier Rejection, 3-11, 3-12, A-5
flags, 6-35, 6-40
Outputs, E-8
Over Flags, 6-35, 6-40
Index-10
Index (Continued)
P
Paper Advance Key, 2-25, 2-28, 6-8,
6-9, A-5
Parameters,
calibration (see Calibration Curve)
calibration curve (see also
Calibration Data Program),
4-164-18, 7-7
nonlinear curve, 3-22
reagent, 5-16
test, 5-145-23
Parts,
replacement, C-5
service kit, C-6
Patient,
age, 4-9, 6-20
comments, 6-20
demographics, 6-20, A-3
ID, 6-20
name, 6-20
results,
backing up, 9-45
sex, 6-20
Patient Results Program, 4-4,
4-114-13, A-5
data fields, 4-12
editing, 6-45, 6-46
features, 6-43
finding requests, 6-48
functions, 4-12, 6-436-48
map, 4-11
printing results, 6-476-49
reviewing results, 6-43, 6-44
screen, 4-12, 4-13
PAUSE Key, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9
Pending Status (see also Status
Program), 6-33
Peristaltic Pumps (see Pumps)
Photodiode Array, 2-20, 2-40, A-5
Photometer Subsystem Components,
2-20, 2-21, A-5
Placekeeping Zone, 2-34, A-5
Plano Convex Lens, 2-20, 2-21, 2-40
Plots (see Q.C. Statistics Program)
Polychromator, 2-20, 2-21, 2-40, A-5,
E-4, E-8
calculations, 3-8
Port,
communications, 2-23, 4-54, 10-53,
10-56, 10-58, 10-68, A-2, F-5
parallel, 2-23, E-8
probe inlet, 2-15
probe inlet/outlet, 2-15
RS-232, 2-23, E-8
Positive Sample Identification
(PSID) Option, 2-30, 6-14,
6-16, 6-24, A-6, C-8, D-5
documents for, 1-9, 2-30, C-8
features, 2-30
loading sample tube tray, 6-24
scheduling samples, 6-16
Power,
cable, 9-5, 9-25, 9-30, 10-66, C-5,
G-5, G-7, G-9
failure, 10-68, 10-69
switch, 6-11, 6-53, 9-11, A-6
Precision Check, 4-58, 4-59,
9-89-10
Predilution Ratio, 5-17
Preparing Worklist, 6-146-22
Preventive Maintenance,
9-49-23
Primary,
sample tube, 2-30, A-6
sample tube tray, 2-9, A-6, E-5
wavelength, 3-8, 3-9, 7-19
Printer,
default, 5-8
external, 1-9, 2-30, 5-8, 10-30, A-3,
C-5, D-5, E-4, E-8
paper, 9-449-45
system, 2-25, 2-28, 5-8, A-9, E-6
Printing Options, 4-50, A-6
data fields, 5-8
defining, 5-7, 5-8
modifying, 5-7, 5-8
screen, 5-7
selecting, 5-8
sample results, 6-476-49
PRINT Key, 6-7, 6-22, 7-36
PRINT SCRN Key, 6-7
Probe, 2-15, 2-16, 2-37, 2-38, 2-39,
A-6
assembly, 2-16, E-5
biohazard, 2-15
calibration constants report, 9-35
ports, 2-15
safety guard, 2-15
thermistor, 2-15
tip (aspiration), 2-15, 2-16, 2-37,
2-38, 2-39
aligning, 9-31
calibrating, 9-319-35, 10-42,
10-43
cleaning, 9-4, 9-7, 9-9, 10-43
replacing, 9-319-35
Profile(s), A-6
bar code, 4-36, 4-45, 5-25
defining, 4-34, 5-245-26
erasing, 4-34, 5-245-26
modifying, 4-34, 5-245-26
Selection screen, 4-36, 5-25
storing, 5-26
Program, 2-32, 2-35, A-6
Calibration Data (see also
Calibration Data Program),
4-4, A-1
Index-11
Index (Continued)
Definitions (see also Definitions
Program), 4-4, A-3
(see also Diagnostics/
Maintenance Program), 4-4,
A-3
files,
backing up, 4-51, 9-459-48
restoring, 9-499-51
Help (see Help Program)
Load Alternate (see also Load
Alternate Program), 4-4, A-4
Options (see also Options
Program), 4-4, A-5
Patient Results (see also Patient
Results Program), 4-4, A-5
Q.C. Statistics (see also
Q.C. Statistics Program),
4-4, A-7
software map, 2-35, 2-36
Status (see also Status Program),
A-9
Worklist (see also Worklist
Program), A-10
zone, 2-34, A-6
Prompts, 2-32, A-6
Prompt Zone, 2-34, A-6
Protocols, Communications, F-4
PSID (Positive Sample Identification)
Option, 2-30, 6-14, 6-24, A-6,
C-8, D-5
documents for, 1-9, 2-30
features, 2-30
loading sample tube tray, 6-24
scheduling samples, 6-16
Pumps, Peristaltic, 2-12, 2-37, 2-38,
9-15
Q
Q.C. Databases,
backing up, 4-51, 5-38, 5-39,
9-459-48
deleting data, 7-44
restoring, 5-41, 9-49, 9-51
Q.C. Statistics Program, 4-4
4-214-31, 7-217-44, A-7
calculating, 3-40, 4-284-30, 7-33
control rules, 3-333-39, A-2
cumulative status, 4-27
data,
deleting, 7-44
modifying, 7-27, 7-307-32
printing, 7-27
reports, 7-3, 7-357-38
selecting, 7-27, 7-30, 7-32
viewing, 7-3, 7-26, 7-27
Data screen, 2-7, 4-24
Details screen, 4-274-30
functions, 4-24
print functions, 7-35
features, 2-7, 4-21, 7-6, 7-26
flags, 7-417-43
functions, 4-23
Levey-Jennings plots,
Details screen, 7-287-32
functions, 4-25
modifying, 7-287-32
printing, 7-29
sample interpretation, 3-373-39
screen, 2-7, 4-25, 7-28
viewing, 7-3, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29,
7-31
map, 4-22
QCSystems screen, 4-26, A-7
data fields, 4-28
screen, 4-23
special considerations, 3-40
Summary Statistics screen, 2-7,
4-26
functions, 4-26
printing, 7-34
selecting, 7-34
QCSystems Codes, 5-11, 5-16,
5-22, 5-23, 7-3, A-7
defining, 5-16, 5-22, 5-23
method code, 5-22
modifying, 5-16, 5-22, 5-23
printing, 7-39, 7-40
reagent code, 5-22
selecting, 5-16, 5-22, 5-23
test code, 5-22
units code, 5-22
Qualitative Curve Type, 3-27, 3-28
Quality Control (see Q.C. Statistics)
Quantitative Curve Type,
3-223-25, 3-28
Quartz-Halogen Lamp, 2-20, 2-40
R
Random Access Testing, 6-16
Range, Absorbance, E-8
Rates, Calculation, 3-22
Ratio Test, 5-14, A-7
Readings, Absorbance, 3-8, 3-9
Reaction,
temperature, E-5
time, E-5
Reading Status, 2-34
Ready Status, 2-34
Reagent,
Applications Guides, 1-8,
bar code, 4-40, 5-17, 6-23, 6-26,
6-27
Index-12
Index (Continued)
bar code scanner, 2-4, 2-10, 2-22,
2-23, 2-37, 6-30, A-1, E-5
bottles, 2-10, 2-38, 4-45, 6-23, 6-27,
6-51, E-5
capacity, E-5
carryover, 2-5, A-1
defining, 5-11, 5-16, 5-17
diluent, 4-40, 4-42, 4-45, 4-46, 5-17
loading, 6-23, 6-25, 6-26, 6-27, 6-30
screen, 7-16
modifying, 5-11, 5-16, 5-17
selecting, 5-11, 5-16, 5-17
status (see Status Program)
errors, 10-4410-47
subsystem components (see also
Components), 2-10
transport, 2-10, 2-37, A-7, E-5
tray, 2-10, 2-37, 2-38, 6-23, 6-25,
6-27, A-7, E-5
tray cover, 2-10, 6-256-27
volume, 5-17, E-5
Reblanked (Curve Status), 4-18,
4-20, 6-15, 7-12, 7-13, 10-47
Reblanking, A-7
blanked linear curves, 3-20
calculations, 3-20, 7-10
4-15, 4-17, 4-18, 4-20, 6-15,
7-1, 7-2, 7-7, 7-8, 7-10, 7-11,
7-12, 7-13
failures, 3-30
intervals, 7-7
parameters, 4-164-18
status, 4-17, 4-18, 4-20
stored curves, 6-17, 7-2
Recalculating Curves, 4-15, 7-14, 7-15
Receiving Data (LIS), F-7
Rejection, Calibration Curve, 4-18
Relocation, System, G-1G-14
Replacement Parts, C-5
Replacing,
digital diluter, 9-369-41
fuses, 9-30, 9-31
in-line filter, 9-18, 9-19
lamp, 9-269-29
printer paper, 9-44, 9-45
probe tip, 9-319-35
tubing, 9-159-17,
Replicates, Calibrator, 4-44, 7-7,
10-63
Report,
collated patient, 2-6, 6-476-49,
A-1
headings, 5-8
run-time, 2-6, 6-396-41, A-8
Request Number, 6-16
Rerunning,
blanks, 3-31, 3-32, 6-34
calibration curves, 4-15, 7-14, 7-15
calibrators, 6-34, 7-12, 7-19, 7-20
samples, patient, 6-346-36
Rerun(s),
automatic, 2-5, 3-19, 3-31, 3-32,
3-36, 4-46, 6-34, 6-35, 6-40
diluted, 2-5, 3-31, 3-32, 3-36, 4-46,
5-17, 6-34, 6-35, 6-40
dilution ratio, 4-46 5-17
flags, 3-32, 6-35, 6-40, 6-41, 7-20
manual, 2-6, 6-36
Reset System, 4-51, 9-51
Response,
calibrator, 7-17
values (delta absorbance),
3-133-16, 7-17, 7-41
calculating, 3-133-16
Restoring,
data files, 4-51, 5-415-43,
9-499-51
Q.C. data, 5-41, 9-499-51
system calibrations, 4-51,
9-499-51
Results (see also Data),
blanked linear curve, 3-20
calculations, 2-40, 3-11, 4-48
enzyme linear curve, 3-21
limited linear curve, 3-21
patient (see also Patient Results
Program), 4-11
backing up, 9-45
precision check, 9-10
reports,
collated patient, 2-6, 6-476-49
run-time, 2-6, 6-396-41, A-8
Reverse Video, 2-33, A-7
Reviewing,
calibration,
curve, 7-10, 7-11
status, 6-15, 7-107-12
pending samples, 6-33
Q.C. data, 7-417-43
run-time,
error flags, 7-177-20, 7-417-43
reports, 6-39
results, 6-396-41
scheduled samples, 6-33
Rule(s), Control (see Q.C. Statistics
Program)
Running Status, 2-34
Run-time,
error log, 5-8, 7-17, 10-60
reports, 2-6, 6-396-41, A-8
calibrator, 5-8, 7-177-20
errors, 10-510-10, 10-6010-63
S
Safety Summary, B-1B-5
Sample(s),
absorbance, 3-9
blanking, 3-9
Index-13
Index (Continued)
cup, 2-38, 6-16, A-8, E-4, E-5
diluent, 4-47, 5-17
diluting manually, 6-36
loadlist, 6-22, A-8
reviewing scheduled, 6-33
scheduling, 6-166-19
single, 6-31, 6-32
status, (see Status Program)
transport, 2-9, 2-37, A-8, E-5
tray, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 6-16, 6-24,
6-256-27, A-6, A-8, E-6
capacity, E-6
cover, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 6-16, 6-24
format, 5-6, 5-7
loading, 6-24, 6-25
tube, primary, 2-30, A-6
types, A-8
blank, 2-5, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10,
6-18, 6-19
calibrator, 6-18, 6-19
control, 6-18, 6-19
patient, 6-18, 6-19
volume, 5-17, 6-34, E-6
Sample Subsystem Components
(see also Components), 2-9
Scheduled (Curve Status), 4-20,
7-12, 10-47
Scheduling,
bar-coded patient samples, 2-30
blanks, 2-30, 6-18
calibrators, 2-30, 6-17, 6-18, 7-13,
7-15, 7-18, 10-46
multi-test, 6-17, 6-18
test-specific, 6-17, 6-18
controls, 2-30
manual reruns, 6-36
profiles, 2-30
samples, 6-166-19
tests, 2-30
Screen, Cleaning, (see System,
Cleaning)
Screens (see also Screen Zones), 2-25,
2-32, A-8
Screen Saver Option, 5-6
Screen Zones, A-8
function key, 2-34
placekeeping, 2-34
program, 2-34
prompt, 2-34
status, 2-34
S.D.,
7-17, 10-61
establishing control values, 5-26
Secondary Wavelength, 3-8, 3-9
Selecting,
calibrators, 5-305-32
controls, 5-20, 5-21, 5-27, 5-29,
7-217-23
test parameters, 5-145-23
SELECT Key, 1-6, 2-33, 6-7
Setting Up Tests (see Definitions

Program)
SHIFT Key, 2-27
Shutting Down, 6-516-53
Single Sample Loading, 6-31, 6-32
Slope, Normalizing, 3-26
Software,
installation instructions, 1-8
map, 2-35, 2-36
options, 4-53, 5-6, C-8, D-5, D-6
documents for, 1-9, 2-31, 4-56,
C-8
communications, 1-9, 2-31,
4-49, 4-56, C-8, D-6, F-1
positive sample identification
(PSID), 2-30, 6-14, 6-16, 6-24,
C-8, D-5
Solenoid Valve, 2-13, 2-14, 2-37, 2-38
Special Bottle, 4-40, 4-45, 4-47
Standard Deviation (S.D.)
(see S.D.)
Standards (see Calibrators)
Standby Status, 2-34
START Key, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9, 6-30, 6-38
Start-of-day, 6-116-13, G-13
Startup (see System)
Statistics, Q.C. (see Q.C. Statistics
Program)
Stats, Loading, 6-31, 6-32
Status,
calibration (see Calibration
Status)
diagnostics, 2-34
errors, 10-510-10
messages, 10-510-10
Reading, 2-34
Ready, 2-34
Running, 2-34
Standby, 2-34
Warming up, 2-34
zone, 2-34, A-9
STATUS Key, 6-7, 6-37
Status Program, 2-36, 4-3, 8-18-23,
A-9
communications status,
features, 8-20
functions, 8-23
map, 8-21
screen, 8-20
data fields, 8-6, 8-7
features, 8-5
functions, 8-7, 10-5310-59
map, 8-5
operation, 8-58-23
pending status, 10-52
data fields, 8-18
features, 8-17
functions, 8-19
map, 8-18
screen, 8-17, 10-52
Index-14
Index (Continued)
reagent status,
data fields, 8-12
features, 8-11
functions, 8-13
map, 8-11
screen, 8-11
sample status,
data fields, 8-15,
errors, 10-4810-51
features, 8-14
functions, 8-16
map, 8-15
screen, 8-14
screen, 8-6
system details,
data fields, 8-9
features, 8-8
functions, 8-10
map, 8-8
screen, 8-8
troubleshooting,
10-11, 10-12
Status Zone, 2-34
STOP Key, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9
Storing,
blanks, 5-34, 5-35
calibrators, 5-32
controls, 5-28
profiles, 5-26
tests, 5-23
Substrate Depletion, 3-9, 3-11
Subsystem,
communications, 2-22, 2-23, A-2
cuvette, 2-172-19, A-2
fluid, 2-122-16, A-3
operation, 2-8, 2-372-40
photometer, 2-20, 2-21, A-5
reagent, 2-92-11
sample, 2-92-11
user interface, 2-242-31
Symbols, 1-7
Syringe, Diluter, 2-13, 9-21
System,
application, E-1
calculations, 3-6
calibrations,
backing up, 4-51, 9-459-48
restoring, 4-51, 9-459-51
capabilities, 2-3
cleaning, 6-53, 9-6
cabinet, 9-4, 9-6
screen, 9-4, 9-6
tubing, 9-9, 9-11, 9-12
clock, 5-5, 5-6, 6-11, A-9
conditions, E-7
controls, E-1, E-6
dimensions, E-7, G-4
features, 2-42-7
bar code, 2-4
data management, 2-6, 2-7
dilution and rerun, 2-5, 2-6

reagent carryover reduction, 2-5
hardware replacement,
digital diluter syringe, 9-369-41
fuses, 9-30, 9-31
in-line filter, 9-18, 9-19
lamp, 9-269-29
probe tip, 9-319-35
wash pump tubing, 9-159-17
waste pump tubing, 9-159-17
keys, 2-25, 2-28, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9, A-9
PAUSE, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9
START, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9, 6-30,
6-38
STOP, 2-29, 6-8, 6-9
light source, E-2
maintenance,
corrective, 9-259-51
hazards, 9-25
log, 9-4
preventive, 9-49-23
hazards, 9-5
operating the, 6-36-9, G-11G-14
options (see Options Program)
power switch, 6-53, 9-11, G-11
powerup, 6-11
printer, 2-25, 2-28, 5-8, A-9, E-6
relocating, G-1G-14
resetting, 4-51, 9-51
shutting down, 6-516-53
startup, 6-116-13, A-8, E-6
after fatal disk error, 10-70
after power failure, 10-68, 10-69
preparation, 6-12
screen, 6-11
specifications, E-6
status (see also Status Program),
6-7, 6-33, A-9
Status screen, 6-37
Details screen, (see also Status
Program) 6-37, 6-38
errors, 6-37, 6-38, 10-1310-43
functions, 6-37
troubleshooting (see
Troubleshooting)
tubing,
cleaning, 9-9, 9-11, 9-12
replacing wash pump, 9-159-17
replacing waste pump,
9-159-17
T
TAB Key, 2-27, 2-33
TDM Applications Guide, 1-8
Temperature,
operating, 5-6
reaction, E-5
Index-15
Index (Continued)
Test,
assay order screen, 4-34, 4-35,
4-48, 5-11, 5-165-18
automatic shutdown, 3-36, 4-52,
5-6, A-1
bar code, 4-47, 5-14, 5-15, 5-18,
5-19
calibrating (see Calibration Curve)
name, 5-18
order options, 4-50, 5-9
screen, 5-9
selecting, 5-9
parameters (see Definitions
Program)
types,
DAU, 3-27
endpoint, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15, 5-16
kinetic, 3-11, 3-13, 3-14, 5-16
off-system, 5-14
ratio, 5-14, A-7
two-point, 3-15, 3-16, 3-26, 5-16
Testing,
batch, 6-16
random access, 6-16
Tests (see also Definitions
Program; Worklist Program),
defining, 4-34, 5-115-13, 7-7
erasing, 4-34, 5-115-13, 5-23
modifying, 4-34, 5-115-13
pending status, 6-33
reviewing status, 6-33
selecting, 4-34
Test Scheduler (bar code chart),
2-4, 6-14, 6-16, A-9, C-8, D-5
Test-specific Calibrators, 6-17, 6-18
Thermal Electric Device (TED), E-6
Thermistor, Probe, 2-15
Transferring (LIS),
incremental results, F-9
incremental worklists, F-9
Transmitting Data (LIS), F-7, F-8
Transport,
reagent, 2-10, 2-37, A-7, E-5
sample, 2-9, 2-37, A-8, E-5
Tray,
reagent, 2-10, 2-37, 2-38, 6-23,
6-256-27, A-7, E-5
sample, 2-9, 2-10, 6-16, 6-24,
6-256-27, A-8, E-6
Tray Cover,
reagent, 2-10, 6-256-27
sample, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 6-16, 6-24
Troubleshooting, 10-110-70
correcting,
communications status errors,
10-5310-59
error conditions, 10-6410-67
reagent status errors,

10-4410-47
run-time errors,
10-6010-63
sample status errors,
10-4810-51
system status and detail
errors, 10-1310-43
error messages, 10-510-10
features, 10-2
run-time report flags, 6-40,
6-41, 7-417-43,
10-6010-63
status messages, 10-510-10
system detail messages,
10-1310-16
using pending status, 10-52
Tube, Primary Sample, 2-30, A-6
Tubing,
cleaning, 9-4, 9-9, 9-11, 9-12,
9-209-24, 10-28
in-line filter, 2-12
priming, 6-13, 9-19, 9-41
replacing, 9-159-18, 9-379-41
Two-point Test, 3-15, 3-16, 3-26, 5-16
U
Under Flag, 6-35, 6-41
Components (see also
Components), 2-252-31
V
Value, Response (see Response
Value)
Valve, Solenoid, 2-13, 2-14, 2-37,
2-38
Verifying,
reagent loading, 6-26, 6-27, 6-30
system conditions, 6-25
Volume,
dispense, E-4
reagent, E-5
sample, E-6
W
Waived (Curve Status), 7-16, 10-47
Waiving Expired Curves, 7-16
10-47
Wand, Bar Code (see Bar Code)
Warming Up Status, 2-34
Index-16
Index (Continued)
Warning, 1-5, A-9, B-1, B-2
Wash,
count, 5-17, 5-18
fluid, 5-17, 5-18
pump, 2-12, 2-37, 2-38
pump tubing, replacing, 9-159-17
station, 2-12, 2-37, 2-38, E-6
Waste,
bottle, 2-13, 2-37, 2-38, 6-5, 6-13,
6-38, 6-53, 10-43, A-9, C-5,
E-6
drawer, cuvette, 2-18, 2-40, 6-13,
6-53, E-4
pump, 2-12, 2-38
pump tubing, replacing, 9-159-17
water, 2-38
Water,
bath, 2-13, 2-38, A-9, E-6
filling, 9-42, 9-43
bottle, distilled, 2-12, 2-13, 2-37,
2-38, 6-12, 6-53, 10-29, A-3,
C-5, E-4
Wavelength Flags, 6-35, 6-40, 6-41
Worklist, A-9
backing up, 9-45
entering patient demographics,
6-20
erasing,
requests, 6-21, 6-52
stored worklists, 6-14, 6-15
modifying, 6-20, 6-21
preparing, 6-146-22
reviewing calibration status, 6-15
scheduling,
blank, 2-30, 4-9, 6-18
calibrators, 2-30, 4-9, 6-17, 6-18,
7-13, 7-15, 7-18, 10-46
controls, 2-30, 4-10, 6-18
profiles, 2-30, 4-10, 6-18
samples, 4-10, 6-166-19
tests, 2-30, 4-9, 4-10, 6-146-22
Worklist Program, A-10

data fields, 4-9, 4-10
blanks, 4-9, 4-10
concentrations, 4-9, 4-10
controls, 4-10
demographics, 4-9, 4-10, 6-20
erasing,
requests, 6-21, 6-52
stored worklists, 6-14, 6-15
functions, 4-74-9
map, 4-4, 4-7
modifying, 6-20, 6-21
preparing, 6-146-22
scheduling,
blank, 2-30, 4-9, 6-18
calibrators, 2-30, 4-9, 6-17,
6-18, 7-13, 7-15, 7-18, 10-46
controls, 2-30, 4-10, 6-18
profiles, 2-30, 4-10, 6-18
samples in, 4-10, 6-166-19
tests, 2-30, 4-9, 4-10, 6-146-22
Z
Zero,
absorbance, 3-6, 3-7
calibrator (see also Blanks), 3-8,
3-28, 7-13, 7-20
currents, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8
Zones, Screen (see Screen Zones)

M560 - Man. Operacion PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

M560 - Man. Operacion PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

EXPRESSPLUS

2000 Bayer Corporation.

DEC is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.

All Rights Reserved

1 Using This Manual

About This Section

Who Should Read This Manual

How to Find the Information

Conventions Used in This Manual

Special Terms Used in This Manual

Labels Used on the System

Other Express Plus Documents

2 Understanding the Express Plus

About This Section

Bar Code Features

Reagent Carryover Reduction Feature

Dilution and Rerun Features

Data Management Features

Express Plus Subsystems: Principles of Operation

Express Plus Programs

3 Understanding the System Calculations

About This Section

Blanks and Zero Calibrators

Monochromatic Absorbance Check

Calculating Response Values

Kinetic Test Type

Endpoint Test Type

Two-Point Test Type

3 Understanding the System Calculations (Continued)

Linear Curve Types

Nonlinear Curve Types

Qualitative Curve Type

Summary of Curve Types

Summary of Error Flags and Calibration Failures

Normalization or Reblanking Failures

Summary of Automatic Reruns

Summary of Control Rules

How the Express Plus Uses Control Rules

Using a Combination of Control Rules

Special Considerations for Q.C. Statistics

4 Understanding the Express Plus Programs

About This Section

Using the Main Menu Programs

Patient Results Program

Calibration Data Program

Q.C. Statistics Program

Load Alternate Program

5 Setting Up the Express Plus

About This Section

Setting or Modifying Options

Selecting Definitions Program Options

Defining, Modifying, or Erasing Test Definitions

Defining Test Parameters

Defining Control Values

5 Setting Up the Express Plus (Continued)

Restoring the Data Files

6 Operating the Express Plus

About This Section

Operating the Express Plus

Priming the System

Preparing the Worklist

Erasing a Stored Worklist

Reviewing Calibration Status